Page 11 – Yamaha Music

Click here to learn more about Yamaha wireless headphones.

Illustration showing optimum positioning for near-field monitoring.

Better Monitoring for Better Mixes, Part 1

Written by Mike Levine on November 4, 2020. Posted in Recording. 2 Comments on Better Monitoring for Better Mixes, Part 1

Imagine this scenario: You write a killer song and capture an excellent recording of it, including an awesome lead vocal. Your mix sounds fantastic on the speakers in your studio, and you can’t wait to send it to your friends.

But when you do, instead of the expected compliments, everyone tells you there’s something wrong with the mix. “Nice song, but it sounds weird.”

This is a good indication that there’s a problem with your monitoring setup. It might be because of the speakers you’re using, where you placed them, or how they interact with the acoustics (i.e., the walls, ceiling and floors) in your studio. It might even be a combination of all three!

The ideal remedy would be to bring in an acoustical consultant. He or she would be able to recommend room treatments, suggest the best placement for your monitors, and tell you if you need to replace them.

But that could be quite costly. What’s more, installing acoustical treatments onto the walls and ceiling might not be practical, especially if you rent rather than own your home. But fear not: There are common-sense methods that can help you get much better mixing results, even without any room treatments. In this article, we’ll tell you what they are.

The Difference Between Speakers and Monitors

You’ll invariably get better mix results if you use purpose-built studio monitors. Mixing on the speakers from your home stereo or a computer speaker system is not a good idea. That’s because consumer systems are designed to make music sound good, not necessarily to reproduce it accurately. They may hype the low end and high end in ways that will make it harder for you to accurately gauge frequencies and levels during the mix.

Instead, use a pair of dedicated studio monitors such as the Yamaha HS Series, which includes models with 5″, 7″ and 8″ woofers (the HS5, HS7 and HS8, respectively).

Two rows of monitors of various sizes. In the foreground are 4 monitors in black and in the background are 3 monitors in white. — *Yamaha HS series monitors.*

All HS Series monitors are self-powered and biamplified to ensure accuracy over their full frequency range. In addition, they offer EQ capabilities for tailoring their response to the acoustics of your room. For example, if you discover that mixes that sound good in your studio appear to lack bass when you hear them in other places, you can deduce that your room accentuates the bass response. (If you’re mixing in a space that’s exaggerating the bass, you’ll keep it lower in the mix.) In that case, you can use the rear-panel Room Control switch to reduce the low-end response by -2dB or -4dB. Many studio monitors, including all HS Series models, also offer EQ for adjusting the high-end response. These kinds of switches and controls are rarely found on consumer speakers, and almost never on computer speakers.

Monitor Placement

Another very important factor is where you place your monitors. Ideally, they should be kept away from walls and corners, which can interact with the audio to create what are called “standing waves.” These can wreak havoc with bass in particular.

While you can’t alter your room’s dimensions, you can minimize the standing wave issue by placing the monitors away from corners and as far back from the walls as is practical. If your room is rectangular, it’s better to position your monitors along the longer dimension. You should also locate your monitors so that they’re not equidistant to the walls on either side; instead, place them off to one side or the other. The less symmetrical your room and setup are, the less you’ll have to deal with standing waves and other acoustic problems.

Illustration showing the best placement of monitors in a rectangular-shaped room. — *Where should you place your monitors?*

Playing the Field

Another way to lessen the impact of room acoustics is to use “near-field” monitors, which are by far the most common type in use today. Because they are designed to be placed close by, near-field monitors allow you to listen at relatively quiet sound levels. This not only serves to maximize the direct sound and minimize the amount of room reflections (which can skew and distort what you hear) but also reduces the ear fatigue that lessens your ability to discern a good mix.

To monitor correctly in a near-field setup, the mix position (where you sit while mixing) should be one point in an equilateral triangle, with the monitors serving as the other two points, as shown in this illustration:

Each of the three points should be roughly three to five feet apart. If you’re using monitors with small (5″ or 6″) woofers, err toward the shorter distance; if they have 7″ or 8″ woofers, err toward the longer distance. Make sure to angle your monitors inwards (this is called “toe-in”) to line up with your mix position. There are apps that can help you in achieving these settings accurately.

In terms of height, it’s best to position your monitors at ear level. Use dedicated speaker stands instead of tabletops to further avoid reflections, and invest in monitor isolation pads to put under each speaker. Such pads are designed to “decouple” the monitors from the surface. Without them, the vibrations from the speaker cabinets can create resonance that distorts what you’re hearing.

Go Big if Possible

Which size monitor you should use depends on how large your home studio is. If you can fit (and afford) monitors with 8″ woofers, they’re usually the better choice. That’s because larger size woofers can reproduce lower bass frequencies, allowing you to accurately hear what’s going on in the low-end of your mix.

As an example of how size and bass response correlate, look at the different sized monitors’ bass response specs in the HS Series: The HS5 goes to 74Hz, the HS7 to 55Hz and the HS8 all the way down to 47Hz.

To Sub or Not to Sub?

Another option for improving bass response is to add a subwoofer, particularly if you plan to mix electronic dance music or hip-hop, where bass instruments commonly extend into the sub-bass frequency range (below 60Hz). A good option here is the Yamaha HS8S — it’s a powered sub that’s compatible with all HS models (as well as studio monitors from other manufacturers) and gives you bass response down to 22Hz.

Yamaha HS8S subwoofer. — *Yamaha HS8S subwoofer*

Unlike other kinds of monitors, subwoofer positioning is not critical — you can pretty much place them anywhere. That’s because the kinds of very low-frequency sounds they produce are not especially directional, meaning that the human ear can’t easily discern where they are coming from.

Why Not Just Mix Over Headphones?

Headphones are good for checking details in your mix, but they’re not a substitute for studio monitors. The problem is that you hear things differently when you have headphones on, for two reasons:

1. In headphones, the left and right sides are totally discrete, which is not the case when you listen to music in a room over speakers and hear some of the left signal coming from the right and vice-versa.

2. When you listen in headphones, you’re hearing only direct signal, whereas when you listen over speakers, you’re hearing both direct and reflected (room) sound.

Because many people listen to music on earbuds or headphones, it’s perfectly valid to check your mixes that way. Just don’t do it exclusively, because your mixes will also be heard over speakers.

Click here for Part 2: Tips and tricks for achieving better monitoring.

Check out the other articles in our “History of Musical Genres” series.

Click here for more information about Yamaha HS Series studio monitors.

The History of Musical Genres, Part 2: Blues and Jazz

Written by Marc Hopkins on November 2, 2020. Posted in History. 3 Comments on The History of Musical Genres, Part 2: Blues and Jazz

From cotton fields to recording studios and bandstands, blues and jazz are uniquely American and a vibrant testimony to the American experience. Yet without pain and suffering, there would be no blues.

Birth of the Blues

The genre emerged during the 1860s in the American South through the work songs and spirituals sung by slaves toiling on plantations. It was under these conditions that the recognizable characteristics of blues (such as call and response, a 12-bar I-IV-V structure, the use of two repetitive verses followed by a chorus, and distinctive rhythmic patterns) would evolve into the music that would later inform jazz, rock’n’roll and other musical genres.

Late nineteenth-century trumpeter and composer W.C. Handy, who called himself the “Father of the Blues,” is credited with popularizing the genre. Music critic David Hajdu has noted that Handy “documented blues in the form of musical notation, freezing songs in modes that suited him, and [having] the music copyrighted and published.”

Robert Johnson only lived 27 years, but in that short time, he created a unique playing style that would influence blues musicians for decades. The superstition that he “sold his soul to the devil” to achieve musical success belies a deep musical legacy evidenced by the many adaptions of his songs by popular artists like the Rolling Stones and Led Zeppelin. A 2019 story in the New York Times stated that “guitar playing on Johnson’s recordings was unusually complex for its time. Most early Delta blues musicians played simple guitar figures that harmonized with their voices. But Johnson, imitating the boogie-woogie style of piano playing, used his guitar to play rhythm, bass and slide simultaneously, all while singing.”

Another seminal bluesman was John Lee Hooker, known for his percussive guitar playing and growling vocals, which would serve to influence Chicago blues singers like Howlin’ Wolf and Muddy Waters. Introduced to the guitar early in life by his stepfather, who was friends with legendary artists Blind Lemon Jefferson and Charlie Patton, Hooker hit the road in the 1920s when he was just 14 years old, and was still actively touring into the late 1990s after enjoying a popular resurgence.

And then there’s B.B. King. The Mississippi native played over 300 shows annually for more than 30 years, developing a distinctive guitar style that featured string bending and vibrato — the precursor to (and a great influence on) the stylings of Jimi Hendrix, Eric Clapton, Jeff Beck and a legion of rock stars.

The Evolution of Jazz

In the early 20th century, a considerably more musically complex genre known as jazz (or “jass,” as it was called initially) began to take shape in New Orleans. It was within the boundaries of this multicultural city that an unplanned mashup of styles occurred, encompassing the blues, ragtime, minstrel shows, vaudeville tunes, brass band music, string band songs, dance music, marching music, and funeral music. “The result was an improvised sound that, within a few years, would captivate the nation,” writes author Court Carney in his online Oxford Research essay “Jazz, Blues and Ragtime in America, 1900–1945.”

It was during this time that one of the founding fathers of jazz emerged. Cornetist Charles “Buddy” Bolden is believed to be one of the first musicians to explore the developing genre. While there are no recordings of his performances, he is credited with creating a looser, more improvised version of ragtime, and his band was said to be the first to use brass instruments to play the blues. Bolden was not only renowned for his revolutionary technique but for his sheer volume. In a 2019 story in Jazziz, clarinetist Alphonse Picou said, “He was the loudest there ever was because you could hear [his] cornet as loud as what Louis Armstrong played through the mike.”

It would be left to Armstrong, another son of New Orleans, to help push jazz into the art form as it’s known today. New York Times jazz critic John S. Wilson wrote in 1971 that Armstrong was “the root source that moved jazz onto the path along which it developed.” Also known as “Satchmo” or “Pops,” Armstrong would frequently abandon the melody, addressing only the chord changes to chart his own path — a path that generations of jazz musicians would come to follow. His “Hot Five” and “Hot Seven” recording sessions (named for the number of musicians in the ensemble) held between 1925 and 1928, produced 89 recordings that showcased Armstrong’s evolution as an improviser both as a soloist and a vocalist, and also introduced a national audience to scat singing.

Edward Kennedy “Duke” Ellington is considered the most important American jazz composer of the 20th century. His compositions number in the thousands and, for more than 50 years, he led a jazz orchestra that continually stretched the genre’s boundaries. Ellington also wrote Broadway musicals and conducted symphonies — even an Alvin Ailey ballet.

A deft songwriter, he crafted compositions to showcase the unique talents of the musicians in his ensemble, many of whom were prominent artists in their own right. For example, Ellington’s song “Jeep’s Blues” was conceived with saxophonist Johnny Hodges in mind. “For Hodges, this is declamatory preaching of the highest calling,” wrote Tom Reney of New England Public media in 2019. “With Ellington’s accompaniment prompting and cushioning his star soloist and the ensemble, especially in quiet passages, intoning like a choir, who needs a narrative?”

Like all other musical genres, jazz can be characterized by well-defined sub-genres like swing or bebop, and by the musicians who dominated a particular period or collection of periods. But the creative output of jazz trumpeter Miles Davis quashed those norms. Davis charted an eclectic path where he didn’t settle on any one particular sound or playing style.

On his milestone 1959 album Kind of Blue, Davis and the other soloists in his ensemble played a melody over just one or two scales instead of entire chord progressions, creating space for broad swathes of improvisation. There’s an orchestral feel to his 1960 Sketches of Spain, which offers a mix of jazz, classical and Spanish-influenced world music. A decade later, on Bitches Brew, he employed a heavy dose of electric instruments. The album is seen as the forerunner of the jazz-rock subgenre which rose to prominence in the 1970s.

When first introduced to popular culture, blues and jazz were branded by traditionalists as the “devil’s music,” yet both genres have endured the test of time and continue to maintain strong followings today through fans who crave classic recordings as well as those who seek out contemporary artists. Recent years have seen an increasing influence of R&B, hip-hop and pop music on jazz in particular. Another internet-aided trend of modern jazz is that of extreme reharmonization, performed by virtuosic players known for their speed and mastery of complex polyrhythms. Though their roots date back more than 150 years, blues and jazz are still alive and well today!

What’s the Difference Between an Acoustic Saxophone and the YDS-150 Digital Saxophone?

Written by Austin Snowden on October 30, 2020. Posted in Digital Wind Instruments.

Early versions of the saxophone first appeared in 1840, followed by a number of variations. However, it wasn’t until the 1930s that the world saw what is now considered the modern saxophone.

Advances in digital technology have allowed Yamaha to take the saxophone to a whole new level. The YDS-150 Digital Saxophone has a lot in common with its acoustic counterpart — yet it offers numerous exciting innovations. In this article, we’ll take a look at the similarities and differences between acoustic and digital saxes, and explore some of the new features offered by the YDS-150.

It Starts at the Top

Closeup of mouthpiece. — *YDS-150 mouthpiece, reed and ligature.*

Even at first glance, one major similarity is quite obvious: Both instruments use a mouthpiece, reed and ligature. This is where air enters the horn and ultimately where the player controls nearly every aspect of the sound. In acoustic saxes, whether you are playing a soprano, alto, tenor or bari, these components can be highly customized to suit your playing needs. The YDS-150, however, is designed to work with its included mouthpiece, which is nearly identical to a Yamaha 4C Alto Saxophone mouthpiece. This means embouchure and articulation have the same approach, although creating a characteristic sound is going to take more skill on an acoustic sax. The YDS-150 mouthpiece is designed so that any beginner or pro can pick up the instrument and make a great sound right away.

Reed All About It

Whether it’s made of cane or synthetic materials, any reed that can fit on an acoustic alto saxophone mouthpiece will fit on the supplied YDS-150 mouthpiece. But the similarities stop there. Unlike on an acoustic saxophone, the reed on the Digital Saxophone is not what generates the sound; instead, that’s the job of a breath sensor mounted inside its body, as shown here:

Closeup of inner workings of the apparatus. — *YDS-150 breath sensor.*

When playing the YDS-150, you do not want the reed to vibrate, because doing so interferes with how the breath sensor detects your air and prevents the instrument from functioning correctly. The supplied synthetic reed is designed so that it does not vibrate under normal playing conditions. This means that for the sax player with boxes of reeds ready to go, you are better off leaving them for your acoustic horn. Likewise, swapping other mouthpieces onto the YDS-150 may not yield the same results as the included “DS” (Digital Sax) mouthpiece.

Control

Players of acoustic saxophones control tone through manipulation of air flow and embouchure. With practice, a skilled saxophonist can even do pitch bends, add vibrato, and perform numerous extended techniques that same way. But all of these are dependent on a vibrating reed.

On the YDS-150, where the reed does not vibrate, these effects and more can all be fine tuned with the use of a dedicated smartphone app. Everything from pitch to key response, transposition, distortion effects — even switching from a soprano voice to a bari voice — can be done in a matter of seconds.

Sonic Variety

An acoustic saxophone is capable of producing many different tonalities with a great deal of flexibility, but it is the sole responsibility of the player to develop the skills needed to control and manipulate the sound that comes from their instrument. The YDS-150 also offers a wide range of tonalities via 73 preset voices, assuring a greater degree of consistency. In addition to standard sax sounds, there are non-saxophone sounds and other digital effects that simply are not possible on an acoustic sax, such as the sound of a soprano and bari playing at the same time. (Not easy to do in real life!) With the use of the dedicated smartphone app, the player can further hone in on the sound quality they’re looking for.

The Keys are Key

Closeup with lever circled. — *YDS-150 Analog Controller.*

The YDS-150 has the exact same key layout as an acoustic sax. Everything from the palm keys to the side trill keys, spatula, high F# — even a low A key — are positioned exactly where a saxophonist will expect them to be. The one difference is the addition of an Analog Controller on the YDS-150. Shaped much like a joystick on a gaming controller, this allows the player to control effects such as pitch bends using their right thumb.

Bell Resonance

Of course, a saxophone is not complete without its distinctive eye-catching brass bell. On an acoustic sax, the bell helps to project the sound and also plays a major role in how the instrument resonates. Although the YDS-150 has an internal speaker that “projects” the sound, its brass bell is connected to internal componentry in order to provide the player with physical feedback that emulates that of an acoustic instrument.

Ready to learn more? Here’s a video that highlights some of the main YDS-150 features:

Click here for more information about Yamaha acoustic saxophones.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha YDS-150 Digital Saxophone.

Click here to find a Yamaha woodwind dealer near you.

Man on a couch in an upscale modern living room watching television.

Virtual Surround Sound and Yamaha Sound Bars

Written by Ted Goslin on October 29, 2020. Posted in Audio Gear Guides. 1 Comment on Virtual Surround Sound and Yamaha Sound Bars

When you think of surround sound, what comes to mind? For many, it’s a movie theater — a large auditorium with speakers all around you. While most living rooms have way less space than a Cineplex, enjoying surround sound in the comfort of your home is possible. In fact, all you need is the right sound bar.

A sound bar isn’t the only way to experience surround sound at home, but it is the easiest. For one thing, its compact size allows for easy placement under your TV. Plus, a sound bar is an all-in-one solution that’s great for different room shapes and sizes, allowing you to plug and play quickly with just an HDMI or optical cable connection to your TV.

Virtual Surround Sound Technologies

Many modern sound bars offer virtual surround sound technologies to simulate realistic 2D and 3D environments. Yamaha sound bars include support for the following:

Dolby^® Audio™

Dolby Digital™ is an encoding format that offers 5.1 discrete channels of compressed audio, reducing the amount of data needed to produce high quality sound. The technology debuted on DVDs but is now used by many cable and satellite channels for movie and TV broadcast. The Yamaha SR-C20A sound bar incorporates Dolby Audio, the technology that decodes Dolby Digital-encoded signal.

DTS^® Virtual:X™

DTS Virtual:X creates an immersive virtual 3D experience, simulating surround sound through digital filtering and time domain processing techniques to create the sensation of height. This means that sonic elements like footsteps, helicopters, whispers, etc. sound as though they are coming from above and behind you! Yamaha sound bars featuring DTS Virtual:X include the SR-B20A, YAS-109, YAS-209 and MusicCast BAR 400.

In addition to providing support for DTS Virtual:X, the MusicCast BAR 400 also offers the capability to wirelessly connect rear speakers such as the Yamaha MusicCast 20 or MusicCast 50 to create a full 5.1-channel system. This allows you to enjoy authentic surround sound without the need to run speaker wires to the back of the room. (Learn more here.)

Sound Modes

All the Yamaha sound bars mentioned above offer four audio presets (called “modes”) to customize your listening experience: Movie, Standard, Game and Stereo. It’s easy to try out the four modes: Just press the corresponding button on the sound bar’s remote control.

Remote control with button location circled. — *Yamaha SR-B20A sound bar remote control.*

1. Movie Mode. This is the best mode for capturing the epic moments of your favorite films. But it doesn’t stop there, because Movie Mode often works well for TV shows too, given the cinematic audio and video quality offered by many of today’s top shows. When you turn on Movie Mode, it works in conjunction with your sound bar’s surround sound capabilities to give you the maximum immersive listening experience.

2. Standard Mode. Best suited for everyday content, such as sports, sitcoms and reality shows, Standard Mode is an all-purpose mode that draws out the details that get lost in your TV’s built-in speakers. Activating Standard Mode turns on virtual surround sound as well as the Clear Voice dialogue enhancer and Bass Extension for enhanced bass response.

3. Game Mode. As the name suggests, this mode is intended for use with video games. Game Mode captures the 3D complexity of video game audio, which is constantly changing direction as you move through a level, such as a first-person shooter game. (Learn more about how surround sound is used in video games here.) Activating Game Mode turns on the virtual surround sound as well as automatically setting the Clear Voice and Bass Extension to those parameters best suited for gaming.

4. Stereo Mode. Ideal for listening to music and watching older movies, this mode switches your sound bar to standard two-channel stereo.

These modes, along with additional customizations and capabilities, can also be accessed from the Yamaha Sound Bar Remote app.

Closeup of buttons on app. — *Sound modes as displayed in the Sound Bar Remote app.*

Experiment with these modes and their settings to see which sounds best to you. Changing things up can often reveal audio details you never knew existed!

Check out these related blog articles:

How to Shop for a Sound Bar
What is DTS^® Virtual:X™?
MusicCast Wireless Surround Sound for Your 5.1 Home Theater
How (and Where) To Mount a TV and Sound Bar
Introducing the SR-C20A Compact Sound Bar

Click here for more information about the Yamaha SR-C20A sound bar.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha SR-B20A sound bar.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha YAS-109 sound bar.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha YAS-209 sound bar.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha MusicCast BAR 400 sound bar.

Man in a sweater facing the camera sitting at a computer keyboard that is adjacent to an electronic piano keyboard with a large computer screen displaying the Steinberg application.

Fred Coury

Written by Yamaha Corporation of America on October 28, 2020. Posted in Pro Audio Artists.

From its speed of workflow and audio transparency to the inbuilt vocal correction and modeled amplifiers, Fred Coury relies on Steinberg Cubase.

Renowned for his drumming with the band Cinderella, Coury has fashioned a second career as a prolific composer for television and movies as well as sonic branding for sports teams. “I have a certain bar that has to be met, because I came from the world of tape,” he explains. “That’s a whole art that’s gone now, but I wanted something that sounded great, where you have the headroom, the top end and the low end, and everything in-between. I want to hear everything, and I don’t want the software to color the sound in any way at all. That’s why I’ve chosen Cubase — it’s really transparent.”

Being a drummer, Fred particularly appreciates the drum editing features offered by Cubase. “You should hear me play sometimes,” he says self-effacingly. “It sounds like a pair of sneakers in a drier! But Cubase just makes [my drumming] perfect. It’s such an easy editor.” Fred is also a big fan of the amp models in the VST Amp Rack that’s built into Cubase. “Whatever’s in this module not only sounds real, it feels real,” he enthuses. “That’s the most important thing.”

“They say that luck is being prepared for opportunity,” Coury observes. “Cubase makes you prepared for the opportunity.”

Check out these related articles.

Click here to learn more about Steinberg Cubase.

Go Behind the Scenes at Yamaha Guitars

Written by Yamaha Corporation of America on October 27, 2020. Posted in Electric Guitars, Guitar History.

Did you know Yamaha has been making guitars for over fifty years? Here are three videos that trace our long history of quality guitar crafting and show how that innovation continues today.

First, a visit to the Innovation Road museum located in Hamamatsu, Japan, where U.K.-based guitarist Paul Hindmarsh conducts a hands-on “playing” tour of the many historic Yamaha guitars and basses on display. Highlights include an encounter with the SG3 — the company’s first production electric guitar, introduced in 1966 — as well as the SG7 “Flying Samurai”; the ’70s classic SG2000 solid-body electric; the original “Broad Bass” BB2000; and the Pacifica 912, the first-ever Pacifica guitar, introduced in 1990.

In this second video, Paul explores the Yamaha Guitar Archive in Hamamatsu — a treasure trove of the company’s early guitar and bass designs (many of which were never released commercially), including a 1965 prototype of the GSX33B — the very first electric guitar Yamaha ever built. Others include a 1973 SB75 bass that was the precursor to the BB line; a 2003 SG2000 Double Neck with both standard and extended necks plus a Hawaiian koa top; and an early Revstar prototype with “café racer” cosmetics.

Ever wonder how a guitar or bass is made? This way-cool behind the scenes tour of the Yamaha Guitar Development Custom Shop in Calabasas, California gives you exclusive insight into the design and build process. Learn about the research and development that goes into the creation of new instruments, view the workbenches on which they are assembled, check out the facility’s CNC (computer-controlled cutting machine) as it fashions a custom Revstar from scratch, witness the painting process, and visit the studio room where products are tested and the Guitar Showroom where artists get to explore design ideas with staff and finally hear their custom-crafted instruments in action.

Keep up-to-date with Yamaha Guitars:

https://www.facebook.com/YamahaGuitars

https://www.instagram.com/yamaha_guitars

https://twitter.com/yamahaguitars

http://yamahaguitardevelopment.com

Click here to learn more about Yamaha guitars.

Click here to learn more about the Yamaha Custom Shop.

piano keys with sheet music overlaid on keys

The Creative Repertoire Initiative

Written by Frank Ticheli on October 26, 2020. Posted in Advocacy.

Seemingly overnight in March 2020, the COVID-19 pandemic swept through our world, leaving us isolated at home and plagued with fear and uncertainty about the future. Jobs lost, businesses shuttered, classrooms moved online — our entire way of life changed in ways that shocked us. And for music lovers, an unthinkable thing happened — live music stopped.

Introspection

In early April while still adjusting to a new normal, I received a call from my friend Allan McMurray, director of bands emeritus at the University of Colorado. After we exchanged pleasantries, our conversation turned to the pandemic and its potential impact on school music programs. Allan pointed out the possibility that schools would be mandated to limit the number of students in a rehearsal room to eight or 10 students, perhaps even fewer if wind playing or singing were involved.

Allan said, “If the teachers don’t have music that adapts to this kind of situation, how will they keep their students engaged? Kids might become disillusioned or bored and drop music. Programs could be decimated, and it could take years for some to recover. Some may never recover! What are you going to do to help?”

These were strong words from someone I have known and respected for decades. I took Allan’s call to action very seriously. For days, I pondered his question, unsure of how I could help. As the seriousness of the situation began to sink in, I came to formulate a solution to Allan’s challenge: I began making arrangements of my music that were playable by ensembles of any size or makeup. I resolved to put together a group of composers to join me. I also enlisted conductor Robert Ambrose, a strong advocate of both composers and school band programs. He and I immediately began calling composer friends around the country to ask if they would join us in this mission.

No arm-twisting was required to enlist allies. The 10 composers Robert and I called jumped on board immediately, offering their time and talents without understanding fully what they were getting themselves into — they just wanted to help.

A Collaboration of Composers and a Conductor

That is how the Creative Repertoire Initiative (CRI) was born. We are a collective of 11 composers and a conductor, all committed to the creation and promotion of adaptable music to meet the serious challenges facing music educators in the coming academic year and beyond.

Creative Repertoire Initiative Members

Robert Ambrose, Brian Balmages, Steven Bryant, Michael Daugherty, Julie Giroux, John Mackey, Peter Meechan, Jennifer Jolley, Alex Shapiro, Omar Thomas, Frank Ticheli and Eric Whitacre

After a series of brainstorming sessions, we settled on a two-fold mission: 1) to create “adaptable” pieces, either arrangements of current works or new compositions, that could be performed in virtually any situation, and 2) to inspire, empower, guide and amplify the voices of other composers who wished to do the same.

Over time, we defined “adaptable” as an umbrella term that encompassed a variety of compositions intended for ensembles faced with limited, fluctuating or unpredictable personnel. We discussed a wide assortment of compositional techniques, including works that utilize electro-acoustics, found instruments and elements of chance. While we recognize that there are countless types of adaptable music, the pieces that CRI composers have created fall into the four categories detailed below.

Adaptable Music Type 1: FLEX

Flex pieces — where instruments are assigned to specific parts based on range/registration — have been in existence for many years. They are suitable for smaller bands where certain instruments are not represented; however, they do require that a minimum of one musician be available for each part in order to be fully realized. So, for instance, if there is no bass range player in the room, then the bass part isn’t performed. Flex pieces are abundant and include those published by Hal Leonard in their FlexBand series, as well as Bravo Music and its Japanese parent company, Brain Music.

Examples of recent flex pieces include:

John Mackey’s “Let Me Be Frank with You,”
Michael Daugherty’s setting of Woody Guthrie’s “This Land is Your Land” for young players, entitled “Made for You and Me: Inspired by Woody Guthrie,”
Julie Giroux’s arrangement of her “Hymn to the Innocent” and
Eric Whitacre’s arrangement of “You and Me.”

Adaptable Music Type 2: FULL-FLEX

These pieces offer maximum flexibility in which any voice is playable by any instrument making a fully realized performance possible with any combination of four or more instruments. Full-flex pieces are useful in situations where only flutes are present for rehearsal on one day, trombones on another day and a mix of instruments on yet another day.

The conductor can also experiment with part assignments. For example, a tuba player can be given part 1 and a flute player part 4, which places the melody in the tuba. This might prove to be a fun experiment — the tuba player might enjoy being able to play the melody virtually the entire time. The full-flex approach was created in direct response to the need for radically adaptable pieces in the wake of the COVID-19 pandemic.

Recent examples include:

My arrangement of “Simple Gifts: Four Shaker Songs,”
Brian Balmages’ “Colliding Visions,”
Steven Bryant’s arrangement of “Dusk” and
Pete Meechan’s “Taking the Fifth.”

Adaptable Music Type 3: MODULAR/CELLULAR

These pieces rely on motivic cells in which one cell may be repeated at will before going on to another cell. A groundbreaking example of modular/cellular music is Terry Riley’s “In C.” Composed in 1964, “In C” can be played by ensembles of virtually any size and makeup. Performers are empowered to choose dynamic levels, the order in which individual cells are played, the number of times they are repeated, etc.

Recent modular/cellular pieces include:

Jennifer Jolley’s “Sounds from the Gray Goo Sars-CoV-2,”
Alex Shapiro’s electroacoustic “Passages” and
My “In C Dorian” (inspired by Terry Riley’s piece and dedicated to him).

Adaptable Music Type 4: IMPROVISATORY

These adaptable works based primarily on improvisation could entail jazz chords, verbal directions, alternative notation and any number of additional ways to provide a framework for improvisation. Omar Thomas’ “Sharp 9” for young musicians is a recent example. Its 12-bar blues serves as an introduction to improvisation while also introducing young ears to rich jazz harmony.

Composer Gatherings

We recognize that crises such as the current pandemic serve as wake-up calls, firing the imaginations of composers, conductors and performers to find new ways to engage in music-making. As we move forward, we hope to learn from others about new ways to enrich this repertoire.

As outlined in our mission statement, CRI is committed to encouraging, guiding and advocating for other composers who wish to create adaptable music. We have done so in myriad ways:

The CRI website has a composer resource section that contains tutorials, score templates and sample score excerpts for others to use or modify to suit their needs.
The CRI Facebook group is a place for composers to highlight their adaptable music and for directors to learn about these works.
CRI hosted two “Adaptable Music Forums” as part of Robert Ambrose’s The Digital Director’s Lounge Zoom show. These forums provided a platform for composers to present their adaptable music to a room of hundreds of educators from around the globe. These invigorating sessions provided hope, inspiration and joy to many. It was particularly heartening to learn about the vast number of composers who devoted their time during the summer months to create adaptable music.

A Network of Support

Adaptable music is available from the usual places music educators and musicians obtain their music: distributors, publishers and self-published composers or their representatives. Scores and parts for adaptable music are most often made available as PDF files, although some publishers also provide sheet music. While there is no single, centralized location where you can obtain adaptable pieces, The Wind Repertory Project has added “Adaptable Instrumentation” and “Flexible Instrumentation” categories to its website, as well as an “Initiatives: Creative Repertoire Initiative” category where adaptable works are listed alphabetically by composer.

While the COVID-19 pandemic served as the catalyst for the immediate creation of adaptable music, we recognize that the very same music may serve a vital purpose long after the pandemic has passed. Small instrumental music programs, college and university conducting classes, and anyone looking for ways to supplement mainstream large ensemble music may find adaptable music a welcome resource.

To all music education professionals, please know that you are not alone. As you face the unprecedented challenges that lie ahead, there is a huge network of professionals who are thinking of you and supporting your work. This includes the many living composers who are excited to artfully expand this greatly needed repertoire. We hope the growing number of adaptable pieces being created offer a path forward in the year to come and beyond.

This article appeared in School Band & Orchestra magazine and ACB Journal.

Jazz Chord Voicings, Part 2

Written by Jerry Kovarsky on October 26, 2020. Posted in Keyboard How-to. 1 Comment on Jazz Chord Voicings, Part 2

In last month’s installment of this three-part series, we began our exploration of jazz harmony and voicings. In that article, we mentioned that, when you play in a band context, the bass player will usually be covering the root of each chord so you are generally free to leave it out in order to make room for more color tones (the 9th, 11th and 13th). Let’s take a closer look at how you can do this.

Rootless Voicings

Jazz musicians commonly call the act of playing two-handed chords behind a vocalist or instrumental soloist comping — taken from the word “accompany.” There are many approaches to playing two-handed voicings, but let’s begin with some that don’t double any of the notes so you can clearly see how they are built. We’ll start with a Major seventh chord:

The first four voicings all use the 3rd, the 5th, the Major 7th and the 9th. The low C wouldn’t be played by you — it would be covered by the bass player. But for the sake of this lesson, you should play it and then try each voicing above it to hear the tonality, as I do in the audio examples. Can you hear how open these chords sound? They add a lot of color without sounding like plain triads and seventh chords.

Now we’ll look at dominant seventh chords:

To save some clutter, I did not go through all the possible variations of the 9th and 13th, with some of the typical notes changed. (In jazz harmony theory, these are known as alterations.) You should try them with the flatted ninth (D-flat instead of D natural), the sharp ninth (D-sharp) and the flatted-thirteenth (A-flat) as well. Figuring out those voicings for yourself is a good way to help absorb these concepts.

Next, let’s explore the minor 9th chord, with the flatted seventh as well as the Major seventh:

Next, the minor seventh with the flatted fifth, commonly called a half-diminished chord. I am showing these with both the natural ninth (D natural) and the flatted ninth (D-flat):

Finally, let’s take a look at a suspended fourth chord:

Rootless Voicings Used In A Tune

Of course, these voicings sound much better when they are used to play a series of chords, so let’s apply them to the same standard tune we used in last month’s column: “Autumn Leaves.” Here are the first 15 bars, played this month in G minor:

I added a little rhythmic interest, and I am showing the root tones below the voicings, but you don’t need to play them.

In this first audio clip, I play the root tones with an acoustic bass sound:

In the second version, I have the bass play walking lines to let you hear how this would sound in a real performance:

Left-Hand Rootless

By playing all the notes of your rootless voicings in your left hand, you are free to play the melody of the tune (or solo) with your right hand. This concept of left hand voicings was first introduced by the great jazz pianist Bill Evans, and has become a standard way of comping (there’s that word again!) when you take a solo. Here are some common left-hand voicings for the various chord qualities. First, Major, with an acoustic bass playing the root tone so you can hear the chord voicing in context:

Major left hand jazz voicing, with an acoustic bass playing the root tone.

Next, dominant seventh:

Don’t forget to explore the flatted and sharp 9ths as well as the flatted 13th on your own!

Here are some minor 9th voicings:

Half-diminished:

And finally, the fully diminished:

To wrap things up, let’s apply these left-hand voicing concepts to “Autumn Leaves” again, while playing the melody:

Autumn Leaves played with left-handed rootless melody plus bass walk.

Notice how I added rhythmic interest, plus some movement in the left hand voicings for variety. I also again added acoustic bass to hear the example in a performance context. Next: More applications of jazz voicings.

All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Set of four collapsing/telescoping stands that are geared for supporting drum set elements.

Five Questions to Ask When Choosing Drum Hardware

Written by Jim Haler on October 23, 2020. Posted in Drums.

When it comes to choosing the best components for your drum set — from cymbals to the drums themselves — making the right decision can be difficult.

The same is true when it comes to drum hardware. Here are five questions to ask before deciding what to buy:

1. Where are you playing?

The best place to start is to determine what kind of drumming you’ll be doing. For example, if you’ll be mostly doing small gigs (such as in clubs) and carrying your own gear everywhere, you’ll want the lightest hardware you can find, though it should still be braced and rugged. The Yamaha 700 Series is a good option since it offers a streamlined design and outstanding stability. Or you might want to check out the Yamaha HW-3 Crosstown pack, which weighs only 17 pounds and even comes with its own carrying bag, making setup and teardown easy.

Four collapsible dram stands shown in various stages of being collapsed and their black rectangular carrying case. — *The Yamaha HW-3 drum hardware pack.*

If you expect to be playing outdoor shows where there may be gusty winds, you’re going to need heavy-duty double-braced hardware that won’t blow over or move around. That’s also the case if you are mounting heavy cymbals (like 20″ crashes) high up, as you’ll need something with bottom weight that can offset the weight at the top. A good option to consider here is the Yamaha 800 Series, which is suitable for everything from small club gigs to large festivals.

2. Is it interchangeable?

Having hardware you can mix and match is important — in fact, for gigging drummers, it comes in handy on almost a daily basis. That’s exactly the thinking behind the Yamaha “System Hardware” concept that utilizes standardized pipe with a center tube diameter of 7/8″ (22.2 mm) in both 700 and 800 Series hardware, as well as in the HW-3 Crosstown pack and for tom holders, cymbal booms — even cowbell holders. This enables your kit to grow and evolve as your taste and needs change. For example, you can drop a double tom in the base of any stand and add cymbal holders — or pretty much anything you want — to T-fittings.

Complete drum kit setup on their stands. — *Drum set utilizing Yamaha System Hardware.*

3. Is it durable?

Yes, money is often an issue, but settling for poorly made hardware usually ends up costing you more in the long run. An inexpensive cymbal stand is likely to break down on you sooner rather than later (and probably at the worst possible moment!), and so you’ll find yourself having to purchase a replacement, then another and another. Better to spend a little more and own a piece of hardware that will stand the test of time.

A major reason why Yamaha drum hardware is so durable is the usage of the same zinc castings and chrome plating used to make handlebars and mufflers for Yamaha motorcycles — parts that have to be able to withstand extreme wear and tear. Yamaha also backs their products with a written five-year warranty to ensure that purchasers get to enjoy their instruments and equipment for years to come.

4. Is it the right fit?

Especially when you first learn to play drums, having good posture is crucial. You want to be as efficient as possible when you play, so it’s important to use hardware you can easily adjust to create your optimal drum setup. This means you want everything to feel natural — you shouldn’t have to over-extend to reach anything in your drum set.

Yamaha hardware makes it easy to get your toms, cymbals, etc. right where you want them to be. The company’s tom mounting hardware is simple to adjust (over a range of 360 degrees) and stays put, so you don’t have to worry about toms slipping out of place while you’re playing. This means you can have different heads on the top and bottom, and even flip your tom around completely to play it with different sounds or at different pitches!

Closeup diagram of mechanism to tighten or loosen adjustable mounting hardware plus view of a tom drum at various possible angles. — *Yamaha tom mounting hardware.*

5. Is there attention to detail?

People appreciate attention to detail. Especially musicians!

For example, thick felts (as provided with all Yamaha cymbal and hi-hat stands) are not only great for getting cymbals really tight, but as a bonus, you can cut them thinner if necessary. Want to float your cymbals a little more? Simply slice the felts in half. This may seem like a minor detail, but drummers understand that small things can make all the difference when playing.

Through the years, Yamaha has introduced numerous innovations in drum hardware that provide that same attention to detail. For example, the company’s “hide-away” boom stand design allows you to add a splash or small effects cymbal to your drum set without taking up a bunch of floor space with a full stand. Another Yamaha original is the locking high-hat clutch: Once you get the top and bottom cymbal where you want them, you can lock the assembly into place so it doesn’t move.

The bottom line is that having the proper drum setup — something that starts with choosing the right hardware — will help you play better. So choose wisely!

Click here for more information about Yamaha drum hardware.

sad woman holding up smiling drawing in front of mouth

5 Ways to Stay Positive

Written by Kathryn Drury Wagner on October 21, 2020. Posted in Self-Care.

“Put one foot in front of the other…” Do you remember that song from the 1970 stop-motion film “Santa Claus is Comin’ to Town”?

This year, the song seems less of a seasonal classic and more like a daily manifesto. Must. Keeping. Moving.

It’s not easy to stay positive when so much is being asked of us professionally and personally, collectively and individually. Here are five ways to boost your positive outlook, giving you a little “get up and go” while you put one foot in front of the other.

1. Power Up with Plants

Research has long shown that being outdoors boosts our mental and physical health. Scientists at the University of Rochester, for example, found that 20 minutes a day spent in nature increases feelings of vitality.

Getting outdoors and communing with nature may not be possible right now, but don’t forget the power of plants in an indoor environment. Potted plants in your office, home office or classroom can provide a sense of positive emotion. Try a pot of lavender in a south facing window, for example, for a little color and gentle fragrance. A peace lily offers visual serenity and does double duty, removing chemicals such as benzene, trichloroethylene and formaldehyde from the air.

2. Dance Party

Good news: pop songs are getting more up-tempo again. The BBC reports that the average tempo of 2020’s best-selling songs is 122 beats per minute — that’s the highest BPM since 2009.

Music journalist Charlie Harding tells the BBC, “this is an important psychological change in people’s listening habits. Music is more than just escapism. It can help us imagine a different way of life. … We need sounds that help us forge a path to the world we want to live in, not the one we’re inhabiting today.”

As music educators know, tempo can literally change mood — a concept that was supported by a Frontiers in Computational Neuroscience study. Why not try some of the new dance songs with your musical ensembles and watch as the tempo boosts your mood and that of your students?

3. Dive into Deep-Focus Sessions

Overwhelm is a very real problem (read 6 Ways to Overcome Overwhelm). Music educators are teaching in new online formats while also fielding a barrage of texts, emails and calls. And if you’re on a computer, it can be tempting to pop over and see what’s on Facebook or a news site.

The solution? When possible, indulge in deep-focus sessions. Turn off the email notifications and close all the distracting tabs on your computer. There are focus tools that can help too, such as Freedom, which allows users to pick what they want to block (such as access to news sites), for how long and across which devices.

This is the restorative luxury of working on one thing, and one thing only. And imagine how accomplished you will feel when you cross an item off your to-do list. Ahhhh.

It’s much easier to stay positive when you feel like you are making progress.

4. Remember: Happiness Comes in Many Flavors

The positive psychology movement came to prominence in the 1990s. This field of science seeks to study what is going right with human’s psyches — what makes us happy and successful— as opposed to psychology’s previous emphasis on treating disorders or maladies.

To complement the positivity movement, there has been a lot of research on happiness. Happiness, it turns out, can be a transient emotion — “Woohoo! Just got a six-percent raise!” — as well as a long-term process of seeking meaning, working toward our full potential and pursuing our goals.

Knowing that happiness isn’t necessarily an on/off switch or based only on circumstance, can help redefine our approach to “feeling positive.”

5. Limit Your News Consumption

One and done. That is, check the news once a day. Too much news alters our perception, making it easy to see the negatives around us and miss the positive things that are happening.

Exacerbating the problem, there’s been a sea change over the past 15 years in how we consume news. What was once a leisurely read of a newspaper over morning coffee has become a constant barrage of video clips, TVs in public spaces and nonstop news input on our mobile devices. This can actually lead to increased cortisol — the stress hormone — in our bodies.

Reaching for your phone habitually? Try listening to music instead (especially up-tempo tunes — see “2. Dance Party” above) or watching a funny or sweet video clip — check out the gender reveal of the new baby panda at Smithsonian’s National Zoo.

What to Avoid: Toxic Positivity

The phrase “good vibes only” is seemingly everywhere these days — in rainbow bubble font on T-shirts and embossed on coffee mugs. While the expression is popular, it’s a prime example of toxic positivity.

According to the Henry Ford Health System, toxic positivity is “the culture of portraying yourself as happy no matter what. You’re switched off to anything that might be viewed as negative and feel pressure to act like everything is okay no matter the situation.”

Music educators are always under a great deal of pressure to be resilient. Chins up! But it’s okay to not be okay sometimes, to acknowledge and value the full range of human emotions. We weren’t built to only feel happiness. Boredom, anxiety, indifference, sadness — these are part of our emotional palettes too, in the same kit alongside curiosity, amazement, serenity, joy and confidence.

Even “strong” emotions like anger are important parts of the human experience. Lama Rod Owens, a contemporary Buddhist teacher, focuses many of his teachings and writings on love and rage. Metabolizing emotions such as sorrow or anger is supposed to be uncomfortable, he teaches. “Freedom/liberation means I have the agency to experience,” he wrote recently. “Experience means I am less likely to push things away or bypass them.”

It’s wonderful — and useful — to be in a positive and productive mindset. But remember, all of our emotions serve a purpose.

Maybe we need coffee mugs that say, “Good Vibes as Much as Possible” or “The Power of Positivity is Realizing I’m Only Human.”

aptX™: The Next Level of Bluetooth^® Audio

Written by Joy Frye on October 21, 2020. Posted in Music and Streaming.

A drawing of a Scandinavian man in traditional dress for 10th century man. — *King Harald “Bluetooth”.*

In the 10th century, a Scandinavian king overcame religious differences and territorial strife to unify all the warring factions in Denmark. What, you may ask, does that have to do with modern wireless connectivity?

Well, some historians believe this particular king had a dead tooth, and centuries later — 1994, to be precise — King Harald “Bluetooth” would become the inspiration for the name of Swedish telecom giant Ericsson’s new communication standard that aimed to unite laptops and cell phones from different manufacturers. In fact, the Danish runes for Harald’s initials, HB, form the Bluetooth logo.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth was originally designed for short-range low-power communication, like that used in the first consumer Bluetooth device, a hands-free headset sold in 1999. For its time, it was quite revolutionary, but there were some limitations on audio quality and occasional dropouts.

Since 1999, both the world and our communication requirements have changed dramatically. We now expect our wireless devices to operate almost as seamlessly as our wired ones, so we can watch movies, listen to music, and game anywhere, which usually involves streaming media. Streaming media requires codecs— encoder/decoder technologies that compress files being sent and decompress them on the receiving end. Codecs have been developed for specific file types, including data, still images, audio and video.

aptX

The aptX codec, which Qualcomm^® owns today, originally focused on compression for wideband stereo audio in entertainment industry applications. In the 1990s, aptX was used for the audio portion of many of director Stephen Spielberg’s biggest hit movies, including Jurassic Park. Today, it’s used in popular cell phones like Samsung^® Galaxy^® models, as well as in wireless speakers and headphones, including the Yamaha TW-E7A, TW-E5A and TW-E3A. aptX’s fixed compression ratio and rigorous interoperability testing ensures consistent audio quality across devices.

aptX HD

In 2016, Qualcomm introduced aptX HD, the codec that finally brought high-definition quality to Bluetooth audio. In addition to support for 24-bit audio, aptX HD improved the signal-to-noise ratio, resulting in lower background noise, and also reduced total harmonic distortion for minimal interference. You can experience aptX HD in Yamaha YH-E500A and EP-E50A wireless headphones and earphones, both of which also support aptX.

aptX Adaptive

Qualcomm’s latest codec, aptX Adaptive, meets modern expectations for viewing movies, listening to music and gaming anywhere. In addition to providing the same high-resolution audio as aptX HD, aptX Adaptive features a dynamic low-latency mode for reduced lip sync issues while gaming, along with adaptive bit rate for glitch-free audio. aptX Adaptive is featured in Yamaha YH-E700A and EP-E70A wireless headphones and earphones, both of which also support aptX HD and the original aptX.

Here’s a summary of the specifications for each aptX version:


Parameter	aptX Adaptive	aptX HD	aptX
Word Depth	24-bit	24-bit	16-bit
Bit Rate	Adjustable from 276 – 420 kbps	570 kpbs	384 kbps @ 48 kHz sampling frequency 325 kbps @ 44.1 kHz sampling frequency
Variable Bit Rate	Yes	No	No
Total Harmonic Distortion + Noise @ 1 kHz	-100 dB @ 420 kbps -90 dB @ 276 kbps	-90 dB	-85 dB
Signal-to-noise ratio @ 1 kHz	135 dB @ 420 kbps 130 dB @ 276 kbps	129 dB	93 dB
Frequency response over Bluetooth	20 Hz – 22.7 kHz	20 Hz – 22.7 kHz	20 Hz – 22.7 kHz

Qualcomm’s aptX, aptX HD and aptX Adaptive codecs successfully address some of the historic shortcomings of Bluetooth by greatly improving audio quality and providing a better listening experience, with fewer dropouts and significantly reduced lip sync issues.

Note: In order to enjoy the benefits of any codec, the source device must also be compatible with that codec. Check the compatibility of your source device here.

Check out these related blog articles:

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Listening Care

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Advanced ANC

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Listening Optimizer

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Ambient Sound

Read other articles in our AV Technology Spotlight series.

Click here to learn more about Yamaha wireless headphones.

Healing on the High Seas

Written by Rich Tozzoli on October 20, 2020. Posted in Brand.

Each year, 16.9 million people die due to lack of access to surgical care. A large percentage of those deaths occur in Africa’s developing nations, where the fragile healthcare systems simply cannot support the overwhelming need for safe surgical procedures.

For over 40 years, an organization called Mercy Ships has been on a mission to change that, by delivering world-class health care and sustainable medical training to over 55 developing countries — all at no cost — via a fleet of hospital ships staffed by volunteers from over 57 nations.

Next year, the current ship, named the Africa Mercy, will be joined by Global Mercy™, a 174-meter, 37,000-ton vessel that will be the largest charitable hospital ship in the world. It will feature six operating rooms and will be equipped with a training center that includes a simulation lab and virtual reality stations. The ship will house over 600 volunteers from around the globe, and will include a 682-seat auditorium, a school, a gym, a cafe and a library. Also onboard will be an array of musical instruments provided by Yamaha.

I caught up with Mercy Ships director of corporate development Russ Holmes recently for a wide-ranging discussion about the past, present and future of the organization, and the ways that music can help heal those in need.

RT: How is Mercy Ships able to provide its services free of charge?

RH: Our current ship, Africa Mercy, is completely staffed by volunteers. Whether you are the captain, chief engineer, someone who cooks the food in the galley or someone who works in the hospital — everyone volunteers their time. They also pay their own way to get to and from the ship and in addition they pay a monthly crew fee to cover their board and lodging. Since the crew pay their own way, any donations that come in to the organization go straight to the people and programs we are providing services for.

Russ Holmes.

We partner with several host governments in sub-Saharan Africa. The Africa Mercy spends ten months in each country and at any one time, we have around eighty patients onboard who receive care in the five operating rooms. The goal is not just to provide lots of free surgeries and then sail away; we also aim to understand what the healthcare plan is for each country we visit and see how we can enhance and add some value to it. So it’s not only about the free medical care, but also the training we provide to local health care professionals, whether they’re a surgeon, anesthetist, nurse, or biomedical technician. We invite them onboard the ship for mentoring programs, and in turn, we visit their facilities and see what upgrades we can suggest.

RT: Your ships are actually multi-purpose, aren’t they?

RH: The Africa Mercy is not just a hospital — it’s actually a floating city. We have a bank onboard, a post office, a hair salon and a full K-12 accredited school system for the children of the volunteer families that live on the ship. We also employ a lot of the local population in each port we visit. They serve as translators and help out in some of the different departments onboard the ship as well. On any given day there are probably about 600 people onboard, with 200 local day workers and 400 or so crew.

RT: How has Yamaha been able to help Mercy Ships achieve its goals?

RH: In talking with the team at Yamaha and sharing our mission and vision, we felt a strong sense of alignment with one another. We wanted to get musical instruments into our patient’s hands because it’s a powerful part of the healing process, and Africans in particular like to celebrate with music.

Unfortunately, sometimes there is a cultural stigma in the continent of Africa regarding people who don’t fit into society with everybody else — for example, those with large facial tumors or women who are incontinent as a result of childbirth injuries. Many of these folks get shunned and pushed out of the village — they literally have to live out in the bush by themselves.

So when they come onboard for their treatment, quite often some of them say that’s the first time anyone has ever been near them in ten or fifteen years. You can see the joy come back to their faces. If you’ve been shunned for so many years and nobody wants to talk to you or have anything to do with you and then you receive free life-changing surgery, it’s amazing. Then you also get to be around other people who have been through similar challenges and you get musical instruments to play as well.

We have a celebration every few weeks, when patients get their sight back because we’ve removed cataracts from their eyes, or when they’re able to feel better about themselves because cleft palates or large facial tumors have been removed. At that point all the musical instruments come out. Believe me, it’s quite the place to be!

All the instruments onboard the new ship Global Mercy will be from Yamaha, and will include drum kits and electronic keyboards — even a grand piano. And since it’s a bigger ship, it will house more children. We want them to learn all different aspects of education, not just geography and English and other languages, so one of the classrooms will give students the opportunity to take music lessons as well. These kids miss out on a lot when they are living onboard — there’s not much green grass in an industrial port, and they are very restricted as to where they can go because their home is a working ship. So all these musical instruments will provide them with an outlet for creativity.

We’ve seen a lot of very gifted, talented and musically oriented people come onboard our ships over the years. To be able to provide them with an opportunity to celebrate by playing music just adds to the joy that comes out of this entire experience.

Photographs courtesy of Mercy Ships.

For more information, visit www.mercyships.org.

What Is HDR10+, and What Does it Mean for Your Home Theater?

Written by Mike Levine on October 16, 2020. Posted in TV & Movies.

In the acronym-heavy world of TV-picture technology, there’s a new kid on the block: HDR10+. It’s the name of a new standard that offers even more accurate visual reproduction than HDR10, which was itself a significant leap forward.

Developed by a consortium that includes two leading television manufacturers and a major film studio, HDR10+ can go toe-to-toe with Dolby Vision™, previously considered the highest quality consumer video format. So, what exactly is HDR10+, and what does it mean to home theater enthusiasts or movie and TV buffs? Let’s take a closer look.

From One Standard to the Next

To understand HDR10+, it’s helpful to know about its predecessor, HDR10, a video standard that was released by the Consumer Technology Association in 2015. “HDR” is an acronym for High Dynamic Range, a term that refers to the brightness and contrast of a TV display. Don’t confuse it with Ultra-High Definition (which you’ll see as “4K UHD” or “8K UHD”), which references your TV screen’s pixel resolution.

An HDR10-supported TV offers a significantly brighter picture than an SDR (Standard Dynamic Range) TV, which uses a much older brightness standard. In this instance, the term “dynamic range” refers to the difference between the darkest and lightest content in the picture. The wider the dynamic range, the more realistic the picture.

One of the ways science quantifies brightness is with a measurement unit called “nits.” SDR TVs can only support up to 100 nits. HDR10 TVs can handle ten times that amount, while HDR10+ supports brightness of 4,000 nits (4 times that of HDR10).

African American man dressed all in black like a super hero with a diagonal cut across the image to show that the HDR10+ is clearer on the left than the HDR on the right. — *HDR10+ / HDR brightness comparison.*

Getting Meta

Another important aspect of HDR is that its video content contains data instructions, known as “metadata,” which configures the television’s color and brightness to best match the video characteristics. HDR10 supports “static metadata,” which consists of a single burst of metadata that custom-configures the TV for the overall video content being displayed. Dolby Vision takes things a step further with its support of “dynamic metadata,” which is encoded with separate instructions for each scene, thus offering much greater accuracy in terms of brightness and colors over the course of the video.

HDR10+ was developed in large part to compete with Dolby Vision. Not only does it support dynamic metadata, it’s even capable of frame-by-frame metadata, which offers an even higher level of accuracy than Dolby Vision. All in all, HDR10+ provides a picture that’s much closer to a cinema experience than anything currently out there.

Young man on stage singing into a microphone. Image has a diagonal slice across the middle showing how much brighter and clearer the HDR10+ version on left is over darker HDR version on right. The words "Every Color" headline on bottom of image. — *Colors are also richer on HDR10+ than HDR10.*

There’s one other important difference between HDR10+ and Dolby Vision, and it’s is not a technical one. Like HDR10, HDR10+ is an open-source standard that’s royalty-free. Dolby Vision, on the other hand, requires manufacturers and content creators to pay license fees to use it — something that should give HDR10+ an edge in terms of the number of products that will likely support it in future.

How to Watch HDR10+ Content

Most widescreen televisions support multiple video formats, and many new models include HDR10+ too. If you’re considering upgrading your TV to reap the benefits of this exciting new standard, note that you can already find native HDR10+ content — albeit still in limited quantities — on a growing list of streaming services that includes Amazon Prime Video, Rakuten, and Google Play™ Movies.

Netflix^® doesn’t offer HDR10+ content at the moment, but it does support HDR10, so you’d still be able to watch content with extremely high quality because TVs with HDR10+ also support HDR10. In addition, an increasing number of HDR10+ movies are becoming available on Ultra High Definition (UHD) Blu-ray Discs™, though of course you’ll need a Blu-ray player that supports HDR10+ as well.

Great Video Demands Great Sound

If you’re upgrading to an HDR10+-capable TV, you also want to have the best sound possible to match the improved visuals. If you have a home theater, consider getting an AV receiver that’s upgradable to HDR10+. Passing the video signal through such a receiver allows you to distribute the audio through your surround sound system at the highest quality while simultaneously reaping all the visual benefits of HDR10+.

Yamaha recently released two HDR10-compatible AV receivers that and will support HDR10+ via a future update. The RX-V4A is a 5.2-channel receiver with 80 watts of power, and the RX-V6A is a 100W 7.2-channel unit. They both include Wi-Fi^®, AirPlay 2^®, Spotify^® Connect and voice control, as well as support for the Yamaha MusicCast wireless whole-home audio system and myriad interconnectivity options.

View of front panel of AV receiver. — *The Yamaha RX-V4A AV receiver.*

View of back of AV receiver showing cable and other input output access. — *The RX-V6A rear panel offers myriad connectivity options.*

Video technology is getting closer and closer to the day when what we see onscreen is equal to what our eyes see in the real world, in terms of brightness, contrast dimension, depth and colors. HDR10+ is a giant step forward to achieving that goal and one that will significantly improve your home theater experience. If you love watching movies and TV shows, this is one area of high-tech well worth checking out!

For more information, visit www.hdr10plus.org.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha RX-V4A AV receiver.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha RX-V6A AV receiver.

Neck and Neck

Written by Robbie Calvo on October 14, 2020. Posted in Electric Guitars.

I tend to buy footwear based on the functionality, fit, comfort, color and (being the diva that I am) how they look!

Running shoes need to provide cushioned support, while deck shoes are great for my live performances because they are flat and allow me to feel the pedalboard beneath my feet when I’m looping. Dress shoes or boots need to work with my wardrobe and (limited) sense of style. Comfort is a plus, but not a prerequisite.

What does any of this have to do with guitars? Well, we take considerable time selecting the appropriate shoe for every occasion, but do we make similar considerations when choosing our guitars? You know, those expensive instruments we covet and adore with our eyes, ears, and more importantly, our hands!

In this installment of The Calvo Report, I thought it would be interesting to explore the anatomy of the electric guitar neck and take a closer look at some of the choices we have (and may not have even considered) when choosing a new instrument.

Neck Tonewoods

Maple and mahogany are extremely strong and stable tonewoods, making them great choices for guitar necks. Roasting the maple is a great way to add additional strength, and the resulting vintage hue is extremely pleasing to the eye, especially when birds-eye, curly or flamed varieties are used.

Fingerboard Tonewoods

Yamaha Revstar guitar with mahogany necks and rosewood fingerboards. — *Revstar guitars have mahogany necks and rosewood fingerboards.*

A fingerboard (sometimes called a fretboard) is glued on top of the guitar neck. Ebony, rosewood and maple are some of the most popular fingerboard tonewoods. Maple fingerboards tend to have satin or gloss finishes while rosewood and ebony are generally left unfinished with open wood grain. I prefer the darker tonewoods, as they look better on camera for my video lessons, plus it’s easier to see what the fingers are doing against those backdrops. There may also be slight tonal variances between the three, but I’m not sure even the most astute listener could identify the difference between the three fingerboard materials in a “blindfold” test.

Fingerboard Radius

This refers to the positive camber (convex or arch shape) of the fingerboard from the low E-string to the high-E string. This is an extremely important detail to pay attention to when choosing a guitar. Vintage instruments typically have a 7″ or 9″ radius. These guitars often feel great for chordal playing, but careful attention needs to be paid to fretwork in the upper regions of the neck to make sure bends remain clean without choking off. Many modern guitars have a 10″, 12″ or even 13″ radius. These flatter cambers are often better for playing slide guitar in standard tuning as well as clean, uninterrupted bending in the higher regions of the neck.

Compound radius fingerboards are common too. For example, the radius at the nut may start at 10″ and gradually flatten out to a 16″ camber in the upper regions of the fingerboard. Various compound ratios are available and can be customized to your preferences by a luthier.

Fret Wire

Revstar guitar with jumbo frets and full C-shape neck profiles. — *Revstar guitars have jumbo frets and full C-shape neck profiles.*

Frets are usually made from “nickel silver” (an alloy that doesn’t actually contain any silver) or stainless steel, and they come in a variety of heights and widths. This may be one of the most important considerations for most players.

Some guitar players like to feel the fretboard under their fingers and may prefer smaller, narrow frets to make that physical connection. However, I prefer jumbo frets (like those found on Yamaha Revstar guitars) because I find string bending, glissandi and position shifts easier on larger fret wire. The downside to larger frets is that you have to be careful not to push down too hard as this will affect the pitch of the notes under your fingers. (The notes will bend slightly sharp if too much pressure is applied.)

Neck Profile and Finish

Guitar necks are available in a wide array of profiles, depending on the brand and style of guitar. Full C-shape, shallow-C, V-shape and slim-wide are all terms used to describe the thickness and feel of the neck. However, these terms don’t necessarily relate directly to actual size, and so they may vary.

The neck finish also plays an important part in the overall feel of a guitar neck. Personally, I prefer a satin-finished neck, as this allows my hand to glide freely along the surface. Gloss finishes are hard-wearing, but tend to be “sticky” to the touch. Oil-finished necks are popular too, and because these finishes tend to be thinner, they provide a more natural wood feel under your fingers.

Scale Length

The two most popular scale lengths for electric guitars are 24¾” and 25½”. The shorter scale length (as on Yamaha Revstar, SBG Series and SA2200 models) brings the frets closer together and the nut closer to your body. String tension is also lower, which allows for easier string bending.

I’d definitely recommend the shorter scale length for people with small hands and a small body frame, and the longer scale length (as provided by Yamaha Pacifica models) for players with larger, stronger hands. Of course, this is ultimately the preference of the player.

*The Yamaha Pacifica 112VM features a maple neck and longer scale length.*

Number of Frets

22-fret necks are the most common on electric guitars. (All current Yamaha electric models feature 22 frets.) However, if for some reason you need to access a full four octaves on your guitar (open low E string to high E), you’ll need a 24-fret neck.

Nut Material and Width

Close-up image of the nuts on the Yamaha Revstar guitar. — *Revstar nut.*

There are many nut options available and choices may vary from builder to builder and model of guitar. Bone, corian, plastic, urea and brass are common materials used, and each will have an effect on the guitar’s tone. The nut slots should allow the strings to glide freely between the tuning pegs and the bridge, and it’s imperative that they be cut with exacting precision for each string gauge to ensure perfect intonation along the entire string length.

String Spacing

The width of the neck — and consequently the nut width — will also determine the spacing between each string. Players with large hands and fingers may want to look for a wide neck with a larger string spacing. Alternately, if you have small hands and are struggling to facilitate chord voicings and scale shapes on a wide neck, a short-scale (24¾”) neck with a narrow nut width may be a consideration for you.

Truss Rod

An internal metal truss rod allows for fine adjustments of positive and negative bow (curvature) along the length of a guitar neck, which ideally should be as straight as possible. On modern guitars, the truss rod covers and the adjustment screws (normally via hex key) are typically found on the headstock; on older instruments, at the heel of the neck. If the truss rod is at the heel of the neck, the strings will need to be loosened to access the adjustment screws.

The Video

I recently filmed a promotional video for the Line 6 POD^® Go guitar processor in which I played two of my favorite guitars: the Yamaha Revstar 720B and 502TFM. Both guitars have a full C-shape mahogany neck, rosewood fingerboard and jumbo frets with a 13″ radius. I also strung both with 10 – 46 gauge strings, which in my opinion provide the perfect string tension on guitars with a 24¾” scale length. String bends, intonation, tone and sustain are further enhanced by the neck-through body construction.

Notice also how easily I glide along the fingerboard to flow between scale patterns and how well the two guitars complement each other on those sweet harmony lead guitar lines.

The Wrap-Up

We spend a lot of time sleeping, so a comfortable bed is key to getting a good nights’ sleep. We also work lots of hours to earn a living, so choosing a job we love is advantageous to thriving in a career.

Our recreational guitar playing time is just as important to our general happiness, so making detailed and informed choices regarding the instruments we play will enhance our enjoyment and ultimate progress on the instrument. Trust me, the necks on the guitars you’re considering make a big difference, so choose wisely!

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha Revstar guitars.

Click here for more information about the Line 6 POD Go.

Beginner’s Guide to the Saxophone

Written by Austin Snowden on October 13, 2020. Posted in Woodwinds. 1 Comment on Beginner’s Guide to the Saxophone

Every musician remembers when they first chose to pick up an instrument. For me, I was amazed by how intricate the saxophone’s keywork was and I wanted to know how it all worked. What sounds could I make with this instrument and where could it take me?

Like most things, knowledge comes with practice and you can’t expect to be perfect on your first try. Regardless, there are some basics that all saxophonists should know. Let’s explore a few of them.

The Air Comes First

First and foremost, the saxophone is a wind instrument. That means at the root of it all, your air is the most important aspect to your playing. On an acoustic saxophone, everything from your tone, pitch, volume, projection and articulation to your style and control — you get the point — starts with your air. So take the time to pay close attention to how you breathe and what your air is doing while you are playing.

By the way, this isn’t just true of acoustic saxophones anymore, because the breath sensor inside the new Yamaha YDS-150 Digital Saxophone can detect the slightest changes in your air speed. So just because you can adjust your volume with a button and change your tone using an app doesn’t mean your air isn’t important!

3d rendering of the breath sensor on the YDS-150 Digital Saxophone. — *YDS-150 breath sensor.*

The Reed Is the Source of the Sound

Close-up image of the saxophone mouthpiece, ligature and reed. — *Saxophone mouthpiece, ligature and reed.*

Next most important is the reed. This is where the “wood” part of the term “woodwind” applies. On an acoustic saxophone, the reed vibrates in response to air pressure, producing the sound waves that are amplified by the rest of the instrument. It’s important to place the tip of the reed either level to, or just below, the tip of the mouthpiece, and that it be secured in place with a ligature. The ligature should be just tight enough that it does not move, but there’s no need to crimp it down any further than “snug.” (Click here for more information.) By the way, although the reed doesn’t vibrate on the YDS-150, it still plays an important role on how the instrument will respond.

Relax!

In support of your air, you need to also have good posture. If you are hunched over, chin down to your chest, and tense throughout your whole body, you won’t be able to take a proper breath. Instead, you need to have a straight back, look directly ahead, and generally be as relaxed as possible. This position should feel comfortable and natural.

Once you’re in this relaxed position, attach the neck strap to your sax and adjust its length so the tip of the mouthpiece reaches your lips without your having to bend over. Place your thumbs on the correct thumb rests, and gently curl your fingers onto the touch pieces of the keys. Pretend you are picking up an empty water bottle, but don’t crush it! This approach should be taken whether you are playing an acoustic saxophone or a digital saxophone — the concept and keywork is the same.

Making a Sound

So you’ve got your sax assembled, and you’ve checked to make sure your posture is upright and relaxed. Now you’re ready to make a sound!

First, though, take a look at the mouthpiece and note where the tip of the reed is. Do you see the point at which the reed touches the mouthpiece? That generally is the point at which you need to create an airtight seal with your embouchure — a technical term for the way in which you apply your mouth to the mouthpiece. Do so by making a cushion with your bottom lip over your bottom teeth, inserting the mouthpiece into your mouth and placing the reed on your bottom lip, then place your top teeth on the top of the mouthpiece (the corners of your mouth should touch the side of the mouthpiece). As shown in the illustration below, this should closely resemble the shape of your mouth when saying the word “oh.”

No biting is necessary, but the bottom lip should be somewhat firm. It may take a while to find the right balance because of the number of different muscles at play, but bear in mind that there is no single right answer as to what your proper embouchure could be! When you’re ready, take a gentle breath in from your diaphragm and release the air, imagining it going through the body of the horn and out across the room. If you’ve done these crucial steps correctly, you should produce a focused and steady note. And don’t worry if your lips quiver a little when getting the mouth shape right — this is a common and short-term side effect of asking something very new of your facial muscles.

One benefit to playing digital saxophones like the YDS-150 is that your embouchure doesn’t directly affect the breath sensor. That’s one reason why digital saxes are great for someone looking to start playing with little to no experience: They allow you to quickly make a great sound out of the box, and focus on actually making music.

Remember, practicing these fundamentals is like learning to talk; you can’t say a full sentence until you learn how to sound a few words. Play long tones to start, learn your scales and always listen to your teacher or private instructor — they have been in your shoes and best know how to troubleshoot any issues you may encounter. Welcome to the saxophone!

Click here for information about Yamaha acoustic saxophones.

Click here for information about the Yamaha YDS-150 Digital Saxophone.

Click here to find a Yamaha woodwind dealer near you.

Finding My Inner Joni

Written by Shelly Peiken on October 12, 2020. Posted in Creativity.

Let’s face it, if you had a PB&J for lunch on the same plate at the same table every day, you might get, shall we say, palate fatigue. At some point you may start considering a tuna sandwich or a bowl of pasta just to keep things interesting at meal time.

Well, the same thing goes for creativity. What if we wrote every song in the same key? Yawn.

I’ve noticed that when I compose on guitar by myself (which I’ve been doing a lot these days), I tend to default to the same chord progressions, the same voicings — in other words, my old tricks. Sure, I can slap on a capo and lift my range but lately I’ve been hungry for more adventurous techniques to perk up my spirit.

Although I’ve long been fully aware that alternative guitar tunings can transport us to uncharted creative territories, there seems to be an opposing force that keeps me from straying from the norm. Why?

I’ve come to the conclusion that there are three main reasons:

1. I’m lazy. Many people can tune their guitars by ear. Not me. So having to change tuning means hoisting my body from that comfy chair and fetching a tuner. And what if, on the way to fetch it, I lose the idea that was percolating? Sure, I should keep a tuner clipped to my instrument — that’s why tuners have clips. But even then, I’d eventually have to …

2. … tune the strings back to standard position because that’s where most of my songs “live.” My fantasy is to one day own 5 acoustics — all of which could be left in a designated tuning and I’d never have to lift a finger except to play them. In the meantime …

3. What if, while performing a song in an altered tuning, I forget to tune back to standard for my next song and unmindfully position my fingers as if I had? This could result in one huge disastrous clam!

Sigh. There are endless excuses. Perhaps you have some yourself. The truth is, for me, it feels like work to learn something new. But I should know better, because whenever I do expand my palette (as well as my palate) and challenge myself, I discover the unexpected. And I always thank myself later.

That said, it’s not like I’ve never dabbled in alternate tunings before. I’ve actually explored the Joni Mitchell favorite — the “Big Yellow Taxi” open E — quite a bit. It’s effortless. In fact, sliding one lone finger up and down the fretboard produced some magical results. My harmonic synapses were so stimulated I churned out two new songs (“Christmas In LA” and “17”) within an hour of getting started.

But it’s been awhile. So, inspired by Mac Randall’s “Altered Tunings” Yamaha blogs in which he states that “a whole universe of possibilities open up when you turn a few pegs,” I decided to revisit that creative space again. I’m not a sophisticated musician. At first, unfamiliar terms in the article like “minor-second intervals” and “modal” were intimidating. But when I listened to his audio examples, I heard what he was talking about. “You don’t always know what you’re playing, and that’s a good thing for your creativity,” he writes. I couldn’t agree more. I’m a songwriter. I don’t need to understand why. Just make me feel.

I decided to start with what Mr. Randall calls the “Ed Sheeran” tuning (E-A-D-E-B-E) and got busy. I’m already thanking myself. Here I am playing my new song “Muscle Memory” in that tuning, using Ruby, my Yamaha FS-TA Transacoustic guitar:

Next time, perhaps I’ll remove my low E-string like Keith Richards does. Or maybe I’ll graduate to detuning two, or even three strings! As for that potential disastrous clam when performing? Well, like my song says, we have to have faith in muscle memory — that with enough practice and repetition our fingers intuitively know where to fall. (The little cheat sheet with titles and tunings discretely affixed to the side of my guitar doesn’t hurt either.)

The important thing is that I’m getting more comfortable being somewhere outside the box. I have more options, and I’m having more fun. Plus I’m excited about the possibilities, which makes life (and creativity) more interesting.

And that makes getting up out of my comfy chair worth it.

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

4 Steps in Caring for Mallet Percussion Instruments

Written by Troy C. Wollwage on October 11, 2020. Posted in Percussion.

After a semester of percussion activities, it’s time to assess all your instruments, including marimbas, vibraphones and xylophones, and take proactive steps to protect your equipment.

With performances, rehearsals, and transportation to venues and practice facilities, mallet instruments undergo a lot of stress and strain. The good news is that keeping your mallet instruments in top shape is a matter of following four steps.

The Four Key Steps

Step 1: Take Inventory — Take a complete inventory of all your mallet instruments at the end of each semester. This eliminates the question of “what do we actually have” and will help cut down on “disappearing” equipment during downtimes. Ensure that every instrument has a proper cover. Take note of every instrument model number, serial number and any pending repair issues.

Step 2: Designate a Contact — Select an individual — it can be a member of the percussion staff or a student leader — to be responsible for all the mallet instruments during the semester. This person will make sure that maintenance checks are done after every performance. The best way to ensure that mallet instruments are well-cared for and ready for the next performance is for ensemble staff members to be diligent about post-event care.

Step 3: Find the Proper Environment— Keep all mallet instruments in a cool, dry environment all year. Extreme changes in temperature can cause extra wear and tear on equipment, so, for example, do not leave mallet percussion instruments in an equipment truck for any length of time. To ensure the integrity of the equipment, keep all instruments in a safe and secure location. Due to extreme weather during the winter, improper storage can cause significant damage to mallet keyboards.

Step 4: Keep it Clean — At the end of every semester, all mallet instruments should be thoroughly cleaned. Take the bars off each instrument. Wipe down the rails and end pieces with a dry, soft cloth, removing any dust in the process.Then place clean covers on all instruments before storing them in a well-ventilated, room-temperature location that is safe from significant changes in temperature and humidity. Remove all mallet bags because they can get overcrowded with extra weight like water bottles, which can damage the rails and resonators.

Care Details: Cleaning Tone Bars

The bars of marimbas and xylophones are made of wood, chiefly the highest quality rosewood. Some instruments use wood called padauk. These woods are dried over long periods of time — sometimes as long as three years — to lower the moisture content so that the resulting bars yield lingering reverberations. Because moisture is the archenemy of bars, avoid playing mallet instruments in the rain or in other damp environments.
The surfaces of marimba and xylophone bars are painted to protect them from humidity. The paint on the bars can be harmed by dust, so carefully wipe the surface with a dry cloth.
Never use rubbing alcohol (isopropyl alcohol) on marimba or xylophone wood bars because it can be hazardous to the finishes over time. Even in small quantities, such as spatter drops, alcohol can act as a solvent, damaging the wood finish.
Vibraphone bars are made from a mixture of aluminum alloy and topped with a silver or gold finish. They should be cleaned with light soapy water and thoroughly dried off every week or so. (Any time the instrument is played outside, it should be wiped down.) Do not let vibraphone bars air dry.

Care Details: Never Use Metallic Mallets

Never use metallic mallets on marimbas, xylophones or vibraphones because they can damage or break the bars.

Care Details: Damaged Bars

Replace the bar if the pitch is off, the bar is broken, the surface has peeled off or if the bar is otherwise damaged.

Care Details: Adjusting and Cleaning Resonators

Metal resonators, or tubes, are affixed beneath the bars. The bars and resonators are tuned so that they project sound the best when the temperature of the room is 23°C, or 73.4°F. If the room’s temperature is higher or lower, the resonators will need to be tuned. Humidity affects the resonators as well.
If the room’s temperature is higher, the pitches of the bars will be lower, but those of the resonators will be higher. In this situation, lower the pitch of the resonators to create better resonance. The opposite is true for when the room’s temperature is lower — the bars’ pitches are higher, and the resonators’ pitches are lower.
With instruments with adjustable resonators, move the opening of the pipes closer to the bars to lower the pitch. Conversely, move the resonators farther away from the bars to raise the pitch. Use the resonator receptacle under the lower-note bars to change the size of the gap between the resonators and the bars. When the temperature of the room is high, position the resonators high, or closer to the tone bars; and when the room’s temperature is lower, set the resonators in a lower position, away from the bars.
When a mallet instrument sounds strange, look inside the resonators because there might be something like a pencil, an eraser, grass or dirt stuck inside. Each resonator tube’s length is based on its corresponding tone bar; if something is trapped inside, it effectively shortens the space inside and changes the sound. Sound is also affected if dust has accumulated inside the resonators. A few times each semester, flip over the pipes and clean them using a can of compressed air to remove dust or any particles that may have fallen inside.

Care Details: Bar Suspension Cords

The bars of a marimba, vibraphone and xylophone are suspended from cords, and the tension of these cords may need to be adjusted. If the cords are too taut, the bars will rebound too much when struck. If the cords are too loose, they will absorb the vibrations and sound will not project well from the instrument.
To adjust the tension of the suspension cord, use the springs and cord-tighteners, which are found on the bass side, to alter the cord’s length and the location of the knots.
The amount of tension is acceptable if there is an adequate amount of elasticity when the cord is pushed down with a finger while connected to the springs.
If a cord is starting to fray, replace it as soon as possible.

Care Details: Watch for Bent Bar-Posts

The metal fixtures that anchor the suspension cords are called bar-posts. These fixtures can bend after repeated transporting of the instrument. Bent bar-posts will interfere with the vibrations of the bars, so always check the bar-posts before playing.

Storage

When storing a mallet instrument for long periods of time, take the bars off and carefully pack them in a bar bag. Store the bag in the director’s office or drum room to ensure that the bars are not mishandled during storage. Make sure to avoid extreme temperature changes and high humidity to keep the bars looking and sounding fresh.

Finally, never place anything on top of a mallet instrument while it is stored. Mallet keyboards are not table tops. As attractive as they might be, placing something as delicate as a large winter coat will degrade the bars over time and place unnecessary weight on the rails.

This article was adapted from the Yamaha Musical Instrument Guide.

The Timeless Connection

Written by Yamaha Corporation of America on October 9, 2020. Posted in Artists, Keyboard Artists.

“I have always used music to communicate and connect with people. My personality is kind of shy so I’ve always struggled to express myself, but when I play music, I feel like I can be 100% me.”

So says Jackie Miclau, keyboardist with emerging indie rock band Mt. Joy. The group toured with the Lumineers earlier this year, playing sold-out arenas across the U.S. and taking Miclau’s professional career to new musical heights. “I just love being in that space [when I’m playing]. It’s like this perfect world of music, and when people listen to me play, I hope I can help create that same space for them too.”

Jackie Miclau.

Early Days

Miclau started playing piano at the age of 5, with an emphasis on classical music. She quickly became an accomplished young musician in a household that stressed musical excellence. “My dad was super passionate about the piano, but because he didn’t have the means to take lessons [when he was a kid], he was kind of living out that passion through [his children]. When we were growing up, during the summer he would leave blank cassette tapes for my brother and I before leaving for work. We would have to record hours of our piano practice on them every day before he got home, and he would listen back to make sure — before erasing the tapes so we could do it again the next day!”

“That was traumatizing,” Miclau jokes, “It was the worst! But you know what? Today I can play the piano.”

A Change in Direction

Jackie was such a prodigious talent as a child that she began regularly competing in piano contests, which led to a life-changing event — one that resulted in an abrupt change in direction. “I was fifteen, and I had spent an entire year working with my teacher memorizing this Haydn concerto,” she explains. “I don’t remember how many pages [it was], but it was like a little book. When I went to the competition and sat down to perform, I had a memory slip and I couldn’t remember anything past the first page.”

With the support of her teacher, Miclau handled the embarrassing moment in stride, but it led her to realize that the stress of competing was interfering with her enjoyment of the music. “I just thought, ‘Why am I doing this? These competitions don’t define how good I can play.’”

The decision freed Miclau up to dive deeper into more diverse musical genres — styles like electronic, jazz and pop — and she started gigging with different bands. Yet for all the progress she was making, Miclau realized that she still had a way to go. After one early jam session, she remembers an old blues musician telling her, ‘You can play the blues, but you sound too classical.’ “That was such a punch in the gut!” she recalls with a laugh. “But that’s when I really started to realize that it’s more about feel than being able to play something really fast.”

Calming Chaos

Jackie’s current work with Mt. Joy reflects her eclectic range of influences, from her early days playing piano hymns in church to blues improvisations and modern electronic sounds. But for Miclau, the most important thing is the feeling between the artist and instrument, and the power it has to bring people together — a feeling she hopes to inspire in others through her music.

“Right now, we live in such a chaotic world,” she notes. “With technology having everyone constantly on their phones or doing something on their laptops, it can feel a little crazy sometimes. But I encourage people to just do it [pick up an instrument], because I truly believe music soothes the soul. If people can take a little break and listen to some music or play an instrument to get their minds off things, that’s a really beautiful thing. I know it’s helped me a lot in my own life.”

Young woman in a dress sitting on the floor surrounded by scattered sheet music next to a grand piano that has more sheet music on the stand. — *Jackie Miclau with Yamaha C7 grand piano.*

For more information, visit www.jackiemiclau.com.

Check out these related blog posts:

Scott Mayo on building a strong foundation for a lifetime of good habits

Larry Mullen Jr. reflects on the beginnings of U2

Butch Walker talks about practicing through the roadblocks

Three Reasons to Upgrade Your System for Modern Gaming

Small boy and his father playing video games and communicating in the living room.

New Gaming Features You Can Enjoy in Your Home Theater

Written by Ted Goslin on October 8, 2020. Posted in Gaming.

Gamers know that there’s nothing more exciting than plugging in the latest console and starting your next adventure … that is, unless you’re gaming with an outdated TV and lackluster audio equipment.

With each new generation, video game consoles have continued to level-up both their video and audio capabilities, from 8-bit to 4K Ultra HD, from mono to surround sound. In this article, we’ll walk you through the most important features being offered by the latest systems and describe the ways you can best enjoy those features in your home theater.

New and Improved

According to the Entertainment Software Association^® (ESA), approximately 214 million people actively played video games in the United States last year. The soon-to-be-released Microsoft Xbox™ Series X, and its more compact version, the Xbox Series S, are the first of the company’s next-gen gaming consoles, and both offer significant improvements to the previous Xbox One offerings. These include the removal of the disc drive in favor of digital downloads, and a more powerful CPU that’s four times faster than its predecessor. In this article, we’ll use the Xbox Series X as our frame of reference.

Image of the Xbox Series X (left) and Xbox Series S (right) with their respective controllers. — *The Xbox Series X (left) and Xbox Series S (right).*

Seeing is Believing

As described in our blog article HDMI^® 2.1: What It Means for Gear and Gamers, the latest HDMI specifications offer a number of new video capabilities, including image resolutions that can support 4K UHD signal (so long as they are playing on the right equipment and the game itself is built to those specs). Xbox Series X will support a host of HDMI capabilities, including 4K video at 120 fps (frames per second) and Dolby Vision^® HDR (High-Dynamic Range), an advanced technology from Dolby that provides more color depth and brightness than standard HDR.

Some AV receivers provide support for these features, including the new Yamaha RX-V6A, which offers both 4K UHD and Dolby Vision HDR. If you’re planning on connecting your gaming console, make sure your AV receiver has a sufficient number of inputs (the RX-V6A has seven). This is important since one of the inputs will need to be devoted to receiving incoming signal from your console, and you’ll likely need several others to connect additional devices such as an Apple TV^®, Roku^®, Firestick or older gaming consoles.

*A screenshot from the Xbox Series X title“Senua’s Saga: Hellblade II.”*

Listen Up

Has your home audio system kept pace to deliver the excitement of a low-end rumble and the subtlety of ghostly whispers? If not, you might want to consider an upgrade because the latest gaming consoles offer considerable audio as well as video enhancements. For example, 3D surround sound has become popular with game developers, who use it to create a more immersive audio experience that goes way beyond two-channel stereo. The new Xbox offers 3D spatial sound, which will be available via dedicated audio hardware. This will make it easier to reveal where enemies and allies are coming from — around, above and below you — to simulate more realistic environments. (The Xbox Series X and Series S will be the first-ever game consoles to support both Dolby Vision HDR and Dolby Atmos^® surround sound simultaneously).

The proper reproduction of 3D surround sound, however, requires the right kind of audio equipment. Your sound bar or AV receiver will have that capability if it supports Dolby Atmos or DTS:X™, which utilize multiple speakers to create a 3D soundfield to accompany the onscreen gaming action in a more realistic and natural way than basic surround sound. (Both technologies are supported by the Yamaha RX-V6A.) AV receivers, which act as a central hub for games, TV shows and movies, have the added benefit of being able to handle all of your audio and video needs.

The Yamaha RX-V6A AV receiver. — *Yamaha RX-V6A.*

Most new game consoles benefit from eARC (short for Enhanced Audio Return Channel) — a feature that’s provided by AV receivers like the RX-V6A. This technology allows audio to be sent from your TV to your AV receiver or sound bar with enhanced bandwidth and speed, and through the same HDMI cable that sends the signal from your AV receiver/sound bar to the TV.

Voice Control

On top of enhanced video and audio capabilities, most new gaming consoles offer voice control. This powerful feature allows you to integrate the console with other smart home devices such as TVs, lights and shades so you can set the mood whenever you decide it’s game time. Xbox Series X (and previous Xbox One models) offers a number of smart home skills for Amazon Alexa, which include commands to turn Xbox on or off, launch or pause games, and adjust volume. AV receivers like the Yamaha RX-V6A provide the option for voice control via connected devices, but there are also sound bars, like the Yamaha YAS-109, which include many of the audio features mentioned above, along with Alexa built-in.

Yamaha YAS-109 sound bar. — *Yamaha YAS-109.*

Start Small

If space and/or budget are an issue, consider using a regular or compact sound bar with your gaming console. For those with smaller TVs or less room to play with (pun intended), the Yamaha SR-C20A compact sound bar is a great option. The C20A offers Dolby 2D virtual surround sound and a built-in subwoofer to capture the low-end elements in your favorite games.

Yamaha SR-C20A compact sound bar. — *Yamaha SR-C20A.*

If you’d like a few more features, the Yamaha SR-B20A sound bar provides 3D virtual surround sound via DTS^® Virtual:X™ technology, plus two built-in subwoofers for even more low-end boost. Both models provide four different sound modes, including a Game setting.

Whichever new game console you decide to buy, pairing it with a home audio system that’s up to the task is a sure recipe for maximizing the fun factor!

Xbox and “Senua’s Saga: Hellblade II” images ©2020 Microsoft.

Check out these related blog articles:

HDMI 2.1: What It Means for Gear and Gamers

Gaming in Dolby Atmos: An Interview with Josh Osiris

What’s So Good About Dolby Atmos and DTS:X?

How to Connect Nintendo Switch™ to Your TV, Sound Bar or AV Receiver

Click here for more information about the Yamaha RX-V AV receivers.

Click here for more information about Yamaha sound bars.

Get Ready, Get Set … Mix!

Written by Mike Levine on October 7, 2020. Posted in Recording.

Ask five audio engineers how they start their mixes, and you’re likely to get five different answers. Mixing is more art than science, and there are myriad ways to get to a great-sounding result.

But when you’re new to mixing and haven’t yet had the time or experience to develop your own style, it’s easy to sit and stare at your DAW and think, “Where do I begin?”

Here’s a suggested road map for starting a mix.

Get Organized

Before you even start moving onscreen faders or turning knobs, you want to make sure to organize things — a topic we covered in detail in a previous blog.

In a nutshell, it’s helpful to first arrange your tracks by type, color-code them for easy recognition, then add markers at the start of each song section. That way, you’re beginning each mix from an orderly and logical place.

Screenshot of control panel. — *Organize your mix window before you start.*

Another helpful preparatory task is to play each track in solo mode, listening for glitches and noises and mistakes that you didn’t notice with everything playing. I’m always surprised by the number of little things I find and end up fixing during this process.

If you discover pitch issues, particularly on your vocal tracks, this is an excellent time to pitch-correct them. If you’re using Steinberg Cubase, the VariAudio feature is very powerful for fixing pitch issues. Read more about pitch correction here.

Envision Your Final Product

Next, try to visualize what you want the final product to sound like. It’s helpful to have a rough goal in mind for the sound of the final mix, so before you move a single fader, think about songs you know that have a similar vibe, and spend some time listening to them.

Analyze these reference mixes as you listen and ask yourself questions like: How loud is the lead vocal compared to the tracks? What kind of ambience effects — reverb and delay — are there on the vocal, and how are they being applied? How loud are the drums compared to the rest of the instruments? Is there a lot of reverb in general on the mix or does it sound pretty dry?

There’s no shame in copying mix ideas from professionally produced material — doing so can only help you improve your repertoire of techniques. So if you hear something cool, try to figure out how to reproduce that sound.

Now, finally, onto the actual mixing.

Ground Zero

A good way to begin is to set all of your tracks to unity gain (0dB), all your pan controls to center, and switch off any processing plug-ins like EQs, compressors, reverbs and delays that you may have added during the recording process. (The only exception would be for plug-ins that are critical for creating the raw sound of a track, such as virtual instruments or an amp modeler on a DI guitar track.) In the analog days, this is what used to be referred to as “zeroing out the console.” The idea is to start from a neutral place.

As you get more experienced, you may end up “mixing as you go,” which means putting together a rough mix as you’re recording the song. But beginners will find it more helpful to start from scratch.

Once your DAW console is zeroed out, play through the song and start adjusting the volume faders to get as good-sounding a balance as you can. For this step, you want to focus exclusively on the level relationships between the tracks.

Left, Right and In Between

Next, start panning. You’ll be surprised how everything springs to life when you give it space in the panorama. As described in our blog entitled “The Virtual Soundstage,” creating a place for each track is one of the key goals when mixing.

Although there are many different panning approaches, putting the lead vocal, the bass, the bass drum, and the snare drum dead center is standard practice in just about every contemporary pop music mix.

With that as your baseline, position the other instruments to create whatever panorama you think sounds good. Be careful, however, to keep elements that are predominantly in the same frequency range (such as rhythm guitars and chordal keyboard parts) in different panning positions. Otherwise, they can mask one another, making it hard for the listener to distinguish between those sounds.

At this point, it’s a good idea to check your mix on headphones, where panning always appears more extreme because the left and right sides are completely discrete — unlike when you’re listening on speakers and hearing room reflections too.

EQ for You

The next step is to listen to your tracks and adjust any frequency problems or deficiencies with equalization — a topic we covered in detail in our “Practical EQ Techniques” blog.

EQ can help with frequency masking too. If you have two instruments that are masking each other and for some reason you can’t apply separate panning to them, try boosting a small frequency range in one and cutting the same range in the other. If necessary, you can repeat this process in a different frequency range, this time boosting the second track and cutting the first one.

Another way to clear up muddiness is to use high-pass filters (also known as low-cut filters) to remove unnecessary low frequencies from a track. A good way to do this is to solo the track in question, then slowly raise the frequency on the high-pass filter until you hear the instrument or vocal start to thin out, then back it off to the point right before you heard it change. Then turn off the solo button and check the track with all the instruments playing (all adjustments should always be checked in the context of the full mix). Doing this for each track will help bring clarity to your final product.

Squeeze It

Now it’s time to listen to the dynamics of the tracks and apply compression where necessary. If you hear parts that are too loud or too soft in spots, compressing them will knock down the peaks, narrowing the dynamic range. That will make it easier to turn the overall track volume up to compensate for quieter parts, without the louder parts sticking out.

Alternatively, you can do “compression by hand” with the use of volume automation, which lets you change levels on a track at any point by any amount.

Vintage compressor plug-ins can also be used for adding “color” to instruments or voices. You can find out more about compression in our “Why Compress?” blog.

Space is Nice

Now you can feel free to start adding reverb and delay wherever you like. Both of these effects are best applied from an aux track (called an “FX Track” in Cubase.) However, bear in mind that reverb that takes too long to decay can wash over successive notes and cause muddiness, especially on up-tempo songs. A basic rule of thumb here is: the faster the tempo, the shorter the decay time (sometimes called “reverb time.”)

Using the reverb’s EQ controls to reduce the low end of the reverberated signal can help with clarity. Read more about effective ways of using reverb here.

Break Time

At this point, you’ve got a rough mix going. Now it’s time to take a break for an hour or two … or even better, until the next day. Come back with a fresh perspective, and you’re sure to hear things you want to adjust. Mixing is a process, and you’ll likely need several stabs at it to get it to get it sounding exactly how you want to. In the meantime, you’re off to a good start!

Check out the other articles in our “History of Musical Genres” series.

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase and Cubase plug-ins.

Under the Lid: The Custom Pianos of J. Elliott and Co.

Written by Jerry Kovarsky on October 6, 2020. Posted in Piano Artists.

From their workshop/showroom located in Central Florida, husband and wife Justin and Jina Elliott perform what can only be called piano alchemy — an almost magical process of transforming Yamaha pianos into whatever their clients can imagine. Their company, J. Elliott and Co., is dedicated to perfecting the sound and optimizing the feel of the pianos they customize, while matching the look of each instrument to the environment and personal taste of the owner.

The art of customizing pianos is a niche, to be sure, and it’s one that J. Elliott and Co. have created for themselves. It often involves coming up with new colors or veneers to help the instrument better fit into the décor of a room or stand out spectacularly on a concert stage or film set, but also sometimes includes redesigning parts like the legs, music stands and benches. Justin and Jina’s star-studded client list includes The Piano Guys/Disney, David Foster, Andrea Bocelli, and most famously, Prince, for whom they created a custom purple piano.

Attention to Detail

Grand piano with curved legs in a setting with an ornate staircase behind it and paintings on adjacent wall. — *Royal Ebony grand piano.*

Justin got interested in piano as a thirteen-year old, when his parents bought an old baby grand piano. He quickly became fascinated by how it worked, and even tried to fix aspects of the instrument after asking a litany of questions of the piano tuner that would visit. This led to an introduction to well-known piano technician Susan Graham, who mentored the youth and eventually got him accepted into a rigorous Yamaha training program, which he graduated at the ripe age of 17 — the youngest person to go through the company’s comprehensive courses at the time. During those classes he learned skills such as basic piano regulation, hammer replacement, voicing and concert tuning, as well as Disklavier maintenance and calibration.

During the ensuing years, Elliott began to dream of new design ideas, drawing sketches, and refining his ideas until, in 2001, he produced his first curved leg. Some years later, this became part of Justin’s first custom piano — a modified Yamaha C7 that he called the Royal Ebony. Much to his surprise, tests revealed that the curved design of the legs had a positive effect on the sound of the instrument too!

Let’s take a look at some of J. Elliott’s most interesting designs through the years.

Prince’s Purple Piano

Prince's custom Yamaha purple grand piano.

In 2015, representatives for Prince reached out to Chris Gero, founder of Yamaha Entertainment Group of America, about making a purple piano for Prince’s upcoming Piano & A Microphone solo tour. “It was so exciting to get that call,” says Justin. “It was kept very quiet; only a few people knew about it and were part of the process. He had chosen a Yamaha C7XSH model and wanted it to be painted a very specific color purple. I was sent a tiny piece of suede from one of his couches to match, and we went back and forth with him a number of times until he was satisfied. I had to use a lot of different gloss additives for the paint to make it really pop under stage lights.” The color, in fact, went on to become an official Pantone color: Love Symbol #2.

Spray painting grand piano. — *Painting Prince’s Purple Piano.*

“There was a lot of dialog between Prince, Yamaha and myself,” Justin recalls. “For example, he already loved the piano, but he had some specific requests for the touch and response of the keys — he had great touch and control.”

After about a week after receiving the piano, Prince tweeted: “BOOM (FROM LOTUSFLOWER) ON THIS NEWLY ARRIVED PURPLE PRESENT FROM YAMAHA … ‘RESOUNDING!’”

“On April 16, 2016,” said Chris Gero in an article in the Orange County Register, “Prince invited a small crowd to a music party at Paisley Park … The piano was covered with a purple cloth. He had canceled recent shows in Atlanta, and rumors were flying that he was very sick. ‘Wait a few days before you waste any prayers,’ Prince told the crowd. Then Prince dramatically pulled the cloth off the purple piano. He played chopsticks first, then a few minutes of classical music without singing.”

“It’s the last instrument Prince ever played in public,” adds Justin, “which is a deep honor for all of us involved. I’ve been told by so many people who were around him that the piano brought him so much joy.”

The Avatar Piano

“This piano was a commission from the Piano Guys for a video they were shooting on the Avatar set at Disneyworld in Florida, so Disney was also very involved,” says Justin. “I had to come up with a pretty neutral design that didn’t compete with the space around it, but I wanted to give it some special lines and look, even though we had a very short time to do it. So we started from one of my existing designs that I call the Grand Rossa [see below], which has really striking leg and bench lines. I changed it to satin black, to fit in as a neutral tone, and I removed a couple of pieces here and there to make the lines a little cleaner. We went back and forth a bunch with ideas, especially about the finishing sheen to put on the piano.”

Watch the video here.

Grand Rossa

Customized Yamaha grand piano, black with red trim.

“The Grand Rossa came from a request from a Ferrari enthusiast,” says Justin. “He wanted a Disklavier piano for his garage/man-cave, which would be sharing space with his car collection. So I did a lot of research on Ferraris, and the 1957 Testa Rossa had a lot of good lines and inlets that I incorporated into my design. Look at the tail leg that is at the far end of the piano, and how the design element sweeps across the side of the piano. A lot of people say it looks like it’s just floating. That came directly from the back quarter of the car’s design. I wanted to show the curve of the piano on the back end, and when you are adding massive red highlights to a solid black piano, it really defines it.”

Sol Vas Yacht

Grand piano in a formal living room setting on a yacht.

The legs for this piano were designed to match its environment — the hull of a luxury yacht. “It’s mahogany to match the ship’s interior with gold lines everywhere,” explains Justin. “We went through a lot of veneer to get as close a match as possible. It’s not just about color, but it’s the grain in each piece and based on the angle you view the piano from. Since the piano is in open air, and out to sea a lot, they had a custom heavy-duty, marine-grade fire-retardant cover made that goes all the way to the ground, so they can pack it up safely when they’re underway, or if they’re leaving doors open for an extended period of time.”

All photographs courtesy of J. Elliott and Co.

Click here for more information about Yamaha pianos.

Click here for more information about J. Elliott & Co.

The History of Musical Genres, Part 1: Classical Music

Written by Marc Hopkins on October 5, 2020. Posted in History.

Predated by a baroque era that had been dominated by the prolific output of Johann Sebastian Bach, the classical period is generally defined by music created between the late 18th and early 19th centuries, as exemplified by the works of Haydn, Mozart and Beethoven, among others. During this time, the now familiar forms of classical music began to take shape: the symphony (compositions written for full orchestras, usually in four parts); the concerto (one or more soloists interacting with an orchestra); and the sonata, performed in several movements by a solo pianist.

While the art form was conceived centuries ago, classical music’s impact on modern music is significant. For example, the chorus — a brief melody repeated throughout most pop songs, from The Beatles’ “She Loves You” to Michael Jackson’s “Beat It” and beyond — is an idea that started in the classical era.

Let’s take a closer look at the history of this genre and some of its key players.

Haydn

Born in 1732, Joseph Haydn is often called the father of the string quartet and the symphony. While he didn’t create those musical structures, his body of work set the standard for the composers who came after him.

“His greatest contribution was consolidating the sonata form, a three-part musical structure that lays out a couple of themes, messes around with them and then restores them to their original design,” wrote music critic David Stabler in a 2009 story published in the Oregonian. “Before Haydn, tunes didn’t develop much; they unfolded and repeated. He took a tune, slapped it around, put it through different keys and stretched it over changing rhythmic textures.”

Haydn also stands apart due to the infusion of Gypsy influences in his music. For example, during his Piano Trio No. 39 in G Major, the polite, delicate pace of the composition is abandoned for a passionate rapid-fire exchange between the piano and strings.

Mozart

By the time Haydn met the 25-year-old Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart in 1781, Mozart was already famous. A child prodigy who had written several compositions before age 6, Mozart would create 600 works in his short 35 years, including symphonies, concertos, sonatas, operas, chamber music, and string quartets and quintets. His unusual life was captured (though not necessarily with 100% accuracy) in the 1984 fictional biopic Amadeus.

One of Mozart’s most lasting works is A Little Night Music — a piece that was created for an ensemble of two violins, viola and cello with optional double bass, but is mostly performed by string orchestras. The composition has graced the soundtracks of motion pictures like Alien, Batman Begins and There’s Something about Mary. Mozart is also well known for The Magic Flute and The Marriage of Figaro, two of the most popular operas of all time. The overture to the latter is part of the soundtrack to The Last Action Hero.

One of the many reasons that a thirst for Mozart endures is the notion that his works speak to our deepest values. In 2016, Paul Salerni, a composer and professor of music at Lehigh University, told the Christian Science Monitor that “Mozart is relevant today because his music, at its best (e.g., his opera The Marriage of Figaro), expresses something deep about the human condition.”

Salerni still feels this way. In a recent interview with the author, he explained that Mozart’s music can translate our humanity in ways that far exceed other composers of the classical era. “This is something that I’m not sure there is a rational explanation for,” he says. “But there is something about the humanity in Mozart that comes out immediately. Some perpetrators of music capture it more quickly than others.”

Beethoven

And then there’s Ludwig van Beethoven, perhaps the most famous of all classical composers … despite being deaf in one ear. This year marks his 250th birthday, which has spawned numerous celebrations of the composer’s life and music. As a cultural force and musical risk-taker, he stands apart from his peers.

“He not only left his mark on all subsequent composers but also molded entire institutions,” wrote music critic Alex Ross in a 2014 article in The New Yorker. “The professional orchestra arose, in large measure, as a vehicle for the incessant performance of Beethoven’s symphonies. The art of conducting emerged in his wake. The modern piano bears the imprint of his demand for a more resonant and flexible instrument.”

Testimony to the composer’s greatness lies in the fact that even diehard non-classical music fans are familiar with the first four notes of Beethoven’s Fifth Symphony (da-da-da-dum) — a staple of every school music program. His Ninth Symphony stands out not only because of its lilting melody but because, clocking in at 70 minutes, it took twice as long to perform as other compositions of that era! Beethoven also added a chorus and vocal soloists in the final movement — the first major composer to do so in a symphony.

Contemporary Classical

Some may think of classical music as a relic of the distant past, but there were many hugely influential classical composers in the late 19th and 20th centuries, including Chopin, Tchaikovsky, Strauss, Rachmaninoff, and Stockhausen.

In fact, you may be surprised to learn that the genre is very much alive today. “There is an incredibly vibrant classical scene,” says Timothy Weiss, professor of conducting at the Oberlin Conservatory of Music. “I don’t think the landscape of contemporary classical music has ever been more wide than it is right now.”

According to Weiss, most music created before the 20th century employed a storytelling approach, with one theme leading into the other. Modern composers, on the other hand, have largely rejected that approach. “There is a lot of music today that has no narrative structure at all,” he says. “It’s static, it’s intentionally not trying to be narrative and it’s unbelievably beautiful. But you have to listen differently.”

Whether you’re a fan or not, there’s no arguing the influence of classical music on virtually every genre that followed. Try treating yourself to a little Haydn, Mozart or Beethoven, and see if you can detect in their compositions the roots of the music you love listening to today.

Woman listens to music with noise-cancelling headphones.

Advanced ANC

Written by Joy Frye on October 2, 2020. Posted in Music and Streaming. 1 Comment on Advanced ANC

There are times when we all want to shut out the world around us and disappear into our own private space with our favorite music. For those times, noise-cancelling headphones are a must. These kinds of devices have been commercially available since 1989, when they were used by pilots to reduce cockpit noise. Since then, the technology has evolved to handle the wide range of frequencies involved in music, but not all noise-cancelling is the same.

The challenge is eliminating noise without changing the music we love. Modern active noise-cancelling (ANC) technology uses microphones, both internally and externally positioned, to measure noise; processing is then applied to remove the noise component. Thanks to ever-shrinking electronic circuitry, ANC is commonly found in headphones, earphones and even earbuds today. However, differences in placement of microphones and processing mean that ANC is still not a consistent experience for all ear sizes and head shapes.

Enter Advanced ANC, one of the adaptive technologies featured in the new top-of-the line Yamaha YH-E700A wireless noise-cancelling headphones and EP-E70A wireless noise-cancelling earphones. This takes ANC to a higher level by not only measuring the external noise of the environment but also precisely taking real-time measurements of the noise elements present inside the headphone. Sophisticated processing is then applied to remove that noise without affecting the music signal.

Back in the Day

Early versions of noise-cancelling headphones tended to overemphasize the reduction of lower frequencies, resulting in thin sound with little in the way of deep bass. That’s because there was no method of completely isolating the noise component from the music inside the headphone. As a result, the cancelling signal contained not only noise but a significant amount of music too, resulting in the cancellation of low-frequency music content. To compensate, the low frequencies in the signal had to be artificially boosted before being sent to the drivers, making for a less-than-natural result.

Accounting for Fit

The way headphones fit over your ears (and the way earphones sit in your ear canals) affect how much outside noise and music signal reach the internal microphone. Advanced ANC analyzes the signals received by the internal microphone, using a precise processing algorithm developed by Yamaha that isolates the unique noise component reaching your ears and meticulously removes it from the music. Outside noise reaching the ear is cancelled, while the music signal remains pure and untouched. Because no unnecessary processing is performed on the music signal, you hear every note of your favorite songs … including the always important bass.

With Advanced ANC, you can have a truly personalized listening experience that makes you feel like it’s just you and your music, wherever you happen to be.

Want to learn more? Check out the video:

Check out these related blog articles:

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Listening Care

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Listening Optimizer

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Ambient Sound

Check out Pete’s other blogs.

Click here to learn more about Yamaha wireless headphones.

Choosing the Right Electric Guitar: Hollow-Body vs. Solid-Body

Written by Mac Randall on October 1, 2020. Posted in Electric Guitars.

For at least the past 70 years, conventional wisdom about electric guitar body types has been as follows: If you’re into jazz or blues, get yourself a hollow-body; if you wanna rock, go for a solid-body.

There’s a lot of historical precedent for this. Jazz and blues players have indeed tended to gravitate toward hollow-body guitars, especially those instruments that replicate the classic archtop designs guitarists used before the age of amplification. Meanwhile, rock enthusiasts often prefer instruments that don’t look like archtops. When solid-body guitars were invented in the middle of the 20th century, part of what made them so revolutionary was that manufacturers no longer had to be concerned about an instrument’s acoustic properties — which meant that they could carve it into any crazy shape they wanted … and rock players love crazy shapes.

Nonetheless, lots of rock guitarists have favored hollow-bodies, including legendary names like John Lennon and that absolute rock ’n’ roll archetype Chuck Berry. And if anyone still thinks you can’t play jazz or blues on a solid-body, they obviously haven’t heard the work of Les Paul, Allan Holdsworth, Duane Allman, Stevie Ray Vaughan and countless others.

The bottom line is that the style of music you want to play shouldn’t be a major factor when you’re trying to decide between a hollow-body and a solid-body electric guitar. Here are a few of the pros and cons you should consider.

Hollow-Body Pros and Cons

Even before you plug a hollow-body electric guitar into an amplifier, at least a couple of the instrument’s greatest virtues will be immediately evident. First, because its body is hollow, it usually weighs considerably less than a solid-body — something to think about if you’re planning to spend a lot of time standing up with the guitar strapped to you. Second, because it has a resonating chamber similar to that of an acoustic guitar, you can hear it better when playing unplugged — an important factor if, say, you’re living in an apartment building with neighbors who go into conniptions when you practice at stage volume.

Once you’ve plugged in, you’ll find that a hollow-body naturally delivers a warm, rich tonality. That’s because the resonance of the body emphasizes low-mid and bass frequencies. That said, hollow-bodies are capable of a wide variety of tones; if you want to get trebly, start tweaking the instrument’s (or amp’s) knobs, and go for it.

Another way in which hollow-body guitars are similar to acoustic guitars is that they usually don’t summon up a great deal of sustain. That’s not exactly a surprise — a hollow body just won’t vibrate or interact with pickups the same way a solid one will — but it does mean that if you’re partial to long drawn-out notes, a hollow-body may not be for you.

The main downside of hollow-body guitars has always been that they’re prone to feeding back if you turn them up too loud. There are three principal ways of addressing this problem: 1) Don’t turn your amp up so much (not always practical); 2) Go old-school like B.B. King used to do and shove a sock inside the body (more or less effective in a pinch, but not recommended for daily practice); and 3) Make the body shallower by putting a solid block of wood in its center to combat unwanted resonance.

Many manufacturers have opted for the latter choice over the years, leading to the creation of what could, strictly speaking, be called a separate category, but is usually thought of as a subcategory: semi-hollow electric guitars. The Yamaha SA2200 is an excellent example; its laminated sycamore body has the recognizable contours of an archtop guitar, complete with double f-holes for better acoustic projection, but the center block inside the body — made of soft maple — helps keep feedback at bay, making it a far less fraught matter when you need to crank it up (though please protect your ears while doing so!).

Electric guitar. — *Yamaha SA2200 semi-hollow body electric guitar.*

Solid-Body Pros and Cons

Make no mistake, you’ll get feedback if you turn a solid-body electric up loud enough too, but you can control it better, and even get it to produce predictable tones — as, for example, Jimi Hendrix did on “Machine Gun,” a performance that would have been just about inconceivable on a hollow-body instrument. Why? Because the greater mass and diminished acoustic resonance of a solid-body emphasizes fewer frequencies, allowing the guitar’s pickups to focus on less sonic information.

This also helps explain why solid-body guitars tend to have better sustain than hollow-bodies. The lack of a resonant chamber means that when you pick a note, secondary and tertiary harmonics fade away quickly while the primary ones continue to vibrate. Just how much more sustain you can get from a solid-body depends on other factors, principally the type(s) of woods used and the type(s) of pickups in the guitar.

On the whole, a trebly tone sounds more pleasant on a solid-body than on a hollow-body. Likewise, solid-bodies sometimes strain to produce the kind of rich, warm tones that come easily to a hollow-body. But these are sweeping generalizations, and either type of guitar can surprise with its tonal versatility.

As discussed previously, weight can be an issue with solid-body guitars. Many players, of course, prefer the feel of heavier guitars — though that probably doesn’t include guitarists with neck, shoulder or back problems. But electric guitars don’t need to weigh a ton to sound good or sustain well. For proof of that, just grab any model in the Yamaha Pacifica or REVSTAR lines. Their bodies (mostly a maple/alder combination for Pacificas, primarily maple and mahogany for REVSTARs) are cut for comfort, while still providing all the benefits of a solid-body.

In the end, choosing between a solid-body and a hollow-body electric guitar comes down to personal preference, as it should. When making that choice, you’ll need to think about what you like most in a guitar in terms of sound, feel and look. But don’t let anyone tell you that you need a certain type of electric guitar to play a certain type of music. Guitars are willing accomplices in music-making; what you create with them is up to you.

Click here for more information about Yamaha electric guitars.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha SA2200.

Click here for more information about Yamaha Pacifica guitars.

Click here for more information about Yamaha REVSTAR guitars.

Mastering engineer in studio sitting in front of mixing console.

Full Album Mastering

Written by Pete Lyman on September 30, 2020. Posted in Recording.

Mastering a full album is somewhat different than mastering individual songs. The goal here is to not only get every track sounding as good as possible, but to make the overall project sound cohesive, similar to a film editor compiling different shots to create a feature length movie. In this article, I’ll explain my process for full album mastering.

Getting Started

The very first thing I do is to create a Wavelab Montage with three stereo tracks. The first track is for the raw mixes, the second is for the analog captures, and the third will hold the final rendered image of the full record (this is the final print with all processing, including digital plug-ins, captured). I then import the mixes into the session and begin the initial listen-through, which gives me a chance to assess each individual track, and the project as a whole, allowing me to judge how the record flows from start to finish.

Even if it’s just passively listening to the audio while I answer emails, I’m still exposing my ears to the project, and oftentimes find elements that stick out. Once I have an idea of how the record should feel, I go back and sequence and space it roughly how I think it should sound, then start to dig in specifically on the tracks I think are the strongest. I use these to lay the groundwork for the rest of the mastering and overall tone of the project.

Tweaking, Capturing and Rendering

Once I’ve gotten the main tracks dialed in, I start tweaking the rest of the record. Obviously each track needs its own adjustments, but, again, the goal is to make them all fit together, especially when it comes to dialing in the low end, which can drastically change from mix to mix.

After each track has been mastered, I move onto capturing. I perform the analog capture while monitoring through any digital processing at the very end of the signal chain. However, I typically wait to commit any final limiting until I’m ready to render.

Before doing the rendering, however, I’ll go back and listen to the entire record again. This allows me to make micro adjustments to my analog captures. For instance, if I feel that a track needs some “air” (a lift in the 18kHz frequency range), I might add a half dB of air post-capture (that is, pre-final limiter). Once I feel that everything is sitting where it needs to, I render the files.

WaveLab makes the entire mastering process incredibly convenient for me. It allows me to view raw mixes, analog captures and rendered versions stacked on top of each other. This way, if a client comes back with any notes, I can make them without having to recall all of my settings. For example, if one track ends up being too loud, or too soft, I can easily make the adjustment, pre-limiter, since I’ve waited to add the limiting until the rendering stage. Then I can simply make the tweaks and re-render the file.

One of the main reasons I don’t commit to limiting until the rendering stage is because I can keep a clean analog capture in my project to use as my basis for creating vinyl cutting files. I can manipulate the level and do any additional processing on these tracks, such as high frequency limiting or low frequency summing, seamlessly. These files can be used to cut lacquers directly in our facility, or we can send them to be cut anywhere in the world without the worry of damaging lacquers through shipping.

Overall, I think my favorite thing about WaveLab is how powerful and adaptable the Montage window is. For one thing, you can customize the layout to only feature the tabs you want to see — two of my favorites are the level meter and spectroscope, so those are usually front and center. When it comes to the actual audio, I can resequence, change PQ codes (stop and start markers for CD players), make fade adjustments or make level changes, all non-destructively … which is exactly what recording, mixing and mastering engineers look for in any software they use.

Photograph courtesy of the author.

Click here for more information about Steinberg WaveLab.

Why Everyone Needs to Practice Self-Regulation!

Written by Kathryn Drury Wagner on September 30, 2020. Posted in Self-Care.

A toddler kicking and screaming in the middle of the produce section of the grocery store is not cute. But we understand that children are still developing.

An adult slamming an office door or sending a really harsh email is definitely not cute and it’s unacceptable. Both behaviors stem from the same issue — a lack of self-regulation skills.

Self-regulation is how we keep our emotions and behaviors in check and, more importantly, in line with our goals and our values. It’s why music educators rise before dawn on a cold Monday to get ready to teach, even though staying under the cozy covers feels awfully tempting. And it’s why adults don’t eat chocolate chip cookies for breakfast (at least, not too often).

The Advantages of Self-Regulation

Self-regulation is basically self-control. But it’s a bit more nuanced than that. You may have heard of self-regulation as it relates to your students, especially if you work with younger children. But it’s equally important for adults to have self-regulation skills.

According to a study published in Trends in Cognitive Science, “Self-regulation allows people to make plans, choose from alternatives, control impulses, inhibit unwanted thoughts and regulate social behavior.”

People with good self-regulation skills tend to be more resilient and calmer when under pressure. They are more persistent in going after their goals. And because they are calmer, they usually remain clear-eyed and can scope out golden opportunities that others may miss. You can see how this can lead to more success in your professional and personal life.

Cover the Basics

To effectively manage emotions, first lay down a solid foundation. Good habits like getting enough sleep, exercising, staying hydrated and remembering to make time for a good laugh with a friend go a long way toward being able to rein in our emotions.

According to the Cognitive Science study, “The most common self-regulation fails are when people are in bad moods, when minor indulgences snowball into full-blown binges, when people are overwhelmed by immediate temptations or impulses, and when control itself is impaired (e.g., after alcohol consumption or effort depletion).”

The bottom line? Staying calm under pressure is next to impossible in an exhausted, depleted body that is hopped up on six espressos. So, take care of yourself. (Read how to create a stress-relieving routine.)

Have Clear Goals

According to Bradley University’s counseling programs, setting goals is an essential part of the self-regulation process. Establishing clear goals helps a person “focus attention on positive behaviors that must be performed to meet these goals,” suggests the university.

For the best results, set short-term, obtainable goals. Meeting them gives that sense of momentum on the journey toward the bigger-picture goals. For example, all music educators’ overarching, big-picture goal is to impact and inspire young people to pursue lives of musical excellence. A short-term goal could be to plan a workshop for high school juniors and seniors (and their parents) to hear from current college students about what it’s really like to be a music major.

Know Thyself

What are your triggers? C’mon, be honest here. Think about what sorts of situations that could lead to behaviors that you might later regret.

For example, if the end of the marking period always turns you into a stressball, come up with a plan to address the required tasks, calendar them in and have a solid plan. That way, you won’t wind up feeling like you want to crawl under your desk and curl into a fetal position. Part of self-regulation is planning around your strengths and weaknesses.

Three Options in Every Situation

Very Well Mind suggests that we all have three options in every situation: “Approach, avoidance and attack.”

Avoidance is when we choose behaviors such as procrastination or rumination — these are not terribly helpful. Attack is just what it sounds like — going for the jugular and snapping at a student or band parent. Yikes, obviously not helpful.

But approaching a situation is beneficial and involves a problem-solving mindset: “What skills or resources can I use to deal with this?” Maybe that will mean making a list or breaking an onerous task into smaller, step-by-step chunks. Maybe it means reaching out to a colleague or a valued teaching mentor for collaboration.

Now you’re acting in ways that align with your long-range goals and your internal values.

Avoid All-or-Nothing Thinking

“I just bombed that Zoom call. I’m terrible at district-level presentations, and they will never invite me to speak again.”

This kind of thinking, where our brains tell us something is all or nothing — and usually focuses on a doomsday outcome — is what psychologists call a cognitive distortion. It can throw our self-regulation off track, so it’s good to be aware of this little mental trap.

Envision, for example, two people who have just slurped down a tasty vanilla shake. Person 1 thinks, “I had the milkshake; might as well eat a whole pizza for dinner.” In contrast, Person 2 thinks, “I had the milkshake — man that was good. For dinner, I’m thinking salmon and a salad.”

Person 2 is able to think big picture, enjoy the treat and get back to healthy habits. Person 1 is having a cognitive distortion, and it’s sabotaging self-regulation.

What’s the solution? Look for opportunities to see things in percentages, sliding scales or shades of gray instead of all-or-nothing, binary outcomes. Tell yourself things like, “I’ve made big progress setting up that new string ensemble. Things aren’t always going to go completely smoothly, and that is okay.”

Creating a Daily Practice

Just like practicing scales over and over, working on self-regulation skills may take time to fully master. If you want to take your practice deeper, try journaling, meditating, seeking cognitive behavioral therapy or developing behavior change plans. Here are a couple of handouts that can help:

Emotion Regulation Handout (PDF)
Triggers Worksheet (PDF)

With greater knowledge of self-regulation, you can benefit from it — and so will your students.

Fix It: Clarinet Teaching Tips

Written by Shawn Goodman-Royer on September 29, 2020. Posted in Winds.

The clarinet is the coolest and perhaps most versatile instrument in the band. It has an amazing 3.5-octave range, the greatest dynamic capabilities of any band instrument, and is used in many different genres of music from jazz to klezmer to classical.

But perhaps the most impressive and noteworthy fact is that Squidward Q. Tentacles (from SpongeBob SquarePants) plays the clarinet!

A well-intentioned band director may not always know the right thing to say to help clarinet players conquer their struggles. In this article, I have highlighted a few counterproductive approaches to common clarinet issues followed by a few tips and tricks to get the results you want.

How to Fix When Students Tighten Up Their Embouchures to Get the High Notes to Come Out

How to Fix When Students Blow More Air to Make Notes Resonate

How to Use “Ta” for Articulations

How to Fix When Students “Drop their Jaw” to Lower or Bend a Pitch

Fix It: When Students Tighten Up Their Embouchures to Get the High Notes to Come Out

Perhaps this mistake stems from struggling to sing high notes, but many students and directors think that tightening or firming up the embouchure will help the high notes to respond. This is counterproductive because tightening up the embouchure often causes the student to put more upward pressure on the reed. This can result in the reed closing off, making the issue worse. We adjust the embouchure, specifically the firmness of the bottom lip, to control how clean or airy our tone is, but a tighter embouchure will not necessarily help with high note response.

To help your clarinet students with those high notes,

Have students push up with their right thumb. For the high notes to respond, students must have enough mouthpiece in their mouths so the reed can fully vibrate the way it needs to for high notes to sound. One trick to get them to take in more mouthpiece is to tell them to push the instrument up into their mouths by pushing up with the right thumb.
If the high notes respond but sound constricted, have students point their chin down to lessen the upward pressure against the reed. This allows the reed to vibrate more freely without constriction. In this way, students need to be more relaxed, not tighter.

Fix It: When Students Blow More Air to Make Notes Respond

Air is, of course, an essential part of producing and maintaining good pitch and tone. However, it is not the solution to all problems. Sure, beginners who are transitioning from recorders to the clarinet may need to be encouraged to use more air. If a student is using adequate air and the notes still will not respond, check the following things.

Do students have enough mouthpiece in their mouths? To find out, ask them to push up with their right thumb or take in more mouthpiece. Once students make their way up to high G and above, if the notes will not respond and you can hear air, your students probably do not have enough mouthpiece in their mouths.
Is the reed hard enough? Most students should start on a #2.5 reed. When students make their way up to high G and above, and the notes won’t respond and you do not hear air, then the reed is completely closing off. This is an issue that “more air” cannot fix. Move students up a half-size to a harder reed.
Look at students’ hands. Are they accidentally venting keys or not sealing all of the holes? Specifically, first look at their left hand and make sure they are not accidentally hitting their throat-tone Ab key. Then, make sure they are sealing their right-hand ring-finger hole. This is the biggest tone-hole on the clarinet and not sealing it is the most common issue for small-fingered students. Lastly, if the fingering requires left-pinky keys, check to make sure that the left-hand ring-finger is sealing the hole. Have the student stop, close their eyes, and put one finger down at a time all the way down the clarinet and ask them to feel the pads of their fingers completely covering each hole, then try again. This usually fixes the issue. Occasionally, a student with small fingers will curve their fingers into a C position, causing their fingers to not fully depress the key rings. Encourage students to curve their hand position like they are eating a burger, but to keep their fingertips flat over the keys and tone holes so that the pads of their fingers completely seal the holes and depress the key rings.

Fix It: Using “Ta” for Articulations

How we articulate affects so much of our playing. Which part of the tongue touches the reed (or doesn’t touch the reed, in some cases) directly impacts the tongue position, meaning what the middle and back of our tongue does. This affects pitch and overtones. How much of the tongue touches the reed determines how heavy or light our articulations sound. Which part of the tongue we use also impacts how fast we can articulate and the speed of the response of our high notes. For the most control and versatility, articulations should be produced with the tip of the tongue touching the reed.

Say “ta.” Notice what specific part of your tongue touches the roof of your mouth when you say it. Now say “da.” Notice the difference? Also take note of how the shape of the middle of your tongue changes between these two syllables.
When I want my students to use the very tip of their tongue, I tell them to use the “da” syllable to articulate. Tell students to think about using the one cell on the very tip of their tongue to touch the reed.
For staccato, we touch the reed at the tip and hold the tongue on the reed in between notes. But the air continues to flow even when the tongue is on the reed. For legato, we lightly touch the reed slightly below the tip. For both techniques, use the “da” articulation syllable. For a more staccatissimo style, use a “dut-dut-dut-dut” syllable.

Fix It: When Students “Drop Their Jaw” to Lower or Bend a Pitch

Many students mistakenly believe that in order to make the pitch go down, they need to make their jaw go down. Unfortunately, dropping the jaw does not really affect pitch on the clarinet. Instead, when students drop their jaw to lower or bend a pitch, the note quickly stops responding.

Tongue position affects pitch on the clarinet. This is because the tongue position focuses the airstream, much in the same way that we control the pitch with our tongue when we whistle. More specifically, the closer the middle of the tongue gets to the reed, the lower the pitch drops. This is how we bend the pitch without losing the response of the note or sacrificing tone.
This is also the same technique we use for glissando, which is controlled 75% by the tongue and 25% by the fingers. The middle of the tongue grabs the air right in front of the reed and slowly returns to the normal resting position (usually “oh” for high notes, “ee” for low notes). Conversely, to fall from a note, such as in jazz, play the written note first, then quickly finger a descending chromatic scale while decrescendo-ing. Falls are typically accomplished this way rather than by bending the pitch down with the tongue and are almost never accomplished with jaw movement.

Troubleshooting

The clarinet often seems counterintuitive. If the above tricks do not work to solve these clarinet problems, have your students experiment and work together to find a solution. There will always be that one kid who is doing something differently than everyone else, and part of the fun is figuring out how to help him or her. One of my former students used to articulate with her tongue on her lip. It sounded light and fine until she got into her altissimo register. I could not figure out what she was doing until I saw her tongue peeking out of the corner of her mouth when it touched her lip.

If you cannot figure out what a student is doing, pick up a clarinet and try to imitate the sound they are making. Once you can do what they are doing, come up with baby steps to transition the student from what they are doing to what they should be doing.

If you would like to access more clarinet or jazz specific resources, including activities to try with your students that address the above problems, please visit www.shawngoodmanjazz.com and click on the “educational resources” tab. There, you will find handouts, videos, PowerPoints and more. Please reach out to me on Facebook (Shawn Goodman Jazz) and let me know if any of these techniques worked for you or to let me know if you have another tricky issue to solve.

Good luck, educators. Thank you for all that you do!

Jazz Chord Voicings, Part 1

Written by Jerry Kovarsky on September 28, 2020. Posted in Keyboard How-to.

Studying jazz harmony and voicings is essential when you want to play sophisticated pop tunes, show tunes and standards (the pop tunes from the ’30s through the ’50s). It’s also used a lot in neo-soul and R&B … and, of course, in jazz!

In this three-part series, we’ll take you through these voicings in a progressive fashion. In this installment, we’ll talk about techniques that work well for solo piano and accompanying vocalists.

What Makes A Voicing Jazzy?

The attribute that most makes your playing sound jazzy is the use of more color tones in your harmony and voicings. Color tones are notes added to extend a chord beyond a 7th chord. Chords are built by stacking notes up in thirds (by either three or four half-steps), and when you extend a chord beyond a 7th you’ll get the following:

Example of color tones in jazz voicings on piano.

Since the octave comes after (i.e., is higher than) the 7th, these color tones are the same as other lower scale tones, but they are named seven numbers higher. So the 9th is the same as the 2nd, the 11th is the same as the 4th, and the 13th is the same as the 6th. As a rule, if a chord already has a 7th in it, the higher number is used in naming; if it doesn’t have the 7th, the lower number is used.

Second example of color tones in jazz voicings on piano.

Not every scale tone can be stacked up to make advanced chords — for each chord quality there are good notes and not-so-good notes, because they are too dissonant, or harsh to our ears. Here are a wide variety of chord qualities and the color tones that are usually added to them:

A wide variety of chord qualities and the color tones that are usually added to them. — *(The notes in parentheses can work, but are less commonly used.)*

How did those choices get made? If you refer back to our “Well-Rounded Keyboardist” column on the basics of chordal harmony, you’ll see that when scale tone chords are constructed, certain chord types occur on more than one scale tone. A Major-seventh chord, for example, occurs on the first and fourth step of the major scale, so the Cmaj7th chord that occurs on the fourth step of a scale happens in the key of G major. That key has an F-sharp in it, so when you get to the 11th it is called a “sharp-11th,” since it is raised up a half-step. This avoids the harsh clash that happens when you play both the 3rd (E) and the 11th (F) in the same voicing.

The Dominant-seventh chord always occurs on the fifth step of a scale, but when you compare the major scale and the most common minor scales/modes, you’ll find that the 9th and 13th tones will vary, like this:

That’s why, when you are using the V7 chord in a minor key, you’ll want to use a flatted 13th in order to maintain the minor key sound.

For the sake of brevity I’m not going to show the harmonic justification for all the other chords types I demonstrated earlier, but don’t think of these choices as absolutely rigid rules. When using a Dominant seventh chord in a major tonality, you can, for example, use all flavors of the 9th and the 13th tones to create small movements within your voicings.

The Important Tones

Certain notes are critical to define the chord quality — others, less so. The root is the most important, and someone in the band needs to be playing it down low. As a solo pianist you’ve got to play it, but if there’s a bass player, they will usually cover it, freeing you up to do other things. The next most important tone is the 3rd — that’s how we know if a chord is major or minor. The next critical tone is the 7th, or the 6th in the case of a sixth chord. I skipped the 5th, as it is only important if your chord has an altered 5th in it, be it an augmented chord, a major or dominant-seventh with a flatted fifth, or a minor-seventh with a flatted fifth (commonly called a half-diminished chord).

From here, you are free to start using our color tones (9th, 11th and 13th) to make your voicings more jazzy. If needed, you can leave out the 5th so you have fingers available for those color tones. Check out this example of the chords for the song “Autumn Leaves” played with 4-note right hand voicings and a single note in the left hand. This approach is a bridge between the pop/rock voicing style discussed in a previous blog and more advanced jazz treatments, and it has the benefit of freeing up the left hand to play a walking bass line if needed.

Notice that I use good voice-leading throughout, always moving to the nearest note in the next voicing. In bar 9 I jump up two inversions on the second A-minor 9th chord, so I don’t travel too low. In bars 10 and 12 I leave out the 5th so I can add the 13th as discussed earlier. On the D13 chord in bar 10 I move from the natural 9th to a flatted 9th as an inner voice movement that resolves down into the D of the following G-major 9th chord. I again leave out the 5th of the B7 altered chord in bar 14 so I can use both the flatted and sharp 9th tones at the same time, for a wonderfully dissonant/jazzy tonality.

Two-Handed Voicings

You can play richer and fuller voicings if you spread them across both hands. The most common way of doing that is to play either the root and 7th or the root and 3rd in your left hand, and then add other tones in the right hand, as demonstrated in the example below. Try not to play any doubled tones between the hands.

Here’s “Autumn Leaves” again, using this approach:

Now I’ll add some chord substitutions to make our example sound even cooler. I’m mostly using the concept of secondary dominant chords and tri-tone substitutions that I first explained in my blog about functional harmony. In the first audio clip, I play the chords by themselves, and in the second clip I play them accompanied by bass and drums so you can hear them in context.

Autumn Leaves 2-handed voicings with substitutions.

Analyzing what I did, the E-flat ninth chord in bar 1, the D-flat augmented ninth in bar 3, and the A-flat ninth with the flatted fifth in bar 10 are all tritone substitutions of the secondary dominant chords that can be used to set up the chords that follow them. Also notice my use of the suspended fourth resolving into the third for the D dominant seventh in bar 2, and the nice color tone movement on the B dominant seventh in bar 14.

I know, it seems like a lot to digest, so spend some time reviewing — you’ll get there! Next: More jazzy chord voicings.

All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Closeup of hands playing an electric guitar.

Picking vs. Fingerstyle

Written by Michael Gelfand on September 25, 2020. Posted in Bass. 2 Comments on Picking vs. Fingerstyle

Basses should be played, not objectified. The features, technical specifications and other aspects that make a bass special are important, but how a bass makes you feel when you play it matters so much more. For me, the main “feel factors” are neck profile and how deeply the body and neck vibrate when I play a note — in other words, how responsive the bass is to my touch. The fretting hand, of course, selects the notes you want to play. But the other hand is where the magic truly happens.

How you make the strings vibrate is everything — there’s a wide chasm between a light touch and an aggressive attack, with lots of nuance in between. Some bassists prefer to play the strings with a pick, while others prefer to use their fingers. Thankfully, there’s no binary choice to make here. Bassists of all styles and ability levels have different reasons for choosing one approach over the other, and all those reasons are valid. There is no “best” way to do it — there’s only what works best for you. In fact, I’d argue that you’re limiting your own growth as a bassist until you get competent at both techniques.

Let’s weigh the pros and cons of each approach.

Picking Pros and Cons

Picks come in all kinds of shapes, sizes, thicknesses and materials (plastic, latex, metal, felt, wood), which allows for a very expressive tonal palette in the right hands (or right hand, if you’re a punster). But playing with a pick requires you to combine how you hold it — tightly or loosely, how much of the pick you leave exposed, etc. — with how relaxed your wrist and forearm are. Strings can be played straight-on or with the pick held at an angle to create a sound with more grind to it; either way, it’s hard to play bass with a pick for long periods of time if you’re not resting your hand on the bridge.

Generally speaking, playing with a pick delivers better articulation (there’s more treble harmonic content), whereas playing with your fingers loses some of that sizzle and snappiness. Here are two audio clips that demonstrate the difference. First, a groove played with a pick:

… and here’s the same groove played with the fingers:

Picking has more inherent rhythmic attack — you can better accentuate each kick or snare drum hit, and if you play with a pick, it’s also easier for guitarists to convert to bass. Playing eighth-notes at a fast tempo is easier too — at least initially. In addition, bass techniques like “palm-muting” — where you touch the fleshy side of your hand to the strings while picking — work well when playing with a pick, as this audio clip demonstrates:

But there are some downsides, too, depending on what you’re trying to do. For instance, it’s impossible to play both notes in a double-stop simultaneously with a pick (though you can blend the use of a pick and your fingers if you like), and it’s much harder to play and repeat complex arpeggios that skip across adjacent strings with a pick. In addition, two fingers are required to hold a pick at all times, and there aren’t lots of places to put a pick when you’re not using it (other than holding it between your teeth, which raises hygiene issues), so you’re essentially locked in if you choose to use a pick and don’t have someplace convenient to stash it mid-song. You should also be aware that down- and up- picking strokes have slightly different tonal qualities, which may not be a problem for certain types of music, but could be for others. And then there’s the ever-present danger of dropping a pick mid-song — something that won’t ever be an issue if you play your bass fingerstyle.

Fingerstyle Pros and Cons

Playing bass with your fingers is perhaps more complex than playing with a pick in that it allows you to use one finger or a combination of fingers — even different parts of those fingers, such as your fingernails — to create the sounds you’re feeling. It gives you a more diverse toolkit to get the tone you want out of your bass.

However, unlike the differences in tonality caused by playing down- and up-strokes with a pick, it’s easy to maintain consistent tone with two alternating fingers moving in the same direction. There’s also more dynamic range and tonal variety when playing with your fingers — slapping, thumping and plucking are all possible with your thumb alone, and you can still use the edge of your fingernails to approximate the twang of a pick. In addition, complex polyphonic patterns are easier to play with your fingers (whether using an alternating finger approach or a flamenco-style approach) than with a pick.

These possibilities are magnified by the location in which you choose to anchor your hand. Playing just in front of the bridge by resting the underside of your wrist on it gives you a tight sound, whereas placing your thumb on a thumb rest, a pickup, or even on the side of the neck where it meets the body will result in a juicier, more harmonic sound because different locations along the string have different tonal characteristics. It’s also easier to prevent string noise with your fingers already touching the strings than it is to mute certain strings with your hand.

On the downside, as mentioned previously, when you play fingerstyle, you sacrifice some of the sizzle and snappiness that you get when playing with a pick — although you will be compensated with considerably more low end. You also lose the ability to tamp down the sound by touching the fleshy side of your playing hand to the strings. And last but not least, many guitarists switching over to bass find the fingerstyle technique challenging, if only because it’s so different from the way guitar is played.

If you’re unsure which approach is best for you, try them both and find the one that feels most comfortable. But whether you’re just starting out or well on your way as a bassist, my advice is to not focus on one style exclusively. If you develop expertise with both techniques, you’ll be able to choose the approach that best suits the song you’re playing, without there being a noticeable drop-off in how well you play your part. Having the versatility to do what’s called for in a specific situation gives you the flexibility to change your mind on the fly so you can always create your deepest musical expression — a lofty goal, but one that every musician should aspire to.

All audio clips played on a Yamaha BBP34 bass.

Check out Michael’s other blog posts.

Click here for more information about Yamaha basses.

Steve Gadd poses with the new Steve Gadd Signature Snare Drum.

The Signature Sound

Written by Steve La Cerra on September 23, 2020. Posted in Artists, Drum Artists.

There’s probably not a drummer on the planet who isn’t familiar with Steve Gadd’s work. With a list of recording and tour credits that include Stevie Wonder, Paul Simon, Steely Dan, Al Di Meola, Chick Corea, Eric Clapton, James Taylor, Aretha Franklin and Paul McCartney, Gadd has become one of the world’s most influential drummers since his rise to prominence in the 1970s.

For more than 40 years, this Grammy^® Award winner has played Yamaha drums, but his relationship with the company doesn’t end at the tips of his sticks. Gadd helped popularize Yamaha Recording Custom drums in the late 1970s and early 1980s, and has worked with the Yamaha Research and Development team in an effort to improve and maintain the quality of the company’s drums. This partnership led to the introduction of the Steve Gadd Signature 30th Anniversary Drum Kit in 2006, and the updating of Yamaha Recording Custom drums and Recording Custom metal snare drums in 2016.

To honor this long-standing relationship, Yamaha and Gadd have once again collaborated to create the Steve Gadd Signature Snare Drum. Featuring a 14″ x 5.5″ steel shell and die-cast hoops (both finished in black nickel) along with chrome one-piece lugs, this great-sounding snare drum is also outfitted with 10-strand snares for enhanced sensitivity and articulation.

“I’ve been prototyping with Yamaha the whole time that I’ve been with them,” Gadd says. “When we worked on the Recording Custom drums, we A/B’d different samples, and we did the same thing with the Signature Snare to develop the sound of the drum.”

“My idea of a signature snare drum isn’t entirely a personal thing. What I try to do with any drum is to get it to sound good. We worked on the Signature Snare as a group and started by agreeing on certain specs for the drum. For example, I like using a Remo Powerstroke^® 3 for the top snare head and a Diplomat^® on the bottom, so those were consistent throughout the process. We worked out which snare mechanism we’d use, and when we had all of those parts in place, we tried different shells with die-cast hoops as well as with other kinds of hoops.”

Gadd and the Yamaha R&D team honed in on constructing the drum using a 14″ diameter 1.2 mm beaded steel shell with a 3.5 mm snare bed. To produce an open, articulate sound, the center bead is formed on the outside of the shell instead of the inside. “I always consider different sizes,” says Gadd, “but for this drum our target was the standard 14″ diameter. We didn’t experiment with 15″ or 13″ diameters, and the same goes for the depth — I wanted a snare drum that sounded good at a standard 5.5″ depth.”

The snare wires employed on the Signature Snare are something of a Gadd trademark. “Years ago,” he explains, “I was playing on an old snare drum and some of the snare wires had broken off. When I replaced the old snares with a new set that had all the wires intact, I didn’t think it sounded as good. Those broken snares — which had a little space in between each two wires — worked great. I liked the way they sounded as well as the way they felt, so we decided to make snares with some of the wires removed, and it worked.” Finding the right snares was one of the reasons why, during the development process, all the prototypes used the same components for uniformity. “When we tried different kinds of snares on one drum versus another,” Gadd says, “we could hear how those snares were affecting the sound of each individual drum.”

The same goes for the die-cast aluminum hoops used on the Signature Snare. “We experimented and A/B’d different types of hoops, and the aluminum die-cast hoops sounded the best,” Gadd recalls. “[Yet] this snare drum wasn’t just about trying to accommodate what I wanted. We were trying to accommodate each other and create a drum that spoke, had a good tuning range and was comfortable to play.”

“I like playing a drum with a wide tuning range,” he adds. “It allows you to cover different kinds of music on one instrument, and this drum has that ability. A lot of snare drums sound good at a certain tightness with a certain tension on the snares, but as soon as you get out of that tuning area, the life of the snare drum goes away. The Signature Snare drum opens up at different head tensions and at different snare tensions. You can tighten it up and get it to sound crisp or you can loosen it up and make it sound funky or tubby.”

Gadd sums up his role in the development of the Signature Snare drum this way: “My contribution was dealing with how these different elements contribute to the sound of the drum, and judging the way it sounds and feels in the field. I’m not a drum maker but I do know certain things that I like based on having played a lot of different drums. Creating [this] drum was a process for Yamaha and myself, to come up with an instrument we both like, and that drummers will enjoy playing. The better it gets for me, the better it gets for Yamaha; and the better it gets for Yamaha, the better gets for me!”

The Steve Gadd Signature Snare drum is limited to 200 units in the United States, each one individually numbered. The shell is fitted with a Steve Gadd signature badge, and it ships with a limited-edition black nickel drum key and a card certifying authenticity.

Want to learn more? Check out this video.

Click here for more information about the Steve Gadd Signature Snare drum.

Young Asian woman with long hair, black shirt and leather skirt holding the neck of an open bodied electric cello.

Dedication to the Craft

Written by Yamaha Corporation of America on September 22, 2020. Posted in Artists, Strings Artists.

“I definitely remember my days of early morning cello schlepping,” says Tina Guo with a laugh. “In college, I was pretty regimented. I would get up at 5:30 every morning so I could go to the gym and then get to the practice rooms right when they opened. Then I would practice for three or four hours before going to class.”

Guo has become one of the world’s most renowned cellists, with composing and performing credits on soundtracks for chart-topping movies as well as video game scores and numerous record releases, and a new album coming out soon on a major record label. But before all that, there was a dedication to her craft.

The Family Trade

Guo’s musical commitment was instilled in her at an early age, through her father, a professional cello teacher, and her mother, a violin instructor. “I was born into the family trade,” she jokes. “I had no choice but to practice eight to ten hours a day.”

The technical proficiency that sprung from this helped earn her acceptance into a prestigious college music program as a performance cellist major. And it was there that Guo began to develop a unique creative vision — one that would ultimately take her to the next level.

Tina Guo with her electric cello. — *Tina Guo.*

Heavy Metal Cello

As Guo began her studies, she also started to experience more diverse influences. “When I first got to college it was all classical,” she remembers, “but then I discovered the Yamaha Silent Cello™, which changed my entire world. As I began exploring new sonic possibilities with this instrument, I started experimenting with other types of music and genres.”

One day, Guo had a bolt of inspiration. “I wanted to be like a guitar shredder and play heavy metal on the electric cello,” she says. “That was really my thing.”

Post-College Realities

The two different career paths Guo was considering — a traditional one in classical music and a distinctly non-traditional one following her own creative vision — soon began to converge. “I learned some great things in college, and there was one teacher in particular — cello professor Eleonore Schoenfeld — who told me two things I’ll never forget: One, she said, ‘Dearie, there is a fine line between the sublime and the ridiculous,’” referring to Guo’s free-form interpretative playing style. “And the second was that the best teacher is someone who teaches you to no longer need a teacher. Because you can’t always depend on someone to tell you what to do.”

Following that dictum, Guo decided to drop out of college and focus full-time on her metal band projects and trying to find gigs as an electric cellist. But the money had yet to match the effort. “My parents told me to stop being crazy and just audition for an orchestra, because ‘you’ll have a safe job’ and all that,” she reports with a chuckle.

Funding the Dream

Seeking to appease her parents, Guo prepared to audition for an open cello position at a major symphony … but not without giving her dream one last shot, making the bold decision to self-fund a music video featuring her metal prowess on the electric cello. “I was living in a garage at the time with no air conditioning and no heat — it was pretty terrible circumstances,” she remembers. “I thought, OK maybe this video will be my last hurrah, so I’m just going to make it and put it out. At least I’ll be able to tell my grandkids, look at what I did when I was 20 years old!”

The video became a big hit online, attracting the attention of none other than famed film composer Hans Zimmer and culminating in an offer for Guo to tour with Cirque de Soleil. “It was more money than I had ever seen in my entire life,” she says of the compensation she received, “it wasn’t until then that I was able to pay off my school and instrument loans, credit card bills, then proceed to build my savings and begin investing.”

Breaking New Ground

These days, Tina spends most of her time recording in her home studio and collaborating on new projects, including a number of score credits in soon-to-be-released major films. Her musical skill set may have expanded beyond heavy metal shredding, but Guo was still able to fulfill a lifelong dream of playing the main stage at a large metal festival in Germany last year.

“I think being flexible in your method is important, and at least for my career, not putting all your eggs in one basket,” Tina reflects. “If I had only stuck to playing metal, I wouldn’t be where I am today.” And if she hadn’t developed an unshakeable dedication to her craft — a commitment that got her awake at 5:30 every morning to get to the practice room ahead of other students — the world might have been deprived of Tina Guo’s unique musical stylings.

*Tina Guo with her Yamaha Silent Cello.*

For more information, visit tinaguo.com

Check out these related blog posts:

Scott Mayo on building a strong foundation for a lifetime of good habits

Larry Mullen Jr. reflects on the beginnings of U2

Butch Walker talks about practicing through the roadblocks

Jackie Miclau looks at the ways music brings people together

How to Connect a Sound Bar to a Computer

Written by Ted Goslin on September 21, 2020. Posted in Audio How-to. 4 Comments on How to Connect a Sound Bar to a Computer

Your computer shares a key, albeit unwanted trait with your TV: tiny built-in speakers. Great audio simply isn’t in its wheelhouse. There’s not enough room in a laptop (or even in a desktop chassis) for high-quality speakers, so if you want good sound, you need to get that audio information out of the computer and into an external speaker. And since space is often at a premium on your computer desk, there’s no better solution than a sound bar.

But not every sound bar is ideal for use with a computer. For one thing, large sound bars take up a lot of space and are not designed for close-up listening. The Yamaha SR-C20A compact sound bar, however, can fit pretty much anywhere and, thanks to its wireless capabilities (along with extensive wired options), can be used all over the house, including in front of a computer for gaming.

In this article, we’ll show you just how easy it is to connect a sound bar to your Mac^® or PC, using the SR-C20A as our point of reference. Note: No matter what kind of connection you decide to make, we suggest you always begin by placing the sound bar directly in front of your computer facing where you sit, at roughly chest level.

Get Wired

Just about every make and model of sound bar offers one or more options for wired connections. An analog input is almost always provided (it’s usually on the rear panel), and many sound bar models offer digital inputs as well. Let’s take a look at each in turn.

Analog

Most laptop and desktop computers have built-in analog audio outputs, sometimes labeled AUX (for auxiliary). These are the jacks you use for connecting wired headphones or computer speakers, but they can also be used to connect your computer to a sound bar. Simply obtain a cable of sufficient length, with 1/8″ (3.5 mm) stereo plugs at both ends, and plug one end into your sound bar’s analog input port (labeled “ANALOG” on the SR-C20A, as shown in the illustration below), then plug the other end to your computer’s AUX out. Check your computer’s audio settings to ensure that signal is being sent to the analog output and you’re good to go.

Optical

An optical input (sometimes called “SPDIF,” short for the type of digital audio interconnect protocol used) allows a sound bar to receive digital audio via a fiber optic cable, with light (flashing inside a glass or plastic tube) carrying the signal. Because this is a digital format, it can carry Dolby Digital and Dolby Audio virtual surround sound audio as well as standard two-channel stereo, making it a better choice than analog.

Most computers don’t offer an optical/SPDIF output, but if yours does, all you have to do is plug an optical cable into it, then plug the connector on the other end to the sound bar’s optical input (circled in red in the illustration below).

Illustration showing location of optical input port on the Yamaha SR-C20A. — *SR-C20A optical input.*

If your computer doesn’t have an optical/SPDIF output, the SR-C20A offers a workaround: Run an HDMI^® cable (see below) from your computer to a monitor or TV that’s equipped with an optical ouput, then plug an optical cable into the monitor/TV optical output and connect it to the SR-C20A’s “TV” input (circled in red in the illustration below). This adds a step but lets you enjoy all the digital features that come with using an optical connection.

Illustration showing location of TV input port on the Yamaha SR-C20A. — *SR-C20A TV input.*

HDMI

This is considered to be the gold standard of TV wired connections, and is available on all modern TVs. In addition, some sound bars, including the SR-C20A, provide HDMI support (see the illustration below). HDMI cables are exceptionally durable and use multiple layers of shielding and copper conductors to transmit both audio and video simultaneously. The HDMI protocol allows you to enjoy all the audio features that your sound bar offers, such as full 5.1-channel surround sound, Dolby Digital audio and Dolby Audio virtual surround sound, along with support for ARC (Audio Return Channel), which lets you send audio from your computer to your TV or sound bar over a standard HDMI cable.

There is one “gotcha” here: Computers typically don’t have ARC built in. There are, however, two ways to get around this: One is to use an ARC-enabled TV as your computer monitor. To do this, simply run an HDMI cable from your computer to the TV, then connect a second HDMI cable to the sound bar’s ARC input. If your TV does not have ARC, you’ll need to purchase a third-party adapter to convert HDMI to optical or analog audio and then create the following chain:

Computer HDMI out -> Adapter HDMI in -> Adapter optical or analog out -> TV optical or analog in -> TV optical or analog out -> Sound bar.

Yes, it’s fairly involved, but it provides you with all the great features offered by HDMI. Be sure to change your computer’s audio output setting so you that audio is sent via HDMI and not to some other attached device like a headset.

Go Wireless

Some sound bars (like the SR-C20A) offer wireless connectivity via Bluetooth^®. In addition to the simplicity of a wireless connection, Bluetooth offers additional features that you won’t get with wired options, such as:

Placement flexibility (up to 33 feet from your computer)
The ability to connect and switch between two separate devices (like adding a mobile device to the mix)
Audio enhancement technology like the Yamaha Compressed Music Enhancer, which improves the sonics of compressed audio formats like MP3 through the use of sophisticated digital signal processing

Here’s how to set up a Bluetooth connection between your computer and your sound bar:

1. Switch the sound bar’s audio mode to Bluetooth. On the SR-C20A, this can be accomplished via the remote, the Yamaha Sound Bar Controller app, or manually on the bar itself by pressing the arrow icon (shown in the illustration below) repeatedly until the blue Bluetooth light comes on.

2. Look for Bluetooth. On your computer, go into your PC Settings (Windows) or System Preferences (Mac) and look for Bluetooth. In Windows computers, this is found in the Devices section; in Macs, go to the Bluetooth section under Internet & Wireless.

3. Make sure your device is discoverable. (The SR-C20A is automatically discoverable when you switch to Bluetooth mode.)

4. Pair your computer with the sound bar. To do this on Windows systems, click on the sound bar from the list of devices displayed on the screen:

Illustration showing how to pair Windows computer with a sound bar.

On Mac systems, click the Bluetooth icon, then click the audio icon for a drop-down menu that lists all named devices and select the device you want for output:

Illustration showing how to pair Mac with a sound bar.

Whichever system your computer uses, be sure to set your default audio playback device to the sound bar before testing it by playing audio from your computer. If there is no sound, check that your computer and sound bar have the volume turned up. Some other common troubleshooting methods include:

Unpairing and re-pairing the two devices
Restarting the computer
Updating the Bluetooth driver on your computer

Regardless of the connection option you choose, adding a sound bar will allow you to enjoy much better audio than your computer provides on its own. And be sure to try the different sound modes on your sound bar to get even more from your audio!

Check out these related blog articles:

Introducing the SR-C20A Compact Sound Bar

How (and Where) To Mount a TV and Sound Bar

How to Hide the Wires in Your Home Theater

How to Connect Nintendo Switch to Your TV, Sound Bar or AV Receiver

Click here to learn more about the Yamaha SR-C20A sound bar.

Click here for information about the Yamaha SR-B20A sound bar — a larger alternative with two subwoofers and added features.

Yamaha NTX5 acoustic nylon string guitar.

Atmosfeel™ Technology Comes to the Nylon-String Guitar

Written by Mac Randall on September 18, 2020. Posted in Acoustic Guitars. 1 Comment on Atmosfeel™ Technology Comes to the Nylon-String Guitar

If you’ve had the good fortune of trying — or maybe even purchasing — a Yamaha FGX or FSX Red Label steel-string acoustic guitar, you’re probably already familiar with the impressively realistic sound of the Atmosfeel™ pickup and preamp system. But what if your taste in acoustic guitars leans more toward the warmer, deeper tones of a nylon-string? Well, you’re in luck, because Yamaha has recently added Atmosfeel to its upgraded NCX and NTX series of nylon-string acoustics — and that is something for lovers of guitar tone everywhere to celebrate.

As has been discussed previously on this blog, amplifying any acoustic guitar in a way that actually sounds good is a difficult task, but nylon-string guitars present a special challenge. A standard magnetic pickup cannot be used because the lack of metal strings means that there’s nothing to create a magnetic field with. Piezo pickups (which utilize crystals to generate the necessary electric signal) can work, but they have a tendency to sound unpleasantly trebly and harsh. Perhaps the best solution for amplifying the sound of nylon-string guitars is to use a microphone, but besides the usual danger of feedback, you run the risk of boominess and overemphasis of the instrument’s lower frequencies, particularly when close-miking.

What makes the Atmosfeel system so remarkable is that it combines three means of capturing the sound: a mini-microphone inside the guitar’s body, piezo sensors in the bridge, and a proprietary synthetic sheet transducer under the soundboard, each devoted to a particular frequency range. What’s more, you can custom-blend the tones each device produces via three unobtrusive knobs on the left side of the instrument.

Man playing an acoustic guitar with the features of the Yamaha Atmosfeel system detailed. — *Yamaha Atmosfeel system.*

The Atmosfeel systems in Yamaha NCX5, NCX3, NTX5 and NTX3 nylon-string guitars operate the same way as the ones in the steel-string FGX/FSX Red Label models, but that doesn’t mean they are the same. Because of the unique tonal characteristics of nylon-string guitars, the specs of the systems in those instruments had to be tweaked substantially. As in the steel-string version, the sheet transducer captures the guitar’s higher frequencies and the mini-mic handles the lower ones, but the six individual piezo sensors in the bridge have been re-voiced to focus on the midrange. In addition, the Bass EQ knob has been replaced with a Treble knob, in acknowledgment of the fact that nylon-strings can often benefit from the greater clarity afforded by turning up the highs.

I’ve written about Atmosfeel before, and my previous experience with it in a steel-string guitar made me excited to hear how it would translate to the world of nylon. Sweetening the deal, the system I tested was installed in a Rodrigo y Gabriela signature-model NTX5 with special appointments designed for those two acoustic virtuosos, including a fingerboard that goes up to the 24th fret on the treble strings and a curvy cutaway that allows you to reach those ultra-high notes with ease.

Rodrigo y Gabriela signature-model NTX5 guitar. — *Rodrigo y Gabriela signature-model NTX5.*

My verdict? The nylon-string edition of the Atmosfeel system is even better than the steel-string version — more vibrant and more transparent. Whether you’re going through a combo amp, a set of PA speakers or a pair of headphones, it makes you sound like you’re playing a nylon-string acoustic guitar, only louder … which is the highest praise you could possibly give to a product like this.

Although the Atmosfeel-equipped NTX5 is clearly designed for live performance, I found that it’s also an ideal recording guitar. Working in a studio environment, you can get a better sense of how well-tuned the pickup system is to the instrument, and how clearly it conveys the separation between each of the guitar’s six strings, even when they combine to form a rich whole. The onboard controls provide a nice range of tonal options, but I quickly discovered that my personal sweet spot for recording was with the Master Volume and Treble EQ knobs both at 12 o’clock and the Mic Blend knob at about 2 o’clock, slightly emphasizing the signal of the mini-mic. (If you turn the latter knob all the way to the right, that mic is all you’ll hear; turn it the other way and you’ll get a combination of the piezos and the sheet transducer.)

The NTX5 is a supremely adaptable guitar, and Atmosfeel is a big part of the reason why. Nylon lovers, rejoice! There’s no longer any need to be envious of your steel-string brethren and their ability to easily transition from stage to studio with just one instrument. An NTX or NCX series guitar lets you do exactly the same, and makes you sound great while doing it.

Check out these related blogs:

Atmosfeel™: The Next Generation of Yamaha Acoustic Guitar Pickups

Introducing the NX Series

Introducing the New Generation of Yamaha Red Label Guitars

Click here for more information about Yamaha NCX5, NCX3, NTX5 and NTX3 nylon-string guitars.

Listening Optimizer

Written by Joy Frye on September 16, 2020. Posted in Music and Streaming. 2 Comments on Listening Optimizer

If you’re familiar with Yamaha home audio, you may know about the company’s groundbreaking AV receivers that feature YPAO™ (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) — an advanced technology that determines the acoustics of your home theater room and calibrates audio parameters for optimal sound — and Surround:AI™, which optimizes DSP parameters for each scene of a movie in real time. Now, with their new line of wireless headphones, earphones and earbuds, the company is applying its home audio expertise to personal audio.

Yamaha engineers spent years developing Listening Optimizer, an adaptive technology that analyzes the fit of your headphones and the wearing conditions in real time to optimize the sound for the best listening experience possible. This feature is available in the YH-E700A wireless noise-cancelling headphones and EP-E70A wireless noise-cancelling earphones.

Good Fit is a Must

Headphone devotees know that it all starts with the fit. Of course, over-ear headphones and in-ear earphones have to be comfortable if you’re going to wear them for long periods of time, but the fit also affects the sound. Because everyone’s head size and shape are different (and even ear canal size may vary from right to left), headphones or earphones that fit comfortably on one person may not fit nearly as well on — or provide the same sound quality to —a different individual.

The seal between your headphones and your ears (or between your earphones and your ear canal) affects the sound pressure level, which in turn affects the way you perceive high and low frequencies. Unlike traditional technologies that only take a one-time measurement to make corrections to the audio, Listening Optimizer provides a truly personalized listening experience by using a high-quality in-ear microphone to take real-time measurements of this seal for 20 seconds, comparing the signal from the microphone to the playback source. It then applies correction over a five-second window, ensuring that the transition is not jarring, but is instead seamless and hardly perceptible. This cycle of 20-second measurement, followed by 5-second correction, is repeated continuously. The result is optimal sound for the way your headphones and earphones fit you in all conditions, whether you’re on an airplane with lots of background noise or walking down a quiet path.

Want to learn more? Check out the video:

Check out these related blog articles:

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Listening Care

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Advanced ANC

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Ambient Sound

Scott Mayo on building a strong foundation for a lifetime of good habits

Click here to learn more about Yamaha wireless headphones.

Practicing Through the Roadblocks

Written by Yamaha Corporation of America on September 15, 2020. Posted in Artists, Guitar Artists.

“Roadblocks are very common and very normal,” says Yamaha Artist Butch Walker. “We’ve all been there as guitar players, and songwriters especially, where it’s not easy to force any sort of inspiration. Sometimes it does take stepping away. I can go for months and months without touching an instrument, or writing anything, because it’s just not in you.”

When the clouds clear and the inspiration returns, Walker does all he can to harness the renewed creative energy. “I constantly have an acoustic guitar around so I can pick it up and start noodling on it,” he explains. “Usually I don’t go to any specific riff — I just start playing. The same goes for an electric. If I grab an electric guitar and get a really cool sound through an amp, a lot of times that will absolutely inspire me to come up with something really fun, and it can potentially be very good too.”

Walker first rose to prominence in the late ’90s with a breakout hit called “Freak of the Week,” performed by his band Marvelous 3. Since then, he has gone on to become a successful solo artist with a rabid touring fan base and is now a highly sought-after producer, engineer, and songwriter for top artists in a wide array of genres — indeed, Rolling Stone has called him “one of America’s best singer-songwriters.” With a career that has been marked by evolution, Walker has always sought to better himself at his craft, while staying open to the ebbs and flows of change.

Early Inspiration

A young Butch Walker playing guitar. — *A young Butch Walker.*

Walker attributes his first affinity for guitar to a time when, as an 8-year old, he asked his parents to take him to a KISS concert. The over-the-top performance and spectacle had a pronounced effect on the young Butch, who quickly decided to devote his life to playing rock and roll guitar. “The circus paled in comparison after that,” he jokes. “Guitar was my first love.”

After receiving guitar instruction from local teachers Chris Fowler and Jerry King, Butch began gigging locally in his native Cartersville, Georgia before eventually making his way to Los Angeles, where he would achieve his first major success.

Butch Walker in his early shredding days with gaudy clothing and large curly hair. — *Butch in his early shredding days.*

Becoming a Big Fish in a Big Pond

Soon after moving into the infamous Whitley Heights area of Hollywood, near the Guitar Institute of Technology (GIT) where he had enrolled, Butch discovered that he faced a lot of competition. “There was a kid on every street corner who could play guitar better with their nose than I could with my hands,” he remembers with a laugh. It was a time when musicians were coming from all over the world to LA.

He recalls one particular apartment building that was full of guitar players from GIT. With two floors of ten units surrounding a rectangular swimming pool, and amplifiers bellowing out into the night, “it sounded like a Guitar Center all the time” he says. “I would sit down with these guys and learn a few tricks and scales and chord structures that I still use to this day. That’s when I really stepped up my game as a guitarist, but I also started realizing that I needed to learn to write songs. I wanted my band to get noticed for having good songs.”

Within 10 months of hitting the LA scene — after a lot of hard work building up a sizeable grassroots following — Walker’s band was signed to a major label. “It catapulted us to a different world immediately, and we ended up working with Desmond Child, who co-wrote a lot of the big hits with Jon Bon Jovi and Richie Sambora,” Butch remembers. “That put me in songwriter boot camp real quick.” Over the coming years, Walker would continue to hone his playing, songwriting and producing skills, ultimately finding lasting success on all fronts.

Finding Inspiration

Even all these years later, Walker’s love of guitar has not diminished one bit. In particular, he enjoys pushing the boundaries of the instrument. “I like to keep a lot of guitars laying around, for what each one gives me sonically,” he says. “I keep some of them in different tunings and I like having capos around too, because I can get totally inspired by capoing way up high on the sixth fret. It forces you to think outside the box and also changes the timbre of the guitar in a pleasing way to me. I like tuning it down to an open tuning, too, where it sounds like a different instrument entirely. As a producer and engineer, I pay attention to things like that, where the guitar completely changes its voice.”

Coming Full Circle

These days, Butch does his practicing in a studio that reflects the minimalist essentials of his humble origins. “I first started recording on a four-track in my parents’ antique shop, which was in this wooden shack behind the house. It was all trial and error, but I was always good at learning in isolation. Now everything has come full circle: I’m back in the garage, so to speak, by having a studio that is a modified garage, and I do my best work that way. I tell people all the time, ‘You don’t need a two thousand dollar a day studio to inspire you, or to make a great-sounding record.’ In this day and age, we’re very lucky to have inexpensive tools that allow you to make a great record at home— a record that can be played anywhere and holds up to the ones made in a big, fancy recording studio. That’s exciting to me because I came up DIY, and so I like the fact that it can still be done that way.

“But,” he’s careful to add, “the thing you can’t leave out is putting in the ten thousand hours to learn the work.”

Man in t-shirt and jacket with an electric guitar slung over his shoulders. — *Butch Walker today.*

For more information, visit butchwalker.com

Check out our other I Have You blog posts:

Larry Mullen Jr. reflects on the beginnings of U2

Jackie Miclau looks at the ways music brings people together

Business women holding an artistically conceptual light bulb with sparks surrounding it.

John and Paul and … Mac

Written by Shelly Peiken on September 14, 2020. Posted in Creativity.

Silhouette of two men playing guitar against a sunset sky.

More than half a century ago, John Lennon and Paul McCartney sat across from one another, knee to knee, guitars in hand, and wrote some of the greatest songs the world has ever known, without the benefit of any kind of modern technology. Would those songs have been any better if they were composed on computers and file-shared?

That’s a question a friend posed to me awhile ago, and it’s one I’ve been pondering for quite some time now.

There’s no doubt technology has made recording music easier and faster. With unlimited digital tracks available for vocal takes and comping, samples that allow us to access sounds we couldn’t have otherwise created ourselves and numerous DAW platforms that make it possible to collaborate with people anywhere in the world, we have more freedom and options than ever.

But does technology change the way we songwriters write, and if so, is it a help or a hindrance?

I remember a time when only three props needed to be present in order to write a song: a musical instrument (usually a guitar or a piano) and a pen and paper to write down the words. Today, of course, the instrument can be virtual (living inside our computer instead of a physical presence) and, for many, the pen and paper have been replaced by our computer, tablet or smartphone. In addition, there’s usually a beat looping from the get-go to give us a jump start, and a recording device standing by to capture any “happy accidents” that might occur.

Virtual instruments have their place, though I personally still prefer the tactile feel of a real piano or guitar. But the fixed rhythm of a beat can limit our tempo choice (or time signature) when we might have otherwise fallen more naturally into something quite different, and the mere presence of a recording device can make us self-conscious and rob us of spontaneity. (I suppose the trick is to tap record and try to forget it’s running.)

Which begs the question: Can technology remove the very imperfections that would otherwise humanize us? The answer is undoubtedly yes, given enough time and fanatical attention to detail. But is that a good thing?

“The Beatles were constantly in search of perfection,” wrote legendary Abbey Road engineer Geoff Emerick in his 2006 memoir Here, There and Everywhere: My Life Recording the Music of the Beatles, “but they were looking for the perfect way to convey a feeling, not technical perfection. … If someone made a tiny mistake or sang something a little funny, it would generally be left in if it was felt it added to the character of the record. Sometimes we’d even accentuate the mistakes during mixing, just to underline the fact that the music was being made by fallible human beings.”

That said, not all technology is designed to “perfect” per se. Today’s digital tools have knocked down barriers for superstar artist/producer/songwriters like T-Pain, Diplo and Beck, whose altered sounds are their brand. They could not have created their aesthetic without modern gadgets and gear. And though there always has been (and probably always will be) an audience for coffee-house acoustic music (myself included), many enjoy the opposite end of the spectrum as well (myself included here too!).

In my view there’s a balance. These wonderful toys allow us to experiment, get playful, have fun with sound. All positives, as I see it … so long as we’re careful not to use them to remove the heartbeat, the feeling, or cause us to lose the plot.

We’ve come a long way from the uncomplicated song born from those three ingredients in a room. Technology has allowed us freedom to explore, to evolve, to discover the “off,” the odd, the distorted, the trippy, the unexpected. Even Paul McCartney has dabbled in electronica from time to time, under the pseudonym The Fireman. And let us not forget that John Lennon was a big fan of Yoko Ono’s experimental music and the force behind the “Revolution 9” sound collage that dominates side 4 of the double White Album. I Imagine (pun intended) that if he were still here, he’d be curious and happily experimenting with all of today’s toys right along with the rest of us.

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

overwhelmed mom sitting in front of laptop while two kids are running around the room behind her

6 Ways to Overcome Overwhelm

Written by Kathryn Drury Wagner on September 11, 2020. Posted in Self-Care.

“I’m just so overwhelmed.” Bet you’ve heard — or said — that lately. Life sometimes feels like bailing water from a leaky rowboat.

But lately, the waves have been coming higher and faster with remote teaching, changes in classroom protocols and general anxiety about the world at large. If your emotional life is a boat that’s been taking on water and threatening to capsize, there are several things to keep in mind. You’re not alone in feeling overwhelmed — in fact, it’s to be expected considering these circumstances — and there are things we can do to help ease the feeling.

What are the Signs of Overwhelm?

Emotional overwhelm can be caused by a variety of factors, including stress, grief, traumatic events or even a pileup of a lot of little things that sneak up on you all at once. Do any of these symptoms sound familiar to you?

Feeling shut down; you don’t want to deal with people you normally do want to connect with like your friends and family.
Having a hard time focusing on your job, or even basic stuff on your to-do list.
Losing your cool over things that wouldn’t have bothered you much before.
Feeling utterly exhausted all the time, even when you are technically getting enough sleep at night.
Changed patterns in eating or sleeping (too much, too little).

Overwhelm can cause physical problems like headaches, work-related woes like poor performance, and emotional changes. So, it must be addressed.

Overcome Overwhelm with a Key Phrase

When you say or think, “I can’t take this anymore,” it only reinforces negative thinking. Instead, try saying: “I can do this today.” That was the advice clinical psychologist Dr. Rheeda Walker gave to Mashable. She explains that focusing on short-term solutions helps diffuse the frustration we feel when we have a lack of control over longer-term solutions.

Overcome Overwhelm by Checking Your Expectations

How we think something should turn out greatly affects our perception of what is actually happening.

Neuroscientists label these expectations as “prior beliefs,” and research out of MIT has found it affects how we behave. Our brains start reverse engineering or leaping ahead, based on something we’ve experienced in the past. This can be efficient — you can open a can of tuna without remastering a can opener every time — but for more complex situations, we tend to make assumptions. Ever pictured yourself in a house you’d made a bid on, before the offer was even accepted? Or fantasized about a new teaching job, before the interview even took place?

The problem is that as reality unfolds, our expectations don’t always match the outcome, and this disconnect can cause feelings of stress and disappointment. Having expectations can rob us of the joy of the present.

The solution is to note when we are having expectations, and remember to live in the now, using mindfulness as a tool. Here’s a six-minute breathing practice for living mindfully.

Overcome Overwhelm by Looking at the Bigger Picture

One day is just one day and won’t matter much in 10 years. Some people find that keeping a five-year, one-line journal, where you jot down just a few thoughts per evening, can provide a sense of context as we move through life. It helps to reflect back, “Ah, last year I was so stressed out about X and Y…” and take comfort realizing that most things do in fact get resolved, no matter how sticky the situation is at the time.

Overcome Overwhelm with Self-Compassion

Sometimes we are our own worst critics, beating ourselves up if the rhythm section got lost or the clarinets were off pitch. Be compassionate with yourself.

This is especially important if, in addition to workplace stress, you are dealing with caregiving. That’s because working parents and people taking care of elderly relatives are particularly prone to feelings of overwhelm. Researcher Dr. Kristin Neff, co-founder of the Center for Mindful Self-Compassion, has a series of free guided meditations and exercises that teach self-compassion techniques.

Overcome Overwhelm with a Playlist

Spotify actually has an Underwhelming Playlist for Overwhelmed Individuals, consisting of white noise. But seriously, as a music educator, who knows the power of music better than you? Create a playlist of music that makes you feel calmer, or on the flip side, tunes that will rev you up to tussle with the world. Does that translate to soothing birdsongs, Kendrick Lamar or a Puccini aria? Only you can decide.

Overcome Overwhelm with Powerful Knowledge

According to business speaker and author Scott Mautz, uncertainty is naturally unsettling. “Neuroscience research teaches us that uncertainty registers in our brain much like an error does,” he explains in an article for Inc. An error is something we naturally want to fix or solve because it makes us uncomfortable.

Simply knowing that we aren’t wired for so much change and uncertainty all at once — such as teaching remotely, juggling new online learning platforms and crazy news cycles — it’s no wonder that we’re overwhelmed. But knowledge is power. Armed with this knowledge, try some restorative exercise like gardening, walking, bicycling or yoga — all of which are low-impact and soothing.

Lastly, remember that a few sessions with a mental health professional can help if you’re feeling overwhelmed. Check with your healthcare plan (telehealth is increasingly available) or teacher’s union for information on available mental healthcare benefits. There are also online options such as Betterhelp.com and Talkspace.com.

Always remember to take good care of yourself.

Going Electric

Written by Ken Dattmore on September 11, 2020. Posted in Strings Artists.

Acoustic string instruments are largely accredited to the 17th century designs of the Amati, Stradivari and Guarneri schools — a period known as the “Golden Age” of violin making. But the instruments didn’t stop evolving at that point. They changed — and continue to change — to meet the demands of players, composers and listeners. Today we live in a new golden age: that of electric string instruments.

Electric violins, violas, cellos and basses are not as new as you might think. There are electric violin designs that date back to the 1920s, though they didn’t gain widespread popularity until the 1970s, when the burgeoning jazz-fusion genre began to incorporate new sounds. The electric cello and electric upright bass were both invented in the 1930s; the electric viola in the 1950s. And all are commonly employed by musicians today, in musical genres of every stripe and variety.

Let’s take a look at some of the reasons why acoustic string instruments have evolved into their electric counterparts over the years, and why electric strings continue to grow in popularity.

1. Modern Ensembles

With the rise of rock and roll in the 1950s, the big bands that predominated popular music in the first half of the 20th century gave way to small ensembles centered around electric guitar and electric bass, along with drums. In the second half of the century, electric keyboards and synthesizers were added. Acoustic instruments like violin, viola, cello and bass simply couldn’t compete with the high volume of the other instruments being played. It was inevitable that these string instruments needed to evolve into electric versions, just as guitars and keyboards had done previously.

2. Modern Venues

For hundreds of years, performing venues have been evolving too — from the ballrooms of the 14th century to the great opera houses of the 18th and 19th century, all the way to the huge modern sports arenas that host major music performances today. This growing size was initially addressed by adding more players to meet the volume level necessary so that attendees could hear the music being performed: Quartets became chamber groups; chamber groups became large symphonic orchestras.

But acoustic string instruments needed to evolve over that time, too, and so metal strings were developed to produce more volume. But the force of metal strings was more than the older instrument designs could bear, and the increased pressure on the top of the instrument caused many of them to collapse. Necks were then made longer to reduce the pressure of the metal strings on the body, and makers redesigned the dimension of the bass bar — a long narrow piece of spruce inside the top, on the bass side. This not only increased the volume of the instrument, but also made it possible for players to perform the wider range of melodic passages being written by composers.

Still, as venue size increased to the point where it is today — with ensembles often performing to hundreds, thousands, or even tens of thousands of attendees — metal strings and acoustic instrument redesigns were simply not enough. It was clear that electric versions of traditional acoustic string instruments had to be created.

3. Modern Styles

For centuries, orchestral instruments were restricted to the confines of baroque, classical, renaissance and modern orchestral styles of music composition. That changed in the 1970s when violinists started to take their cues from electric guitarists. Players put down their acoustic instruments and began to experiment with electric versions. While one important reason was to compete with the volume of other electric instruments in the group, another reason was that the sound of these new instruments could be processed through effects pedals, like an electric guitar. All of a sudden, a violin could not only sound like a violin, it could sound like an electric guitar. This opened a whole new world of sonic possibilities to string performers so that today, you’ll hear electric strings being used in every style of music.

4. Modern Technologies

The ever-accelerating advancement of new technologies has increased the ability of electric strings to keep up with newer styles of music. Better pickup systems, along with the arrival of solid-state technologies in the 1950s, gave the electric instruments of the era a clean, strong signal. But early electric string designs were mostly solid-body — more like electric guitars and not acoustic-sounding enough to satisfy many players and listeners. These instruments were also uncomfortably heavy, making it difficult for most performers to bear their weight over the course of a performance that might run several hours.

To overcome these limitations, electric string manufacturers sought out new materials such as fiberglass, carbon fiber and Lucite. These stronger and lighter materials brought instrument weights down considerably and allowed for the addition of resonation chambers that gave electric instruments sonic properties that were much closer to the original acoustic instruments. What’s more, the new finishes and colors that could be applied made these instruments more visually appealing — players could even add beads and crystals to the body to personalize the instrument, much like the original acoustic designs where the distinct flaming of the wood materials gave each player the ability to know exactly which instrument was theirs. Today’s LED technology even makes it possible for some electric string instruments to light up in different colors as they’re being played!

Another feature that appeals to many players is the ability to play electric string instruments silently through headphones. This is great for students who need to practice at home without disturbing family members or neighbors, as well as for touring professionals who have to do their practicing on a tour bus or in a hotel room. As one high-profile touring violinist has said, “When I practice, I practice the things I don’t play well. The last thing I want is someone walking past my hotel room and hearing me sound bad.”

5. Modern Economics

An important byproduct of technical development is its impact on price. As technology became more readily available, manufacturing techniques became more efficient. In turn, as the resulting electric string instruments became better-sounding and better-looking, the demand for them increased, which served to bring the cost down. Today, there is an electric string instrument for every budget. Schools can afford to incorporate electric ensembles into their traditional orchestral programs, and educators have been able to use the popularity of electric string instruments to recruit new students and retain them as they enjoy playing the popular music they listen to every day.

Young student plays electric violin with other young men.

New designs by modern instrument makers continue to give performers the tools they need to meet the demands of modern music and most importantly, we listeners. Modern orchestral string players are quickly realizing that, in addition to their acoustic instrument, they also need an electric version, for both performance and recording. For them, and for us, it’s like having the best of both worlds!

Check out these related blog articles:

SILENT™ and Electric String Instruments, Explained

How to Choose the Best Amplifier for Your Electric String Instrument

How to Silently Practice Your String Instrument at Home

Electric Ensemble Checklist

How to Select an Electric Upright Bass

Electric Strings: The Power of Plugging In

Click here for more information about Yamaha electric string instruments.

Listening Care

Written by Joy Frye on September 10, 2020. Posted in Music and Streaming. 2 Comments on Listening Care

Have you ever stood in line next to someone who was playing their music through their earbuds so loudly that you could hear it where you were standing? You could ascribe this behavior to their selfless wish to share their music with the world (at the expense of their hearing health), but more likely it’s because they are trying to hear every detail in the music they’re listening to.

As it happens, there’s a better way to hear the detail, without increasing the volume to potentially harmful levels: Listening Care, one of the adaptive technologies featured in the new line of Yamaha wireless headphones, earphones and earbuds. In developing this technology, Yamaha engineers used their longstanding expertise in sound reproduction for home audio (creating innovative advancements such as YPAO™ Volume) and applied it to the challenge of personal audio.

The Science Behind It

Loudness is subjective. It’s the perception of sound pressure level (SPL) for each frequency, from high to low, which is different for every individual. That’s why someone wearing earbuds might not feel that their music is loud, though bystanders may disagree. At modest listening levels, more SPL is required to hear high and low frequencies. The traditional fix is to turn up the volume, which increases the pressure for all frequencies.

Listening Care provides a more sophisticated solution by using a 4-band parametric equalizer (PEQ) to apply precise settings at each level in order to produce the best tonal balance at every volume. This means that you (and earbud guy) don’t have to crank up the volume to hear the bass drops or the cymbal crashes.

The higher-end YH-E700A and EP-E70A wireless headphones go even further by taking into account the loudness of the music you’re listening to, as well as the background noise. In those models, Listening Care analyzes the average volume of the content every 0.7 milliseconds and makes adjustments slowly over time for a natural effect. It also calculates the signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio of the content to environmental noise (as measured by the headphone’s built-in external microphone) and subtly adjusts the volume accordingly for an optimized listening experience.

Yamaha Listening Care adapts to you and your environment, allowing you to listen intelligently, whether you’re alone in your home office or standing in line next to earbud guy. (Someone tell him … quick!)

Want to learn more? Check out the video:

Check out these related blog articles:

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Advanced ANC

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Listening Optimizer

Yamaha Headphones Technology Spotlight: Ambient Sound

What’s So Good About Dolby Atmos^® and DTS:X^™?

Click here to learn more about Yamaha wireless headphones.

Introducing the PSR-SX600 Arranger Workstation

Written by Yamaha Corporation of America on September 9, 2020. Posted in Workstations.

Here at Yamaha, we’ve established a long legacy as a leading developer of arranger workstation technology, with products such as PSR-S Series keyboards and Genos. Now meet the latest member of that family: the PSR-SX600.

Both onstage and in the studio, the PSR-SX600 gives solo performers, songwriters and hobbyist musicians everything they need to craft fully arranged, highly polished songs, including a 61-key keyboard, automatic accompaniment, onboard DSP effects, built-in studio-quality recording and audiophile-quality stereo sound.

Hundreds of Styles let you assemble your ultimate backing band, and a Smart Chord function allows even those without keyboard proficiency to quickly sketch out fully orchestrated arrangement ideas with lush harmonies. Two assignable Live Control knobs allow for real-time adjustment of key aspects of the sound, and USB connectivity enables you to easily integrate the PSR-SX600 with other instruments and recording devices. There’s even a microphone input so you can sing along to your creations — through the onboard effects and EQ, of course — as well as a vocal cancel function for karaoke sing-alongs to pre-existing tracks.

Ready to learn more about the PSR-SX600? Check out these videos:

Click here to learn more about the Yamaha PSR-SX600.

What Is Dolby Atmos^® Height Virtualization?

Written by Rich Tozzoli on September 4, 2020. Posted in TV & Movies. 1 Comment on What Is Dolby Atmos^® Height Virtualization?

With every passing day, Dolby Atmos^® immersive technology continues to enjoy increasing popularity, filling home theaters with sound from above as well as from the front and rear. Through the use of object-based audio, Atmos allows content creators to position and move sounds, effects and music in a three-dimensional space — all of which can be reproduced from ceiling-mounted or upward-firing speakers, taking your viewing, gaming and listening experiences to new sonic heights.

Up until now, if you wanted to enjoy the extra envelopment of height channels, you needed some Dolby Atmos-encoded content and a Dolby Atmos-enabled AV receiver or sound bar. Yamaha offers numerous Atmos-enabled receivers, including those in the AVENTAGE line, as well as select RX-V Series models such as the RX-V685 and the RX-V585. Another option is provided by the Yamaha YSP-5600 Digital Sound Projector — the first sound bar to offer height channels for Dolby Atmos reproduction and 7.1.2-channel multidimensional sound. The secret here lies in its 32 drivers and two woofers, along with 12 array speakers (six on each end of the unit) that “beam” audio signal up to the ceiling, adjustable for the optimal height channel positions.

But what if your home theater is not equipped with the extra speakers or sound bars needed? Turns out there’s a solution for that too: Dolby Atmos Height Virtualization. In this article, we’ll take a closer look at how it works.

Go Virtual

“Virtualization” is a word that refers to the act of creating a virtual (rather than actual) version of something. In this case, it means the ability to simulate the Atmos overhead experience in a home theater setup that has a traditional speaker layout.

Dolby Atmos Height Virtualization uses digital signal processing to create the sensation of overhead sound in speakers that are actually at listener height. This is accomplished through the use of sophisticated height-cue filters that simulate the natural spectral information our ears receive from sound that’s coming from overhead.

The Yamaha RX-V6A offers Dolby Atmos Height Virtualization, as well as support for DTS:X^™, Wi-Fi^®, AirPlay 2^®, Spotify^® Connect and Pandora^®, plus voice control, MusicCast wireless multi-room audio and YPAO^™ automatic room calibration — there’s even a phono input!

Perfect for movies, music, sports and TV buffs, gamers and anyone looking to create a powerful surround sound system with a small footprint, Dolby Atmos Height Virtualization can provide an affordable and accessible sonic height experience without the need to add extra speakers. And as more Atmos-enabled content becomes available from movie studios, streaming service providers and television broadcasters, users will have even more ways to enjoy their home theaters. The future is looking — and sounding — bright indeed!

Check out these related blog articles:

What’s a Receiver? Part 2: AV

Building the Ideal Home Theater

How to Recreate the Movie Theater Experience at Home

Gaming in Dolby Atmos^®: An Interview with Josh Osiris

Click here for more information about the Yamaha RX-V6a AV receiver.

Click here for more information about Yamaha AVENTAGE AV receivers.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha RX-V Series AV receivers.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha YSP-5600 sound bar.

Read other articles in our AV Technology Spotlight series.

Master Bus Processing

Written by Mike Levine on September 2, 2020. Posted in Recording.

The master bus, the mix bus, the 2-bus, the stereo bus and the stereo out are all different terms for the same thing: the left-right channel that’s the final destination in your DAW’s console when you’re mixing a multitrack project. All your tracks are routed to the master bus, summed to stereo and then bounced to disk from there.

Because the master bus is the only point where all the tracks are combined, it’s the place to insert plug-ins if you want to to add polish to the overall sound by applying global processing such as compression, EQ and saturation.

*Master bus processing is applied to all the tracks in your mix.*

A word of caution, however: This is not a panacea, and it won’t fix a poorly mixed song. If there are noticeable problems with your mix, you’re better off addressing them at the track level. That said, let’s take a closer look at how master bus processing works.

Who’s First?

As with standard track-based processing, the order in which you insert effects during master bus processing will have an impact on the sound. Most engineers tend to start with EQ or compression. Which of those should come first is a matter of deciding whether you want to compress the audio after it’s been EQed, or EQ it after it’s been compressed.

There’s no reason you can’t experiment with both options if you’re not sure. Many times the decision is song-dependent, and in many cases, the difference will be quite subtle. However, there is one rule of thumb: If you’re applying saturation as well, you’ll probably want to put that last in the chain.

This master bus effects chain consists of EQ, compression and tape saturation, in that order. — *A typical master bus effects chain: EQ, compression and saturation, in that order.*

All Things Being Equalized

Most of the equalization in a mix takes place on individual tracks. EQ on the master bus should generally be subtle and intended for outcomes like adding a little extra low-end thump, creating some more energy, making the mix brighter, or reducing muddiness.

Here are some suggestions for EQ adjustments you might try applying to the master bus:

– Add a little boost somewhere between 60 – 150Hz to accentuate the kick and bass.

– Reduce muddiness with a small cut in the 250 to 500Hz range.

– Add presence with a small boost between about 4kHz and 7kHz.

– Create a little air on top with a boost between 10kHz and 15kHz using a high-shelf filter.

– Get rid of unneeded subharmonic information with a high-pass (aka “low-cut”) filter to roll off frequencies below about 30Hz. Unless you’re mixing dance music, these ultra-low frequencies are probably unnecessary and not audible anyway, except on systems with large subwoofers.

That said, the rule of thumb here is: when in doubt, leave it out — or at least print a version of your mix without any master bus EQ. That will leave your mastering engineer the leeway they need to make those kinds of decisions.

Cubase allows you to tweak your mix’s EQ in many frequency ranges. — *The Cubase **Frequency** plug-in allows you to tweak many frequency ranges.*

Add Some Glue to Your Mix

Compression is probably the most common type of processing that’s applied to the master bus. Why would you need master compression when you’ve likely inserted it on most of your individual tracks? Probably the most crucial reason is to create what’s referred to as the “glue” effect. Compressing the whole mix through a single processor imparts a cohesiveness to the overall sound that can really make it sound polished and professional.

For glue-type compression, set the ratio pretty low — around 2:1 or 3:1. Use the threshold to control how much compression you’re getting. You probably want no more than about 2 to 5dB of gain reduction. Keep the attack parameter relatively slow, or you run the risk of squashing the parts of the mix that tend to come from the most important components, such as lead vocals and kick and snare drum. Fast attacks on master bus compressors can also have the unwanted effect of reducing the mix’s overall energy.

The nature of a compressor is that it’s constantly going on and off based on when the audio is exceeding and going below the threshold. The goal is to have its cycle of attenuation and release feel like it’s working in time with the music and not against it. You can control this with the release time, which governs how quickly the compressor lets go after attenuating a transient (signal peak). Either experiment with different release times to see what feels best or activate your compressor’s auto-release function if it has one. Auto-release will usually give you a usable setting.

All types of compressor plug-ins are used for master bus compression, but probably the most common are those based on VCA compressors — for example, Steinberg’s Vintage Compressor mkIII. These kinds of plug-ins can be used to not only compress but to add some analog-style “color” to your mix.

Steinberg Vintage Compressor mkIII. — *Steinberg **Vintage Compressor mkIII**.*

Steinberg Cubase includes an excellent built-in Compressor plug-in, which gives you plenty of control, including an auto-release function.

The Steinberg Compressor plug-in. — *Steinberg **Compressor**.*

In terms of when it should be applied, many engineers feel that if you’re going to use master bus compression, you should add it early on in the mix process so that all of your subsequent mixing decisions will be made in context of the compression. In other words, you’ll take its effect into account as you’re setting levels and compressing individual tracks. If you wait to add the compressor until the end of the mix, it likely won’t be as integrated as it would have been if it was there from early on.

A Little Dirt

Another master bus effect that’s sometimes applied is saturation. A little bit of tape- or tube-like saturation coming from a plug-in like Steinberg Magneto can add analog-sounding warmth to a mix by softening the transients. It also adds a bit of its own natural compression. Subtlety is the key when it comes to master saturation. You’re just flavoring the mix, not crushing it — unless, of course, that’s what you want.

A tape saturation effect can warm up a mix. — *A tape saturation effect such as Steinberg **Magneto** can warm up a mix.*

If your saturation plug-in has a wet/dry (“mix”) control, try adding a little too much saturation — that is, to the point where it can be clearly heard — and then back off the mix knob to taste. This creates parallel saturation, which can sometimes sound better than just adding it at 100%.

Pushing the Levels

Home recordists often put limiters on the master bus to make a mix louder. This is a practice I don’t recommend because it may not leave any room for your mastering engineer to apply their own limiting — something they can arguably do with much greater expertise than most of us mere mortals. What’s more, too much limiting will reduce your music’s dynamic range and can make it sound fatiguing.

Until you’ve gained a lot of mixing experience, you’re better off focusing on creating the best mix you can rather than worrying about its ultimate loudness. If you’re planning on mastering the project yourself, you can always process it with a limiter after you’ve finished your mix and are happy with it.

When it comes to master bus processing, less is usually more. Careful application is the name of the game if you want the best results.

Check out these related blog articles:

Why Compress?

Practical EQ Techniques

Distortion and Saturation

Scott Mayo on building a strong foundation for a lifetime of good habits

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase and Cubase plug-ins.

Larry Mullen Jr. Reflects on the Beginnings of U2

Written by Yamaha Corporation of America on September 1, 2020. Posted in Artists, Drum Artists.

“After practicing on my own for months, my father said to me, ‘You really need to be in a band.’”

U2 drummer Larry Mullen Jr. pauses for a moment, reflecting on the momentous day when his dad’s casual remark would serve to bring together four uniquely talented individuals … and launch the career of one of the most-loved bands of all time.

“‘Well, how would I do that?’ I asked him,” Mullen remembers. “‘Put a notice on the [school] notice board,’ [he said]. So I did, the next day. It simply said something like, ‘Musicians wanted to form band. Contact Larry Mullen.’”

Soon after, other students started asking him how his band was going. “I said, ‘Well, I’ve only got one guy, called Edge,’” Mullen recalls with a laugh. “He said he was a guitar player. I knew Adam [Clayton] owned a bass guitar. Nobody said that he could play it, but he still owned a bass and he looked like a rock star. I had a kit of drums made by a toy manufacturer.

“We met [the following] Wednesday at my house,” he remembers. “I’d asked my parents if I could borrow the kitchen. So we moved the table and chairs out. Adam arrived, Edge arrived, and then Bono arrived with a friend on the back of a motorcycle. We piled into the kitchen and the guitars came out. Everything was out of tune, and we just started to play. And at the end of it, we said, ‘You know, we should do this again.’”

U2 in the early days with Larry Mullen Jr., Adam Clayton, Bono, and the Edge. — *U2 in the early days. (L to R: Larry Mullen Jr., Adam Clayton, Bono, the Edge).*

And so a legendary band was born. Yet, according to Mullen, “It was really ordinary and not extraordinary in any way. On that first day in my kitchen, it was clear that we didn’t have much going for us, and that we were all kind of equally talentless. My sister [later] said, ‘I have never heard such a racket in my life!’ But what was extraordinary was the timing, because punk had just exploded. We knew that we weren’t going to be able to go out and be a covers band because we just weren’t good at it. So we worked on being our own band and learning from each other’s mistakes and ended up being influenced by each other’s [shortcomings]. For a lot of [musicians] it’s about figuring out how to stand on their own and be proficient. In our case it was, maybe skill will kill us. So let’s not get too skilled.”

An unconventional formula, to be sure, but one that unquestionably worked. And it all started as the result of a casual remark by a loving father to a determined son.

A young Larry Mullen Jr.

Larry Mullen Jr. today.

Check out these related blog posts:

Butch Walker talks about practicing through the roadblocks

Jackie Miclau looks at the ways music brings people together

Pop/Rock Chord Voicings, Part 3

Written by Jerry Kovarsky on August 31, 2020. Posted in Keyboard How-to. 1 Comment on Pop/Rock Chord Voicings, Part 3

In Parts 1 and 2 of this three-part article, we covered numerous voicings and passing chord concepts for playing in pop and rock styles of music. In this installment, we’ll put those ideas together.

Getting in the Groove

You need more than good voicings to sound hip — you also need to impart a good feel to your music. Regardless of whether you’re playing solo or in a band, you want to come up with rhythmic patterns that match the feel of the music. Here are two audio clips of me playing on top of a C major chord (once slowly, and once at a moderate tempo with drums added), using some of the concepts we’ve discussed:

The first thing I want to draw your attention to is how I keep my right hand in basically the same position the whole time, until the octave melodic fill leading into the last bar. Based on the playing of keyboardists like Elton John, this style works well behind vocals, and gives the music energy without getting too busy, or getting in the way of the melody.

Notice the use of the Sus2 voicing on the second sixteenth of beat 2 in bar 1, and again on beat 4 of bar 2; I also use a Sus4 voicing in bar 2. Bar 3 has two different passing chords: first, a D minor at the end of the first beat, with a nice syncopation to resolve it on the second sixteenth of beat 2. The figure on beat 4 of that same bar ends on an F triad, which again resolves into a Cadd2 on the next beat, using the same syncopated rhythm.

I also employ some small arpeggiations of the chord voicings, playing the notes of some chords individually to break up the chords with a touch of melody. Finally, leading into bar 5 I play a short melody in octaves, which is a common way (in rock music, anyway) to fill spaces between the singer’s phrases. My advice is to keep those simple and don’t overdo them, unless it’s your time to shine with a solo.

Roll On

Rather than always playing your chord voicings as a block, try rolling the notes, which means rapidly sweeping through a given voicing. This is different from an arpeggio, in that you keep holding each note, so you are quickly adding the next notes until you are sustaining the full voicing. Here are a few ways to do that:

The wavy line to the left of the chord voicing is how a rolled or quickly arpeggiated chord is notated, and the arrow indicates the direction of the roll. (The figure in bars 2, 4 and 6 is what you actually play when you see the notation in bars 1, 3 and 5.) The version in bars 3 and 4 has you holding the top note for a split second before continuing the roll downward — this is a more melodic way to do a roll. The version in bars 5 and 6 is a roll upwards, which you could do for any of these previous examples as well. To make it more colorful I added the 2nd (D) to the chord voicing, playing both the middle C and D at the same time with my thumb and then continue the roll upwards. I suggest you practice these exercises slowly at first, learning to hold each note after it’s played until you are sustaining the full chord voicing; also try rolling the chord at different speeds.

Less is More

For slower songs, or in situations where you want to leave more space, you can add a little fill by playing either a single octave note, an octave-based simple melody, or a small arpeggiation, as shown below:

The first idea (bar 1) is the simplest, but it can be very effective. I suggest you not choose the root of the chord or the current melody note for your octave, as it might either be boring or get in the way of the vocal. The second idea is a simple countermelody, which will hopefully work with the vocal. The third idea is a small downward arpeggiation — again, try choosing some colorful notes. The final example is a two-handed quick arpeggiation. For this, I chose two triads: a 2nd inversion C major played with the left hand, followed by a root position G major in the right hand, which creates the 5th, major 7th and 9th of the C major seventh chord.

To give you a little inspiration, here are the same right-hand figures played over different, and changing harmony in the left hand:

Chimes and ripples with changing harmony in the left hand.

Now we’re getting some real sophistication in our playing, while keeping our ideas clear and not overplaying. Bar 2 uses the sus2 voicing over the 3rd in the bass that we learned in last month’s article. For bar 3, I kept the same right-hand voicing and moved the bass to a B-flat to get a very cool-sounding chord that has nice color tones (the major 7th [D] and the 6th [G], also called the 13th). I keep following the same kind of voice-leading downwards to create the last voicing for the A minor 9th.

Putting It All Together

OK, time to use everything we’ve discussed. The performance below is more advanced than the examples I’ve given you up to this point. I suggest you listen to it a number of times, following along with the music to get a sense of how it goes before trying to read and play it yourself:

The example has a gospel flavor to it, and is played in 6/8 time. This time signature has a feeling of two beats per bar, but each beat is made up of three subdivisions rather than two.

An analysis of the transcription reveals that bars 1 – 11 are using the lower chord voicing, followed by the simple octave fills and small arpeggio ideas discussed earlier. Bar 4 has a descending fill that implies using a G passing chord between two inversions of the A minor. I then repeated that downward concept again on the A minor in bar 12.

Bar 14 uses an F 6th arpeggio to set up an Fadd2 voicing (in fourths), and the next bar has a cool, jazzy chord which builds up some energy with a climbing octave melody phrase. This spills over into bar 17, where a series of descending passing chord figures are played between inversions of the C chord. A quick G with B in the bass passing chord sets up the A minor nicely, with the downward passing chord phrases mimicked again for continuity.

Bars 21 and 22 use a C triad over the F bass for color, with the idea repeated an octave higher the second time around for variety. For the Bb dominant chord, the energy is ramped up again with rhythmically repeated octaves between the two hands, moving into a melodic line back to the C major.

Bars 25 through 28 go back to working the passing chord concepts again, with a moving melody added across bar 29, using the C triad over F and then a 4th-based voicing that looks like a Csus4 triad (or is it Fsus2?) to lead into that colorful Bb dominant chord again. Two downward-rolled arpeggio figures calm the energy down as the wrap-up approaches; these also serve to set up the final V to I resolution, although the V chord is a suspended 4th.

Whew! That’s a lot of analysis, but it demonstrates how all the concepts we’ve presented in this three-part series can be used. Plenty for you to digest and work on!

All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Import Notation Files into Dorico

Written by Dr. Dave Gerhart on August 31, 2020. Posted in Teaching Tips.

I am continuing my quest to learn and use the Dorico notation program.

A few months ago, I wrote the Quick Start Guide to Dorico to help educators (and me) learn the program. Just like practicing scales, learning a new notation program requires regular, daily practice. I watched the videos for beginners and completed the “Getting Started with Note input in Dorico” project. I finally fell like I understand the basics of Dorico.

Before 2010, educators primarily used two notation programs to create scores, worksheets and parts for the musical classroom — Finale and Sibelius. As a college student, I started using Finale in 1992 when I purchased my first computer. I used this program to complete theory assignments, write arrangements and create worksheets. I spent hours reading the manual to learn the ins and outs of Finale, and I quickly became very proficient. I fondly remember working with my percussion professor to digitize his scores for the steel drum orchestra. We both learned a lot about arranging and notation programs.

Through my collegiate years and then as an educator, I have created numerous percussion ensemble, chamber, orchestral and steel drum scores.

The next step in my Dorico learning process is to move my old notation files to Dorico. There are two ways to export files:

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface)
MusicXML (Music Extensible Markup Language)

Evaluating the Formats

Before I describe each of the formats, I want to recommend that when you complete a notation project, make sure to create a backup in BOTH MusicXML and MIDI formats. This is a difficult lesson I learned with my old files that I am now converting into MusicXML. The advantage of MusicXML and MIDI are that they are both open formats that can be opened by more than 250 programs. While all of the data may not translate in the conversion, it is much easier to fix minor discrepancies than to re-input the entire score. Plus, by adding these files to the completed file folder, you will be able to open that file in the future.

MIDI: MIDI is an open standard that connects electronic instruments and computers in order to facilitate playing, editing and recording. In the Discover Dorico YouTube video, host John Barron, Dorico’s product specialist, says MIDI information includes:

Note Lengths as MIDI “Ticks”
Note Velocities
Controller Data

All of this information is related to sound. MIDI information does not include tempo markings, articulations, dynamic markings and other notation or graphic information.

MusicXML: MusicXML is an open file format that represents the graphical information in a file saved by a notation program. According to Barron in the same Discover Dorico video, MusicXML includes information like:

Dynamic Markings
Note Lengths
Lines and Other Text Markings
Stem Direction
Beaming
Instrument Information
Keys and Clefs

Making a Decision

Before you make a decision about which format to use, I highly recommend that you watch the MusicXML import YouTube Video. Barron presents the advantages and disadvantages of each file format and shows how to edit the settings in Dorico to make sure you get the correct information into the imported file. He also shows examples of different types of scores and how to make edits to the file.

After watching the video, I decided to convert my old files into MusicXML before importing them into Dorico. I prefer MusicXML because it maintains all of the graphic information from my old files. Once you have imported the MusicXML files into Dorico, you will need to scan the file and do some editing.

If you have any questions or are looking for more information about Dorico, please email me at educators@yamaha.com.

Additional Resources

Importing MusicXML Files
MusicXML Import | Discover Dorico Monthly Video Session
Dorico Quick Reference Card
Dorico YouTube channel
Dorico Facebook Community
Yamaha Music Educators Community

Amp and Guitar Modeling 101

Written by Mike Levine on August 28, 2020. Posted in Amps.

Why use one guitar when you can have several? For that matter, why use just one amp and speaker cabinet, when you can have easy access to dozens of them?

The simple answer is: There’s no need to limit yourself to just one. Thanks to digital modeling technology, guitarists and bassists can access a wide range of virtual instruments, amps and speaker cabinets, both in the studio and onstage.

Digital modeling has come a long way since its introduction in the 1990s, thanks in large part to massive increases in computer power and processor speed. In this article, we’ll focus on two modern products — Yamaha THR-II Series desktop amplifiers and SILENT Guitars™. But before we do so, let’s talk about how modeling works.

Amp Modeling

Digital modeling in general works by replicating (i.e., emulating) an object with the use of computer algorithms — sets of software instructions created to perform a particular task. In a model of an electronic device like an amplifier, these algorithms are designed to recreate the behavior and interactions of each individual circuit and component within the amp. What’s more, guitar amp modeling plug-ins such as Line 6 Amp Farm^® usually offer a user interface that provides emulations of the original amp’s knobs and switches, making the simulation even more realistic.

Screenshot of Line 6 Amp Farm. — *Line 6 Amp Farm.*

Part of the challenge in creating amp models is replicating the sometimes irregular behavior of components like tubes and transformers, which create the warmth and distortion that makes these devices so popular. Some amp modeling products also incorporate algorithms that emulate the sonic responses of various speaker cabinets.

One of the big advantages of amp modeling versus using a real amp is that you can monitor over headphones without making any noise. If you have an apartment-based home studio, for example, it allows you to practice and/or record guitar parts 24/7 without bothering your neighbors.

Instrument Modeling

Musical instruments can also be modeled. Electronic instruments such as synthesizers are modeled by digitally replicating their circuitry through a process similar to modeling amplifiers. But the process of modeling an acoustic instrument, such as guitar, is significantly different.

One approach is to recreate the tonality and behavior of the instrument by sampling every note it’s capable of producing at a variety of different volume levels, and, if necessary, applying all the different possible articulations as well. A more complex method called physical modeling requires mapping out the physics of the way the instrument produces sound and then creating algorithms that replicate each process.

THR-II Series Desktop Amps

Yamaha THR-II Series desktop amps are small, highly portable practice amps that offer 15 guitar amp models, along with acoustic guitar and bass models, plus onboard digital effects. They can also act as a USB audio interface, so you can digitally record guitar parts into your DAW, with the amp, instrument and effects modeling applied. If you already have an audio interface, you can simply plug one or both of the THR-II quarter-inch line outputs into the interface’s line inputs.

Here are a few audio clips, recorded with an electric guitar being played through a THR30II. The first example uses the amp’s Clean Boutique model on the rhythm part, with a little added onboard reverb:

This next clip features some lead guitar through the Lead Boutique model, again with a little added reverb:

And this one employs the Modern High Gain model for a heavily distorted sound:

SILENT Guitar

There are several different types of Yamaha SILENT Guitars, but what they all have in common is that they make virtually no noise acoustically, are easily portable and offer a wide range of tones. The SLG200S, which has steel strings, works well in tandem with THR-II amps.

SILENT Guitars offer two different types of sound production, and you can opt to either switch between them or blend them together. One is with the use of a piezo-electric pickup, which is a standard way to electrify an acoustic stringed instrument. The other is called Yamaha SRT (Studio Response Technology) — a unique system that digitally models the sound of an acoustic guitar being captured through high-quality studio microphones. This extremely realistic emulation not only replicates the characteristics of the microphone, but the physical resonance of a guitar as well.

The SLG200S has particularly versatile sonics. If you plug the pickup signal into a clean amp, mixer or interface directly, it sounds like an acoustic guitar, particularly if you blend the SRT signal with it. But it can also sound like an electric guitar if you turn the blend all the way to the P.U. (pickup) setting and plug it into an amp, such as a THR-II model, that’s designed to create a variety of distorted and overdriven sounds.

The next three audio clips allow you to hear the sound of the SLG200S played through a THR30II amp. In this first example, the THR30II is on its Clean setting, so the SLG200S sounds like an electric-acoustic guitar:

In this next clip, the amp is set to Clean Classic, which makes the SLG200S sound like a clean electric guitar:

Finally, here’s a duet with the SLG200S playing both parts; the lead part uses the THR30II Lead Boutique setting, while the rhythm part uses the Lead Classic setting:

As you can see, whether it’s used to create virtual amps, speaker cabinets or even guitars, digital modeling can open up a huge range of tonal options that you couldn’t achieve without a warehouse full of gear. Well worth checking out!

Related blog articles:

Spotlight on THR-II

The SILENT Guitar Speaks

Four Reasons I Travel With My Yamaha SILENT Guitar™

Utilizing Modeling Technology

Layering Guitar with Studio Response Technology

Click here for more information about Line 6 Amp Farm.

Click here for more information about Yamaha THR-II Series desktop amps.

Click here for more information about Yamaha SILENT Guitars.

man talking on the phone while sitting in front of laptop

Stay Connected During Online Instruction

Written by Kathryn Drury Wagner on August 27, 2020. Posted in Self-Care.

To paraphrase English poet John Donne, no man or woman is an island. He wrote that we are all “a piece of the continent, a part of the main.”

But teaching in a virtual class setting can sometimes feel like being marooned on a desert island. Sure, there’s interaction via videoconferencing, yet some days, it can get lonely — as if there’s an ocean between you, your students and your colleagues. Hello? Is anyone out there?

The good news is that you don’t need to send a message in a bottle to forge strong relationships. Let’s look at some ways to feel connected as a music educator, even if you are teaching via your own private “island.”

Feel More Connected with Your Colleagues

Virtual Coffee Chats: We’ve all heard of the buddy system. Research suggests that friendships, especially during times of anxiety, actually allow us to reframe negative events as challenges instead of disasters. So it’s important to keep building relationships with your fellow faculty. Schedule time to bond over a virtual coffee or virtual lunch, and make sure the discussion isn’t only about work topics — invest your time and effort to keep in touch with people on a deeper level. It’s good for your career development and your stress levels.

Convene to Enjoy a Virtual Program: Perhaps in the past, you savored local performances with your music department colleagues. If attending a performance as a group isn’t feasible right now, you can still “gather” to enjoy a virtual show. For example, try a Tanglewood night. It does Wednesday evening video streams with artists like the Danish String Quartet, Silkroad Ensemble, Lucas and Arthur Jussen, and Paul Lewis, recorded at beautiful concert venues all over the world. Last spring, Yamaha kicked off YamahaLiveFromHome, presenting concerts and music tutorials.

Host a Game Night: If you used to hang out with coworkers for happy hour, pivot to a virtual game night and test out online group activities like Drawasaurus. Bonus points: Prior to the event, email links for cocktail, mocktail and appetizer recipes, so everyone can be sipping and nibbling similar libations and snacks, adding to the sense of camaraderie.

Go Old School: Yes, you can still pick up the phone! Don’t forget the power of a kind call or a thoughtful voicemail. And if someone has done you a solid, drop a handwritten thank-you note instead of automatically turning to email. A study in the Journal of Happiness found that writing notes of gratitude increased participants’ feelings of life satisfaction and reduced depression. So not only are you spreading good vibes with your thank you, you’ll feel happier yourself simply by busting out that stationery you have been meaning to use.

Feel More Connected with Your Students

Mix it Up: Scientists tell us that music boosts creativity, and stretching your students’ creative thinking skills improves their cognition and enhances their learning. So in addition to your music lesson plans, throw in a few unexpected twists. Try a game of charades or turn off your microphone and have them guess what you’re saying by reading your lips. Play a quick scavenger hunt by giving students a list of three items and have them race around their houses to find them, before returning for the online learning.

Creativity can also allow for effective ways of conveying assignments or instructor communications as well. For example, John Thomas, a first/second grade teacher, turned his reading assignment into a roller coaster ride.

Plan One-on-One Communications: It can be frustrating for some students to feel “seen” in virtual learning environments like Zoom, so if you are teaching a group, be sure to schedule time for one-on-one communications.

Establish set virtual office hours, where you can touch base with students. Do they need help tuning their instruments? Feedback on a solo? Do they want to stop by just to say hi? This is also a good time to gauge emotional and social needs. Do they require any additional resources or support?

Depending on district policies, music educators may also be able to use texts or cell phone messages as a way to ping students to stay in touch. Or drop students a postcard in the mail, telling them they are doing a good job learning a new instrument, mastering a challenging piece of music or just that they are a pleasure to have in class. Young kids love getting mail, but even older students will be surprised and pleased by this personal greeting.

Feel More Connected the Natural World

Ideally, you’ll be able to take a short break or two between videoconference classes and staff meetings at some point during your day. (See more about The Power of a Stress-Relieving Routine.) But for times when you can’t get out for a stress-relieving walk, reconnect with nature by having a plant near your work station. Viewing greenery in micro-breaks as little as 40 seconds can restore the brain’s ability for sustained attention, reports a study published in the Journal of Environmental Psychology.

If fauna is more up your alley than flora, take a few minutes and pop into the webcams at explore.org, which has live video feeds of animal habitats from all over the world. It’s refreshing to suddenly be eye-level with an eagle’s nest or underwater in a tropical reef. Deep breaths … you’re ready to return to the school’s online learning platform, refreshed.

Feel More Connected with Your Purpose

Music and music education are more important than ever because they promote invention, problem-solving and imagination. Music weaves us together at a time when we’re all getting a blunt reminder on how interdependent humans are, and how being distant from each other is really challenging. So, make time to reconnect with why you pursued a teaching career in the first place. This might be by writing in a journal, listing three things each day that went well with your students. Or perhaps turn to an inspirational read, such as Mark Nepo’s “The One Life We’re Given.”

But have faith that what you’d doing is meaningful. As cellist Yo-Yo Ma recently told the Washington Post, music is like touch, and during the pandemic, so much of our ability to touch other humans has been taken away from us. “You can’t touch, you can’t hug, you can’t shake hands,” he said.

“But what music does, its sound moves air molecules,” he continued. “So when air floats across your skin and touches the hairs of your skin, that’s touch. That’s the closest thing to someone actually touching you. … That’s what music can do.”

The SR-C20A sound bar mounted on living room wall.

How (and Where) To Mount a TV and Sound Bar

Written by Eric Thies on August 27, 2020. Posted in Audio How-to.

The television is the centerpiece of any home theater system. As a custom installer, it always amazes me how often a television or sound bar is mounted in the wrong place … sometimes even with the wrong bracket! But proper TV and sound bar placement will greatly enhance your home theater experience, so it behooves you to do it safely and correctly.

Here are some best practices that will allow you to get it right the first time.

TV Positioning

Obviously you want the TV to be placed directly across from your primary seating position, and not off to the left or the right … so get it right in the middle! If you mount the TV off to one side, it will be uncomfortable to view and can even result in neck strain if you do a lot of binge-watching.

Even when properly centered, TVs are often mounted too high. For aesthetic reasons, you may want that TV over your fireplace, but trust me, it is the absolute wrong place to mount it. For a comfortable viewing experience, you want your eyes (at a seated position) to be at the center of the TV.

This can be easily calculated, as follows:

When seated, an average person’s eyes are 42.5″ off the floor
The formula is: 42.5 – (TV height / 2) = Ideal height of the bottom of the TV

A typical 65″ flat panel TV is 33″ tall, so the bottom of this TV should ideally be 26″ (42.5 – 16.5) off the ground. However, in many installations this may be impractical due to the fact that there may be a piece of furniture underneath the TV. So what is your fudge factor? The sweet spot is the center, but you can go as low as the bottom 1/3rd line of the TV. In the case of a 65″ flat panel, this would mean that the bottom of the TV could start at 31.5″ off the floor. Since most furniture is 30″ high, you will have just enough room to squeeze that credenza under the TV.

Sound Bar Positioning

As TV bezels keep shrinking and shrinking, this leaves virtually no room for speakers. This means that any built-in speakers need to be small and/or project off the side or back of the TV, making for a tinny, poor-quality listening experience. So unless you are planning on using a separate discrete surround sound system, make sure you plan on adding a sound bar.

This too has to be factored in when doing your math. Not only does a sound bar need to be centered under your TV for optimum audio, but you need to consider its dimensions as well. As an example, the Yamaha YAS-109 is a nice sleek sound bar (complete with dual built-in subwoofers) that does not require a lot of space. If you are planning on placing a YAS-109 on a piece of furniture under the TV, you only need 2 1/8″ of height clearance. If you’ll be mounting it on the wall with spacers, you will need 5 1/8″ of clearance below your TV.

Long thin sound bar. — *Yamaha YAS-109.*

Wall-Mount or Tabletop?

These are the two most common options when it comes to placing a TV and sound bar. Which is better?

This is largely an aesthetic decision, but I have a couple of arguments for wall mounting. For one thing, it tends to be a safer installation. Large flat-screen TVs can be top-heavy and therefore fairly easy to knock off a stand. Wall mounting also gives you more flexibility in terms of mounting the TV exactly where it needs to be versus being stuck with the height of the furniture you sit it on.

This same debate can be extended to the sound bar. Here, though, it’s typically best to follow whatever you are doing with the TV, but consider the TV mounting method as well. (See “Wall Mount Options” below.) If you are using a flat or tilt bracket, you’ll be fine with mounting the sound bar on the wall directly below the TV. However, if you are using an articulating arm, you’ll instead want to attach the sound bar to the arm itself, so that the sound follows the angle in which you position the TV.

This also brings up the question of whether a sound bar works better above or below the TV. I suggest mounting it at the location that is closest to 42.5″ off the ground (again, where your ear falls at a seated position). This is typically below the TV in 95% of real-world installations.

Wall Mount Options

Flat mount. This is the right choice if you are able to mount the TV at the correct height and you don’t need to angle the TV to watch it from different positions, or a different room. There are ultra-thin models available, but bear in mind that if you need to mount anything behind the TV (such as a Firestick, Apple TV^® or HDMI^® balun), you’ll have zero room for these devices.
Tilt Mount. If you are forced to position the TV too high (i.e., above the center of your eyes when seated), this is probably your only mount option, since it allows you to tilt the TV downward.
Articulating Mount. This is a mount that allows you to pull the TV out from the wall and swivel it towards a secondary viewing area. Keep in mind that these mounts add significant depth and make the TV project off the wall quite a bit (sometimes up to 6″). The upside to an articulating mount is that it makes it very easy to service the TV and plug/unplug devices.
Recessed Mount. Some companies make a recessed articulating arm that allows you to completely recess the bracket into a flush mount enclosure in the wall. Installation of this kind of mount is not for novices since you need to perfectly place the recessed box within the wall and center to the room. This may require framing and drywall repair to get it just right, but the look is fabulous and it allows you to push the TV right into the wall with no gap.

Step-by-Step

Once you’ve worked out positioning and mount options, it’s time to roll up your sleeves and get to work. Here are step-by-step directions for mounting a TV and sound bar to a wall.

1. Mount the Plate. A TV bracket typically has two components: a plate that mounts to the back of the TV and a bracket that mounts to the wall. Begin by mounting the plate to your TV, then measure the distance between the connection points where the plate will hook onto or connect to the wall bracket.

2. Measure. Next, measure the height of the lower connection points to the bottom of the TV. This will tell you exactly where the wall bracket needs to be mounted in order to get the bottom of the TV in the correct place. (See “TV Positioning,” above.)

3. Find the Studs. Get out your handy-dandy stud finder and find the studs that line up with your wall bracket mounting holes. Make marks on the wall where you are going to connect the bracket with the supplied lag bolts. Never mount a TV to drywall only; for a safe installation, always find the studs (and use them!).

4. Check the Cables. Before drilling any holes, make sure that your electrical and audio/video cabling is in the right place in relation to the bracket. If you are mounting a sound bar on the wall under the TV, make sure that you have appropriate connecting cables in the wall from behind the TV to behind the sound bar so that you don’t see a cable between the two. Bear in mind that you will also need a power outlet behind that sound bar, or a power extender that allows you to plug the sound bar into the outlet behind the TV

5. Drill. Once you are certain that your cabling and power wires are aligned with your bracket, go ahead and drill some pilot holes into the wall to make the supplied lag bolts easier to install. Before actually installing the wall bracket, however, make sure it is level, as most wall brackets do not have those kinds of adjustments.

6. Lift. Get a couple of helpers to assist in lifting the TV so as to mount it on the wall bracket. Three is the ideal number, since two people can hold the TV up while the third can get behind it and make all of the video, audio and power connections before the TV is placed on the bracket.

7. Level. Make sure your sound bar wall mount is level to the TV, then mount it below the TV on the wall where your optical or HDMI cable is poking out. Most sound bars do not weigh very much, so using drywall anchors is usually safe. If you are using an articulating mount (see “Wall Mount Options” above), you’ll need to connect the sound bar to the articulating arm, below the TV. There are many products out there designed specifically for this purpose.

Learn more about Yamaha sound bars.

Learn more about the Yamaha YAS-109.

Here’s What You Need to Know About Celestes

Written by Troy C. Wollwage on August 26, 2020. Posted in Percussion.

Celestes are instruments with a bell-like tone and a trace of mystery about them. However, both a celeste (sometimes called a celesta) and keyboard glockenspiel use the same mechanism as any grand piano. This means that anyone who plays piano will be able to play either of these instruments too.

Whether you’re planning on purchasing a celeste for your school, performance hall, church or other institutional location, here are some key aspects to guide you through the decision-making process.

Know Your Needs

Every institution is different in terms of size and makeup, and each will have instrument needs that differ. These factors include model, size and how many instruments are required. For example, a piano teaching studio might be a small space that’s carpeted, cluttered with bookshelves, desks and chairs, while a university performance hall might seat hundreds or even thousands of concertgoers, and a church venue may be an irregularly-shaped room filled with pews and glass windows. Whatever the configuration, the celeste you choose will ultimately need to meet a wide variety of demands, so before making your purchase, ask yourself the following questions:

– Who will use the instrument? Beginners, advanced players, concert artists, international guests on tour?

– How often will the instrument be played? In the occasional concert, or for 18 hours per day of student practice?

– How will the instrument be used? Lessons for graduate students? Live performance? Church services? Recordings?

– Will the instrument stay in a fixed location or will it be moved often?

– In what size room will the instrument primarily be used? A concert performance hall with a seating capacity of 3,000 may need two celestes: one for rehearsal and one for performance.

Know the Instrument

Yes, it’s a percussion instrument with a keyboard and a unique reverberant sound quality. But here are seven things about the celeste you may not know:

1. Celeste Soundbar Basics

Celeste soundbars are lined up in rows, same as they are in a metallophone. However, a celeste produces a gentler sound than a metallophone, with more reverberation, for a clear and beautiful sound.

The shorter a soundbar, the higher its pitch. This means, as you go up in pitch, the soundbars become shorter. Depending on the particular model, Yamaha celestes have a range of 53 keys (40C to 92E) or 56 keys (40C to 95G).

Soundbar thickness also varies. The soundbars on a celeste are approximately 2 – 2.5 mm thick, compared to metallophone soundbars that are around 7.8 – 9 mm thick.

2. The Holes in the Soundbars Are There for a Reason

The holes in celeste soundbars are used to keep them in place. A hole is drilled at a particular position in each soundbar called the nodal point, where the minimum amount of fundamental and the maximum amount of harmonics is heard. (There are two nodes on every soundbar, one on each end.) The soundbar is then placed on top of a felt pad and screwed in place. However, if a bar is fixed too tightly, the sound will not reverberate.

3. Celestes Employ Some Unusual Materials

Celeste soundbars are made of high-carbon steel. The wooden parts of celeste hammers are made from birch, and the tips are made from felt. The surface of the felt hardens after some time due to striking the hard soundbars, which tends to deaden the sound. Just as with tuning a piano, the pins must be replaced, and the hammers sanded to bring the instrument back to its proper, springy feel.

Piano hammer shank (left) and celeste hammer shank (right). — *Piano (left) and celeste (right) hammer shank.*

4. Celeste Hammer Shanks Differ from Those in Grand Pianos

While the shanks of hammers in a grand piano are vertically thick and very hard, the shanks of celeste hammers are vertically thin, but horizontally thick — similar in shape to the soft mallets used for mallet keyboard instruments like vibraphone or marimba.

5. Celeste Pedaling Is Important Too

To maximize reverberation and bring out the metallic and gentle timbre of the celeste, a player needs to make skillful use of its damper and/or soft pedals, which are similar in functionality to those in pianos.

6. Celeste Maintenance Is Similar to That of a Piano

Just like a piano, any celeste will require periodic maintenance, though a new celeste out of the box should not need any preparation before it is used. A celeste should be tuned regularly and regulated as needed by a piano tuner. This is especially true if the instrument is moved a lot.

7. A Celeste Can Be Heard More Clearly from the Rear of the Room

A celeste is unique in its ability to be heard from far away. Interestingly, this phenomenon, coupled with the natural reverberation in a room, means that those sitting at the rear of a concert hall can hear the celeste better than those sitting in the front row.

Yamaha Celeste Structure and Key Features

Merely striking a soundbar does very little — the sound will be very quiet and won’t reverberate much if at all. That’s why celestes require wooden resonator boxes sitting above the soundbars. In most celestes, these boxes are graduated on four levels, with the bass range resonator boxes on the top level, the midrange resonator boxes on the lower right, and the treble resonator boxes in the center and lower left (looking from the rear). However, in Yamaha celestes, the resonance boxes are arranged in a single level, which allows for a more compact and lightweight body. Despite their compact size, the same resonant capacity is maintained, allowing the instrument to produce a rich sound.

In addition, the soundbars in Yamaha celestes are struck from below, not above, allowing for the use of a piano action mechanism. This enables the player to put feeling into their performance. Other celeste designs make it difficult to vary the intensity of one’s playing since those instruments don’t make any noise unless the keys are pressed strongly.

All Yamaha celeste models offer a uniform feel for free control of dynamics, along with a compact, lightweight design that is easy to transport. Here are some other key features of Yamaha celestes — all of which will be important to institutional buyers:

– Piano action with full-length keys

– Metal plates and resonator

– Piano-standard keyboard height and a narrow key slip

– Key surfaces of Ivorite and unstained ebony

– A music rest positioned to allow clear, line-of-sight visibility

– Double-wheel locking casters

– A protective cover

Because celestes last a very long time (well over 10 years), investing in the wrong model or brand can have lasting consequences. Therefore, it is important to carefully consider the current and future needs of your institution before making a purchase. Ensure that you budget sufficient funds for both the initial purchase and future maintenance. It is always wise to consult with all stakeholders at your institution. This includes anyone who has a fiduciary role, as well as those who have a say in how the instrument is used. If you take the time to do your homework, your students, faculty and audiences will appreciate the positive effects of your decision!

Click here for more information about Yamaha celestes.

When Do You Need to Go to a Luthier?

Written by Ken Dattmore on August 20, 2020. Posted in Acoustic Strings.

If you play and own an orchestral string instrument such as a violin, viola, cello or upright bass, you may find that the feel and sound can change on an almost day-to-day basis. Why should this be the case? The answer is that the spruce and maple woods in your instrument are hygroscopic materials, meaning that they absorb moisture from the atmosphere around them. We should never forget that the natural materials that make up a string instrument came from the living organisms that we humans call trees.

Those trees take nutrients from the soil, sunlight and water, and they breathe in carbon dioxide and expel oxygen — the opposite of what we do. One day a tree is felled and becomes the instrument you play … but rest assured that its life didn’t end when it was cut down, because a string instrument continues to live and react to its surroundings. And these changes mean you’ll need to have your instrument serviced regularly by a trained technician known as a luthier.

What Is a Luthier?

A luthier is a highly trained professional who specializes in the craftsmanship and maintenance of a string instrument. These folks spend years studying wood and instrument construction, and while your instrument may live up to your expectations, the luthier is constantly searching for ways to make it sound better and more comfortable for the player who uses it.

A luthier works on restoring an antique violin in a workshop.

How Often Do You Need to Visit a Luthier?

How often you need to bring your instrument to a luthier depends on many factors, including how often you play it and how drastic seasonal change is where you live. In general, it’s a good idea to have a luthier service your instrument at least once a year. Upon inspection, the luthier will look for the following:

– General condition and integrity of the instrument. Are there any open seams or wood cracks? These things are inevitable in the life of every string instrument and are not the fault of the player, but if they occur, an immediate service is necessary. Closing a seam is usually a simple matter where the luthier applies droplets of hide glue and clamps the seam overnight to ensure that it’s properly closed. Cracks, on the other hand, present more of an issue. Often the luthier will need to remove the full top of the instrument to install “cleats” inside to hold the sealed crack in place and complete the repair.

– Bridge inspection. Is the instrument’s bridge healthy and well-positioned without any warping? Are string clearances correct? If not, the bridge may require some adjustment or even replacing.

– Fingerboard inspection. Is the fingerboard smooth and well-shaped? Over long periods of time, the movement of hands and strings will lead to wearing that a luthier can remedy by reshaping and restoring the contour of the fingerboard. This will help with both intonation and position shifting, making the instrument more comfortable and responsive.

– Peg condition. Pegs are a moving component of the instrument, and over time and constant use, the peg holes can become oval-shaped from the tension of the strings. This can cause slipping or sticking, which will lead to intonation problems. The luthier will determine when they need to be redressed — a process where a reamer is used to restore the peg holes to a circular shape. A compound is then applied to the shafts of the pegs and they are reset into the peg box for a smooth and reliable tuning action.

– Strings. Strings are the source of the sounds you create and therefore the life of the instrument. They wear out far more often than most players notice. An average player should change strings about once a year. If you’re an advanced player, you’ll need to change them even more often to ensure they keep providing the proper sound that the instrument was built to create. A luthier will help you decide how often to change strings based on your style of playing.

Instrument maker repairing old violin in studio.

– Sound post inspection. Inside of your instrument is a spruce dowel called a sound post. The Spanish name for this piece is “alma,” which translates in English to “soul” … and it very much is just that. The sound post helps to transmit the vibration of the string across the top and back of the instrument. Its positioning in relation to the bridge is crucial and the luthier will check to make sure that it is well shaped to the inside top and back and in the correct spot inside of the instrument.

A string instrument is a beautiful work of art crafted from natural wood materials, but it is also a complex machine that requires care and maintenance over its lifetime. A skilled luthier can keep these instruments healthy and sounding great, and in the right hands, they can last a lifetime … or even centuries!

Check out these related blog articles:

Winter Weather Care for Woodwind and String Instruments

Five Things You May Not Know About String Instruments

What’s That Weird Sound?

Click here for more information about Yamaha string instruments.

Introducing the SR-C20A Compact Sound Bar

Written by Ted Goslin on August 19, 2020. Posted in Audio Gear Guides.

Have you ever turned on your television and wished that the exciting onscreen action was matched by equally explosive sound? With the thickness of TVs dwindling with every new generation, that leaves precious little room for built-in speakers — and the ones being used are getting smaller and smaller, with tinnier and tinnier sound. One possible solution is to add a separate audio system, but the problem is that some of those systems require more space than many people have in their homes, with a litany of speakers taking up space both in front of and behind you.

Add a sound bar, however, and you no longer need a lot of space for great audio. But with so many options on the market, paired with whatever limitations you might have in your home, finding the right one can be a daunting task.

Enter the SR-C20A. It’s the first compact sound bar from Yamaha, designed to fit any space without sacrificing sound or specs, with a focus on audio quality and connectivity. Let’s take a closer look at its features and capabilities.

Room-Filling Sound

Small remote control. — *SR-C20A remote.*

The SR-C20A comes with a built-in subwoofer and dual passive radiators. A passive radiator increases the low frequency response (that is, the bass) of a speaker system substantially. This is a rare combination in compact sound bars and enables the system to reproduce the rumble of your favorite action scenes, as well as the bass in music tracks. Looking for even more low end? Just press the BASS EXT (Bass Extension) button on the remote control.

There are also four sound modes that allow you to customize your audio experience even further: Stereo, Standard, Movie and Game. Each highlights different audio attributes, depending on what you’re listening to. With Game mode, for example, you can hear and feel the full range of sound, from the powerful blast of an explosion to the quiet footsteps of an enemy sneaking up from behind.

But that’s not all! When placed directly under a TV screen, the SR-C20A creates a virtual sound field using Dolby^® Audio virtual surround sound technology to reproduce left, center, right and rear sound effects. This lets you hear the kind of subtle audio detail you’d normally only experience in a movie theater.

Another way the SR-C20A delivers detail is with its implementation of Yamaha Clear Voice technology, which provides enhanced dialogue clarity. This is especially useful during action-heavy scenes or critical moments that involve a wide range of sounds, so you never have to raise the volume to hear a pivotal plot twist.

Versatility Plus

Thanks to its compact size (just 23 inches long and 2.5 inches high), the SR-C20A can easily fit in tight spaces like gamer stations, bedrooms, offices, playrooms and dorms. It can also discreetly sit in front of any screen or a computer monitor without obstructing the action.

Mounting an SR-C20A on a wall is easy, too, thanks to the two keyholes on the rear of the sound bar. This can free up space on an entertainment cabinet and can simplify the number of cables behind the cabinet by allowing you to run an HDMI^® cable in the wall.

Speaking of HDMI, the SR-C20A also includes an ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, which allows both audio and video to be sent over a single HDMI cable. In addition, the SR-C20A provides optical and aux options for connections to multiple sources, all accessible via the remote control, which can also be used to power your TV on or off, adjust volume, and more.

There’s Bluetooth^® too, for streaming audio such as music and podcasts — just pair the SR-C20A with any Bluetooth-compatible device. (You can even connect and switch between two different devices!)

Looking for even more wireless functionality to further simplify the user experience? Check out the SR-C20A’s dedicated Sound Bar Remote app. Not only can it turn the sound bar on or off from your smartphone or tablet, it can switch content and change sound modes, as well as activate Clear Voice and Bass Extension functions.

Screen shot Sound Bar Remote app. — *Sound Bar Remote app.*

With so many features packed into this compact sound bar, your choice may be a simple one. But don’t take our word for it — check out the SR-C20A for yourself!

Related blog articles:

How to Hide the Wires in Your Home Theater

How to Get Great Sound When Watching Sports on TV

How to Use Alexa with a Yamaha Sound Bar

How to Connect Nintendo Switch to Your TV, Sound Bar or AV Receiver

Click here to learn more about the SR-C20A sound bar.

Click here for information about the SR-B20A sound bar — a larger alternative with two subwoofers and added features.

A Strong Foundation, A Lifetime of Good Habits

Written by Yamaha Corporation of America on August 18, 2020. Posted in Artists, Winds Artists.

Music can be one of the most powerful ways of bringing people together. For many musicians, this realization often comes with their experiences in school band. Here’s how Grammy^®-nominated producer, singer, composer and woodwind player extraordinaire Scott Mayo got his start, and how the lessons he learned in his early days not only helped shape his career, but led to an unshakeable belief in the power of music.

Early Days

“I started when I was eight years old,” recalls Mayo, who’s worked with legendary artists such as Earth Wind & Fire, Mick Jagger, Stevie Wonder, Sergio Mendes, Luther Vandross, Cee-Lo Green, Ice Cube, Michael Bolton and Jennifer Hudson, as well as playing with the American Idol™ house band.

“Every morning they would start school with announcements,” he continues, “and one day they said, ‘If you’re in fourth grade and up, you can try out for band — just come to the band room after class.’ Right away, I was like, ‘Oh, I want to do that,’ even though I don’t really know why there was an ‘Oh, I want to do that’ in me! There was this sort of call on my life to become a musician.”

Deciding on the Right Instrument

Scott returned home and excitedly told his mother the news. Her response was to ask him what instrument he wanted to play. “I said, ‘I want to play drums.’ She said, ‘Too loud. Pick something else.’” His second and third choices — trumpet and guitar — were met with the same reaction. With a laugh, he remembers his mother saying, “Why do you keep picking the loud instruments?”

The alternative she suggested — clarinet — was based on practicality: Both of Scott’s brothers had played the instrument, and there was already a clarinet in the house. “I would come home from school and I would put my clarinet together and play along as best I could with the commercials or the cartoons I was watching,” he says. “That was sort of the thing that just amused me.” A few years later, Mayo added saxophone and flute to his repertoire (“I just loved playing instruments”), and there was no looking back.

“It’s funny,” Mayo says today with a sense of irony, “because all of the instruments that my mother rejected are actually my favorite instruments. I love drums, I love guitar and I love trumpet.”

High School Influences

By the time he got to high school, Scott was playing in wind ensemble, concert band, jazz ensemble and marching band … along with being a varsity athlete. “It really was challenging and some things suffered at times,” he recalls. “I just found a way I could stay up late practicing my instrument. I needed to dedicate the time because I had a really demanding high school teacher who saw the seeds of me becoming a professional. There was a point where I had to make a decision as to what I was going to do. And I did make that decision [to devote myself to music instead of athletics], and happily.”

Scott Mayo, age 12.

Scott in marching band.

“I had really wonderful friends that were supportive and encouraging,” he says. “There was one flute player in my high school that was particularly good. She was a really advanced flute player and she would help me because she was better than I was. We would play duets together; quite often we had saxophone quartets and quintets. Somebody would bring in some music and we would sight read it and play it together and then we’d switch instruments and play somebody else’s part. It was a really life-changing experience to have a community of musicians where I felt safe to not be so good all the time.”

Support from Family Too

When Mayo made the decision to take up saxophone, he remembers his father going out and getting him a sax “like the next day.” A couple of years later, Scott wanted to learn to play flute too. Again, he recalls, his father’s reaction was “‘Okay, no problem.’ He just went out and bought me a flute.”

But there was a string attached — a very good one. “When I was 13 years old, [my father] said, ‘So, you’re serious about this music thing?’ I said, ‘Yes sir, I am.’ He said, ‘All right. It’s time to listen to some real music,’ and he played [me some] Miles Davis. I said, ‘What is this?’ and he said, ‘It’s jazz. It’s real music.’”

“He also started taking me to these jam sessions on Sunday nights [even though I was] way too young to be able to get in — he’d tell them, ‘This is my son. He’s a saxophone player.’ I would always take my horn [even though] I knew nothing about jazz, especially improvisation. I would keep my horn in its case and just listen to these incredible musicians, many of whom were famous [even though] I didn’t know it at the time. Eventually I would learn melodies. I learned this one Charlie Parker [tune] — just the melody; I couldn’t play the solo. I went there one week and asked the musicians if I could play it. They were like, ‘Yeah!’ I played the melody and they acted like it was the best thing that ever happened to them in their entire life.”

Lessons Learned

“I’m grateful for my high school experience because it literally prepared me for what I’m doing right now,” says Mayo. “A lot of the habits that I have as an adult started in high school band. [For example], I couldn’t show up late for rehearsal; that was unacceptable. So consequently I learned that you don’t show up late for a session, or a gig.”

Scott Mayo playing the flute. — *Scott Mayo today.*

Those experiences also helped shape a life-affirming philosophy about the power of music. “Playing in band taught me that you have to find a way to work with people that are different, whether you like them or don’t like them,” he reflects. “You have a piece of music in front of you and you have to find a way to make it sound good. At that point the differences disappear. [If we] can nurture more young musicians then perhaps we can see the world changed because then we can start to show people how well we work together in spite of our differences, that we can create beautiful melodies and harmony and make people cry together because we work together.”

“That is the bottom line,” he says. “No matter what the differences are, make beautiful music.”

For more information, visit scottmayomusic.com

Check out these related blog posts:

Larry Mullen Jr. reflects on the beginnings of U2

Butch Walker talks about practicing through the roadblocks

Jackie Miclau looks at the ways music brings people together

Handwritten note by John Chowining on Yamaha MODX.

Discovering Digital FM: John Chowning Remembers

Written by Jerry Kovarsky on August 17, 2020. Posted in Synthesizers. 4 Comments on Discovering Digital FM: John Chowning Remembers

There have been only a few major turning points in the history of synthesis. After the seminal work of Bob Moog and his analog modular designs in the 1960s, it can be argued that instrument development travelled a mostly incremental path for more than two decades. New features were continually being added, but for the most part the synthesizers of the era continued to utilize subtractive analog technology. All that changed with the release of the Yamaha DX7 in 1983 — truly a watershed moment.

Almost everything about the DX7 was new. It sported green, orange and pink membrane switches and provided a tiny LED screen for editing, along with what looked like a series of hieroglyphics along the top of its front panel — things labeled “algorithms.” Its 61-key keyboard was both velocity- and touch-sensitive (radical for the times) and offered 16-note polyphony (even more radical for the times). But most importantly, it sounded like no other synthesizer anyone had heard before.

That’s because it used a completely new type of synthesis technology, called digital FM (short for “Frequency Modulation”) — courtesy of an adventurous professor at Stanford University in California and a team of forward-thinking engineers at Yamaha Corporation in Hamamatsu, Japan.

The story behind the development of digital FM is fascinating, and it starts with a most unlikely source: an experimental music composer who was neither an engineer, mathematician or computer programmer. Instead, he was an artist who was chasing his muse when he stumbled across a sonic phenomenon that forever changed synthesis.

His name? Dr. John Chowning.

From Percussion to Synthesis

Chowning is a percussionist who graduated from Ohio’s Wittenberg University in 1959, and then went to Paris for two years to study with the famed composer Nadia Boulanger. It was during his time in Paris that he was first exposed to experimental music, including early works using electronics to create what was called “music for loudspeakers.” Inspired by those influences, he returned to the U.S. and received his Doctorate in 1966 from Stanford University.

Stanford University has long been a fertile place of research in all of the sciences, but it was Chowning who initiated their forays into the fledgling use of computers to make music, although his primary interest at the time was in sound spatialization: the ability to move a sound source in a three-dimensional field, and the way the human ear distinguishes those movements.

But after reading a seminal article written by computer synthesis pioneer Max Mathews, Chowning took a course in computer programming and then made a trip to visit Mathews at Bell Labs in New Jersey. “Max made a statement in his article that really grabbed my attention,” Chowning recalls. “He wrote: ‘There are no theoretical limitations to the performance of the computer as a source of musical sounds, in contrast to the performance of ordinary instruments. At present, the range of computer music is limited principally by cost and by our knowledge of psychoacoustics. These limits are rapidly receding.’”

Chowning returned to California with a box of punch cards Mathews had given him, containing instructions for a synthesis computer program called MUSIC IV. He found a place to play them at Stanford’s newly established Artificial Intelligence laboratory, where researchers gathered to see what they could get computers to do.

A Discovery of the Ear

The convergence of Chowning’s interest in spatialization and Mathew’s search for new sounds led to a focus on one particular sonic aspect: Vibrato.

“I was searching for sounds that had some internal dynamism,” Chowning explains, “because for localization one has to have sounds that are dynamic in order to perceive their distance. The direct signal and the reverberant signal have to have some phase differences in order for us to perceive that there are in fact two different signals. Vibrato is one of the ways that one can do that.”

One evening in the autumn of 1967, Chowning was using the mainframe computer in the Stanford AI laboratory to model the sound of two sine wave oscillators in a simple modulation configuration, one altering the pitch of the other to produce vibrato. Curious as to what would occur if he increased the rate and/or depth beyond what was possible with the human touch on an acoustic instrument, he issued instructions to the computer to try some basic multiples, doubling and tripling some of the numbers. And that’s when a curious thing happened: At the point when the rate of the vibrato increased to where it could no longer be perceived as a cyclical change, the sound changed from simple pitch fluctuation into a timbral change — a change in tonality. What’s more, as the rate and depth increased further, he heard more and more timbral complexity. This was indeed the birth of digital FM.

As Chowning is fond of pointing out these days, this was a discovery of the ear, not the work of testing math equations or applying scientific principles. It was only after hearing this phenomenon that he took his experiments to an undergraduate math student to try to better understand what was going on. They researched the existing FM science as it related to radio transmission, where the rates are in Megahertz (millions of cycles per second), and found that the equations verified what he had discovered even when using rates in the audible ranges of hundreds or thousands of cycles per second. This was pivotal, because it proved that Chowning’s “ear discovery” was not just subjective — it was supported by objective science.

Over the next few years, Chowning continued to explore this technique, codifying how various frequency relationships and depths of modulation between two oscillators would result in specific timbral characteristics. Using the FM technique, he modeled brass tones, woodwinds, percussive objects and much more, developing a massive library of information.

The Search for a Development Partner Begins

Stanford University, to whom Chowning had assigned his patents, began looking for companies to license this fledgling technology in the early 1970s. At the time, organ manufacturers seemed the most likely partner, but since none of the U.S.-based ones were skilled in digital technology — at least not yet— they all passed on it.

Widening their search, it was brought to their attention that while Yamaha was best-known in America for their pianos, the company had a long heritage as a builder of organs, and were, in fact, the largest manufacturer of musical instruments in the world. So Stanford reached out to Yamaha, who sent a young engineer named Kazukiyo Ishimura to meet with Chowning. “I gave [him] some examples and showed some code — with a brief explanation — and in ten or so minutes he understood exactly what I was doing,” recalls Chowning.

The decision by Yamaha to license Chowning’s invention was not an easy one, given that the company was going to have to invest huge amounts of money in order to develop the large-scale chips needed to move the technology from a mainframe computer to a portable keyboard. But then-president Genichi Kawakami was firmly behind the idea, saying, “If we can make the best musical instruments in the world, then no matter how difficult it is, no matter how much money it costs, we’ll do it.”

And so the future of synthesis was forever altered, from the subtractive analog systems then widely in use to the all-digital ones employed by today’s synths.

Commercial Development Begins

For more than ten years, a large team of Yamaha engineers further researched and developed the technology. Chowning would visit with them many times, sharing his accumulated knowledge and helping to debug systems and develop sounds. He was, however, limited to working with breadboard designs hooked up to a computer, and was not involved in the specific design or interface of any given model. He often tells the story of how the first time he saw a DX7 was at a restaurant when the keyboard player called him over to see a new instrument he had acquired, sitting on top of his piano. Chowning didn’t know the model, but he knew the sound he heard coming from it: his FM discovery.

Yamaha had actually developed a number of prototype instruments as they refined FM technology. The first one to be commercially released (in 1981, seven years after they obtained the license from Stanford) was an Electone organ called the F70. This was followed quickly by the GS1, a large performance keyboard using dual 4-operator FM.

John Chowning working with the GS-1 external programmer. — *John Chowning working with the GS1 external programmer.*

The sounds of the GS1 were preset, but the user could load new sounds in via magnetic foil strips (!). A slightly scaled-down model, the GS2, was also introduced in an effort to provide better portability. However, these early models were quite expensive, and so they were adopted mostly by top professional players and recording studios.

*The introductory ad for the GS1 and GS2 (and FM synthesis!).*

In 1982, Yamaha released the smaller and more affordable CE20, still a preset synth. Surprisingly for the times, all these keyboards were velocity-sensitive, and the CE20 added some simple controls for sound manipulation, although those edits could not be saved. But the stage was set for what would prove to be the most popular synthesizer of all time: the DX7.

A New Standard Arrives

Despite its cryptic name and oddly colored membrane switches, despite its tiny editing screen and the hieroglyphics that adorned its front panel — indeed, despite the fact that it used terminology and concepts completely unfamiliar to even the most sophisticated synth gurus — the DX7 was an instant success. More importantly, its distinctive complex transients and clangorous tonalities would directly influence the sound of the music of the 1980s and beyond — all the way to the present day, in fact.

But there were a lot of things that had to be perfected to get to that point. As Chowning is quick to point out, many of those developments were the work of the Yamaha engineers. “The DX7 used my underlying principles and research, and I certainly worked with their engineers over the years,” he says, “but they put in over seven years, and the work of nearly a hundred engineers to produce the instrument.”

One of the major innovations that Yamaha contributed was the concept of feedback, where the output of an oscillator (called an “operator” in the jargon of digital FM) is routed back into its input (or the input of another operator modulating it) to produce additional, and different, sideband frequencies. Feedback created more harmonic complexity, without having to add more operators. “It was a simple but very effective way to get what [the Yamaha engineers] felt was missing from FM, which was an ‘edge’ to cut through,” says Chowning. As with analog synthesizers, subtle oscillator detuning could be used to produce warmth and give the sound extra body.

The design of the original 32 algorithms, which are configurations of operators in various modulator / carrier relationships (“modulator” operators, as their name implies, alter the signal being generated by “carrier” operators), was also very much Yamaha’s work, extending the simpler structures Chowning had experimented with. Ditto for the addition of velocity control over the sound being produced — one of the most important expressive aspects of the DX7 that Chowning felt made the product successful.

Perhaps most importantly, Yamaha decided to give the user the ability to program their own digital FM sounds (as opposed to simply providing presets), even though it was a huge undertaking, and a much-contested decision within the organization. Because of the advent of MIDI at around the same time as the release of the DX7, the instrument was also one of the first to provide support and documentation for MIDI System Exclusive messages, which allowed the development and use of computer-based sound editors. This was huge, because it allowed musicians and sound designers to more easily create and sell alternate sounds for the DX7 — something that had never been possible before with other synthesizers.

Digital FM Today

The success of the DX7 spawned many subsequent digital FM synthesizers. Some of them incorporated only incremental changes (such as rack-mounting or availability on a computer card), while others represented large leaps forward, such as the implementation of advanced 8-operator FM-X technology in today’s Yamaha MONTAGE and MODX synthesizers.

A view of the Yamaha MONTAGE synthesizer from above. — *Yamaha MONTAGE.*

Nearly forty years after its first commercial introduction, digital FM is thriving, and Dr. Chowning looks on with pride and admiration at the work that Yamaha has done to bring his discovery to fruition and advance it. “What they have done with FM-X in the MONTAGE is just astonishing to me,” he says. “It’s moved so far beyond my original work for sure.” Every synthesist in the world — indeed, every musician who’s ever incorporated synthesizers into their music — owes John Chowning a debt of gratitude. His life’s work has quite literally changed the world.

*John Chowning and the Yamaha synth team at NAMM 2019. From left to right: Blake Angelos, Phil Clendeninn, John Chowning, Maureen Chowning, Don Lewis, Nate Tschetter.*

Check out these related articles on yamahasynth.com:

Behind the Synth: John Chowning Conversation

Holly Herndon Interviews Yamaha Legend Dr. John Chowning

Winter NAMM 2019: Interview with Don Lewis and Dr. John Chowning

Intro to FM Synthesis

Exploring the DX7

Yamaha DX7 – The Synthesizer that Defined the 80s

Dave Bristow on the First DX7 Presets

MONTAGE Article Roundup

Manny’s FM-Xplorations (Programming FM-X on the MONTAGE)

Click here to view the NAMM oral interview with John Chowning.

Click here for more information about Yamaha MONTAGE.

Click here for more information about Yamaha MODX.

Lab Controllers Offer Flexibility and Convenience

Written by Lori Frazer on August 14, 2020. Posted in Teaching Tips.

Music students work well in groups — they encourage each other, learn from each other and play in ensembles.

However, teaching group piano/keyboard lessons can present several challenges. When an entire class plays together, it can be very loud, which is distracting for both teacher and students. Communicating effectively with students can also be challenging because students are unable to hear instructions. Even though students in a class typically start at the same level, they move at different paces, so teaching one lesson that works for the entire class can be difficult.

Using a lab controller can help deal with these issues.

What is a Lab Controller?

Lab controllers are a network of headsets and microphones that allow teachers and students to communicate musically, as well as in conversation. A lab controller can be used as though each student is isolated in his or her own practice room or, with the touch of a button, playing together as a group. The control unit and app are very flexible and provide instructors with many different and exciting ways to teach and keep students engaged while learning.

Lab controllers, such as the Yamaha MLC200, can connect digital pianos, as well as hybrid pianos, portable keyboards and digital drums. In theory, if an instrument has a headphone jack, it can be connected to a lab controller.

Using a lab controller can allow other classrooms to be situated nearby with no sound interference coming from the music room. Lab controllers can be used in small or large classrooms. The basic lab controller package has equipment for eight students and one teacher instrument to be connected. With the digital MLC200, additional students can be added one at a time, up to a maximum of 96 students — but students would be better served in smaller classes like two 48-person or three 32-person labs.

Additional components such as computers and devices can be integrated into the lab system that allow students to hear other types of lessons through their headsets. This can be helpful when an instructor wants to show students YouTube or other video clips, or have the class participate in listening activities.

Lab controllers allow teachers to work one-on-one with students, pair students to work together or create customized groups for learning and ensemble play. Students can practice with students at their same level, or more advanced students can mentor other students. Instructors can also use music from their audio library for educational listening and play-along activities.

One-on-One Instruction

In many schools, students at different levels are in the same piano class. Trying to reach the needs of each student can be difficult without the use of the lab controller, which has a one-on-one feature that allows individual instruction within a class.

In one-on-one mode, the student and teacher can only hear each other’s voice and instrument. Instructors can demonstrate concepts, work out problem areas and play accompaniments with the student.

This one-on-one ability is also ideal for exams and quizzes. If instructors want to see the student’s hands, they can use the wireless headphones, which are included with the MLC200, and freely move around the classroom and not be tethered to their instrument. Each student station has a lab controller box with a “call” button, which allows students to get the instructor’s attention at any time during class.

Grouping Feature

With a lab controller, instructors can also communicate with more than one student at a time. Instructors find it convenient to speak to and work with students who are at the same level even if they are not seated together. This is a great way to have students learn a new piece of music together with one student playing the right hand while the other plays the left. After they accomplish their parts, have them switch. This is a excellent way for students to learn the music, as many students do not have instruments at home to practice on. This is also an excellent configuration for playing duets.

On the MLC200, instructors simply press “grouping” and select which students they want to group together. The different student groupings will be saved in the app for later use.

The grouping feature is an ideal way for students to work together. Students can speak to each other and hear each other’s instruments. They can be seated in different places in the classroom and easily work together.

Playing ensemble-style is a wonderful way to help students work with timing and dynamics while listening to others. They can learn musicianship by selecting complementary sounds on their instruments and blending with each other. Encouraging students to try different sounds each time they play the song will motivate them to want to play the music again and again.

Other Features

There are commercially prepared multiple-part ensembles available for piano/keyboard that are great motivators as well. When students play together, they become better sight readers as they learn to move forward in the music even if they make mistakes. Many of the commercially prepared ensembles have background tracks for students to play along with. These background tracks can be played from the lab controller app so students hear them through their headphones. This is another way to get students to count and play dynamically.

Use digital drums with a lab controller to help beginning drummers create a steady beat. Playing along with background tracks will also help percussionists build coordination and confidence.

Classroom Management

For daily classroom housekeeping, the lab controller app can be used to take attendance manually or by having students press the “call” button to check in when they arrive. These attendance sheets can be exported into other formats for later reference.

Classroom templates can be set up in the app, including student names and photos, for easy name recall at the beginning of the term. If students sit in different places, it’s easy to move the student icons to match the class layout in the app. Notes from each class can also be taken to help the instructor keep track of class activities.

Instructors can also mute all student instruments and communication to make important announcements.

With a lab controller, classroom management is much easier. From attendance and note-taking to sound management and student engagement, a lab controller offers convenience and flexibility so instructors can focus on their main objective — helping their students become better musicians.

Resources

For more information, visit these sites:

Yamaha MLC200 lab controller information and videos
“Using the Yamaha MLC-200 Lab Controller in the Classroom” blog post
Yamaha LC4 lab controller (an analog lab controller)

Here are some commercially prepared keyboard ensembles lesson plans:

6 Keys to Creating a Game Plan for Your Ensemble

Written by Paul Winterhalter on August 14, 2020. Posted in Teaching Tips.

I approach teaching like a coach would their sports team. As music educators, we must always remind ourselves that music is an activity — it is an ACTIVE pastime for students.

It’s our job to make sure we inspire and equip our students with the right tools to learn and succeed. How do we do this? By having a game plan.

In this article, I will dive into some tactical approaches to creating a positive and healthy game plan, one that will make your ensemble competition ready. I will also highlight some key factors that may help you lead a successful percussion program for whatever your goals may be.

1. Student-Led Activity

What does this concept mean? I suggest that you set up a culture where your students feel in control of their destiny with direction from you. Simply put, your students must believe that they have control, but in reality, you are steering them toward success. You set the pace, and your students fall in line.

Students must see that their actions have a direct correlation to their learning, and that the time they put in contributes to the outcome of their season. When your students self-assess and inspire each other, your percussion ensemble will be a well-oiled machine. I will refer to this well-oiled machine interchangeably as your “system” or “program.”

On paper, it may sound simple to have a student-led ensemble. However, getting to this point is not easy. Creating and successfully implementing your own system will take patience, understanding and a whole lot of time.

The first and most important step in creating your system is communication. For students to thrive and buy-in to this concept, they must be empowered through responsibility, accountability and a culture in which they feel they can communicate openly.

Enable your students to control the ensemble by holding them accountable. The way you start to hold them accountable is to have open and clear expectations and guidelines for how you run your program. Below are some ideas to pave the way to a student-led program:

Set the etiquette for how you rehearse and be consistent. When you have consistency, you subconsciously train your students that “this is how we get things done.” You’ll be amazed by the results, especially when you show them their growth by working within the etiquette.
Set small, achievable goals. Setting bite-sized goals allow for small victories. Pinpointing these wins and using these moments as steppingstones to larger goals give students confidence, which leads to buy-in to what you are teaching.
Teach students that on time is late, 10 minutes early is on time. This lesson is important because so many things will fix themselves if you and your students show up on time. Stress this advice from Zen Buddhism: “How you do anything, is how you do everything.”
Be 90% positive and 10% critical. Students are far more critical of themselves than you think. Harping on the negative and breaking them down does more damage than you know. Find a positive way to encourage the change you wish to see.
Never show your frustration. Your students look to you as the example. Be a positive role model and remember that you are the adult. Your system is only as strong as its leader, and you need to think clearly about how you react in every situation.

2. Use Technology to Your Advantage

Most students are tech savvy, so instead of dissuading the use of smart phones and tablets, encourage and implement technology in your teaching. There are some great online resources available for free, which could enable a whole new level of self-learning and self-inspiration for students.

For example, there are many online resources for percussion-specific content, such as:

Percussive Arts Society
The Grid Book Series
Flo Marching offers a unique behind-the-scenes look at top programs around the country
Vic Firth Learn the Music
Vic Firth / Zildjian Education

Another aspect of utilizing technology are the self-assessment and self-learning tools that students can use. Playback apps or accessories like the Yamaha Electronic Acoustic Drums 10 (EAD10) and Yamaha Rec’n’Share are invaluable because they offer the ability to play along to tracks and slow or speed up the tempo.

Playing along to a metronome is certainly important for all percussion students, but this method can become tiresome. A fun and interactive approach to playing at specific tempos is with Jog FM, which lets you search songs by BPM and curate playlists for specific tempos.

3. Educator as Coach

As music educators, we should really think of ourselves as coaches. Our job is to inspire student success through encouragement, and teaching accountability is a huge element to any system of success. Think about how a golf coach teaches a student about a proper swing. The coach would never begin with what the student did wrong. Instead, the coach asks things like: “What did you feel in that last shot?” or “Did you notice your head pull up on that drive?”

The instruction is driven more by students answering questions like these and exploring their own thoughts. It is less about the coach harping on how the ball was hit into the street. We all know that the ball was hit poorly, there’s no reason to make it worse by dwelling on it. A part of the accountability is setting up the expectation and letting students know what is acceptable and what is not.

Any great basketball coach will tell you that good shooters keep shooting. Even when they are in a slump, good shooters will always take the shot. In the same vein, good drummers keep drumming! As a music educator and coach, you need to create excitement with your students and ensembles. Inspire them by introducing them to new concepts and allowing them to play with better players. Your students will never want to put their sticks down! This will create leaders within the ensemble, and your student leaders will hold their fellow “teammates” accountable.

Whether you are the sole instructor for a single school or in charge of an entire district, these elements still hold true. Strive to inspire the students to want to learn, and they will take their own playing to the next level.

4. Create Consistency

I went to high school with two men who were drafted into the NFL. I asked them, “What sets professionals apart from beginners?” Their answer might surprise you, but it boiled down to having a consistent schedule. Some of the best athletes I know — marathon runners, weightlifters, football players, world champion percussionists — have a consistent schedule and live by it. Consistency provides athletes and students something they can depend on. Without sticking to a schedule, my friends probably would not have made it to the NFL.

As the leader of your music program, you can create this consistency and set up your students for success. Have the band’s day-to-day schedule of rehearsals planned out at least a month in advance. Here is an over-simplified example of a weekly, after-school schedule:

Monday: music, 2-5 p.m.
Wednesday: learn drill, 2-5 p.m.
Friday: play and move / ensemble the last hour, 6-9 p.m.

Notice that the WHAT-you-work-on part of the schedule will change as your season progresses. This is another aspect of the schedule that you as the leader need to manage. Prioritization of rehearsal is a skill all on its own — here are some tactics you can use:

Allow sub-sections time to play together.
Break down music into chunks and create exercises that you play religiously.
Create a warmup package that is exciting and consistent. You will play it all season, so you should enjoy listening to it!
Prioritize rehearsal time with the entire ensemble. Without a cohesive ensemble, sub sectional time means nothing.

On a macro level, just rehearsing on the same days of the week puts consistency in your students’ schedules and lives. This, of course, is dependent on scheduling gym time in collaboration with other coaches and sometimes school administrators.

Here are a few articles about schedules and teamwork that are on the Yamaha Music Educator Suite:

5. Future Proofing for Success

We’ve all been in situations where we have been asked to do something, only to be told to stop and do something totally different. It’s frustrating, right? If we ask our students to play a piece to the best of their ability, we serve them best by allowing them to play the piece in the same way, repeatedly, over a long period of time. A change throws a wrench in that process.

If students were allowed to perform the same piece of music from January to April, they would have a very good chance of perfecting the piece 10 times out of 10. What would happen if the music was changed in March and students only had two months to master it instead of four? The odds of having success in the piece go down. Now, imagine if the music was changed a week before the final show. The odds of perfecting the piece would be dramatically less.

Designers, directors and creatives are often inclined to take on a bit more than their ensemble can handle. This is OK. You want to push your students and move them outside of their comfort zones. But you must realize that this comes at a price. Not only are students taking on different musical pieces, but they will ultimately have to perform them in front of an audience. The pressures of playing to a live audience must be considered when selecting the difficulty of a piece. You must always think of the ensemble’s needs first before jumping into something that could be detrimental to the well-being of your students.

Some music educators write for and teach the group. Others just write the music. But there is a baseline that everyone should agree on — the musical intent must be clear immediately. The demand or “beef” of the music can be enhanced later.

Those who write and teach should think about other ways of creating demand. Difficulty and demand can be found in the simplest of forms.

For example, take these rhythms:

Most percussion students could play these rhythms. But for argument’s sake, can you find the technical demand? Consider the sticking of the last two groupings — are your students producing a true rhythm? Or does it sound choppy? Are they stopping the stick after the accent to play the tap notes softer? If the drums will also be marching, you need to figure out where they are geographically on the performance floor. This additional factor will create yet another level of demand to consider.

As educators, you must find the teachable moments and show that demand comes in more ways than one. Musicality presents a litany of demands that students will begin to see. Don’t forget dynamics! Adding nuance to your writing will create a maturity to your ensemble’s performance without them even knowing it.

6. Invest in You

Time and energy can quickly become the two largest dividends music educators pay into their ensembles. This becomes especially apparent when you realize that music is often an after-school activity in many school districts. After a normal school day, teachers spend more time to further their students’ success — and this is no small thing. If you are leading one of these after-school programs, you must recognize this commitment and give yourself time to recover mentally and physically.

Check out these blog posts about self-care and healthy mental health strategies:

The Power of a Stress-Relieving Routine
Positive Mental Health Strategies
Avoid Burnout
9 Strategies to Combat Burnout

If you feel overwhelmed, assess your schedule and reprioritize your day-to-day tasks so you can focus on your most important to-do’s. In my experience, educators tend to focus on the objectives they didn’t get to, instead of all the tasks they accomplished. Be sure to acknowledge all the great lessons that you did get to, and give yourself credit.

There are numerous resources to help you effectively schedule and prioritize your time and manage your day-to-day tasks and goals. Doing so might also help arrange goals and boost your effectiveness when you get back to teaching your students.

Here are that I have used:

What’s All the Buzz About Mindfulness: Being mindful can create clarity and help you maintain focus on the big picture. The daily grind of teaching can take a toll, so it’s important to remove yourself from the grind from time to time and stay true to your goals.
Dropbox / Google Drive: These simple tools can help disseminate music to your students or even act as a digital warehouse to organize your music, clean up your desktop and help you with de-cluttering.
Passion Planner: This planner is a great way to get your thoughts and ideas on paper. The website also has a curated blog with great articles for everything from goal setting to creating better habits.
Mile IQ: This one is a bit out of scope for this list, but it’s helpful for educators who are contract workers, which many creatives and writers tend to be. This site helps you tracking mileage to gigs and offers help with certain tax situations.

Financial investments are another element music educators and instructors must consider. Investing in proper instruments will lead to future success of any program, but funding is finite or simply non-existent in many schools.

Here are some funding articles that you might find helpful:

I hope you enjoyed this article. If you have any additional ideas about teaching percussion, please email educators@yamaha.com.

I would like to thank everyone I interviewed for this article. I gathered so much information and insight from friends, colleagues and mentors across several platforms. There are so many talented people in this world, and I consider myself lucky to know so many of you!

Music Equals Hope

Written by Yamaha Corporation of America on August 14, 2020. Posted in Brand, Winds Artists.

In late June, 2020, long-time Yamaha Artist Ryan Anthony — one of America’s premier trumpet players — lost his eight-year battle with cancer. But his legacy lives on, through the beautiful music he created, the inspiration he gave countless others, and the millions of dollars he raised for cancer research.

Anthony had a way of bringing together beautiful souls, perhaps most notably through a program he founded called CancerBlows, which staged benefit concerts and facilitated CD recordings featuring over 30 of the world’s best trumpet artists, including the principal trumpets of several of America’s top orchestras, as well as many luminaries from the jazz, pop and rock worlds.

From his earliest age, Ryan Anthony was destined for a life of music. He was born into a musical family; his father, Roy, was a band director and his mother, Ruby, was a cellist and piano teacher in the San Diego area where they lived. At age 16, Ryan won his first major music competition and began developing a career as a soloist while simultaneously playing in several well-known chamber ensembles. As a much sought-after orchestral trumpeter, he performed as guest principal trumpet in many top orchestras, including the Dallas Symphony Orchestra, with whom he signed on full-time in 2004, assuming the principal chair in 2008.

Giving Back

At the same time, Ryan Anthony became an in-demand educator who conducted master classes all over the world, as well as teaching trumpet at Oberlin College Conservatory of Music and the North Carolina School of the Arts. More recently, he served as a full-time professor of practice in trumpet and chair of Brass and Woodwinds at Southern Methodist University. Because his opinion was so highly valued, Yamaha often invited Ryan to try the latest trumpet prototypes. His input in the development of Chicago Artist Model trumpets was particularly significant, and he played a large role in the success of those instruments.

In 2012, Ryan was diagnosed as suffering from a blood cancer with no known cure. This would set into motion the next phase of his life — combining his world-class musicianship with a newfound skill as an extraordinary fundraiser for cancer research. Resolving to not only battle the disease but to use it as a means to give back to others, he created the Ryan Anthony Foundation in 2014, and, under its umbrella, produced a series of benefit concerts called CancerBlows, which raised over two million dollars for cancer research. Perhaps even more importantly, his very public fight — often posting from his hospital room during chemotherapy treatments and procedures — raised awareness and inspired countless others to live their lives to the fullest. His message, as exemplified by his life’s work, was a simple one: Music equals hope.

“We have a responsibility to use our gift and passion for the trumpet [and music] to make a difference,” Anthony once said. “To play a role in changing lives around us. To change the landscape of the immediate world around us. To give hope to others through music. To be a musical voice for those who don’t have the option. And to reach the souls of others in need.”

“Ryan Anthony was an extraordinary person and musician,” says Bob Malone, Director of Ateliers, Yamaha Artist Relations Group, Yamaha Corporation of America. “His performances were renowned and included a sound that was as beautiful as any coming from the world’s most famous singers. But it was how he delivered that sound, and how he connected with his audiences in a way that made each feel like he was playing for them alone, that made him so special. It was the same with his friendships and professional relationships. His commitment to both was absolute and that is why the last years of his life were so impactful.”

Watch this video of Ryan Anthony performing at a CancerBlows concert in 2015.

Click here for more information about CancerBlows and the Ryan Anthony Foundation.

The Power of a Stress-Relieving Routine

Written by Kathryn Drury Wagner on August 13, 2020. Posted in Self-Care.

Flexibility. Focus. Creativity. And so many things to keep moving. Let’s face it: Music educators are consummate jugglers.

There’s so much to plan, from teaching and organizing try-outs, to running rehearsals and overseeing performances and competitions. There are administrators to support, students to mentor and, sometimes, parents to placate. COVID-19 and the challenges of teaching remotely have thrown additional layers of stress and chaos into the mix.

It’s only natural that you’d be feeling overwhelmed. According to the National Center for Health Statistics, one in three American adults is currently feeling either depressed or anxious, which is why it’s vital to create a schedule with pockets of time carved out for self-care. That’s where stress-relieving routines come in. These routines anchor the day and bring a sense of ease.

People who have a stress-relieving routine in place tend to make more efficient use of their time, make better food choices, sleep better and enjoy better overall health. In times of uncertainty, having a routine makes us feel grounded and less stressed.

Morning Routine: Setting Intention

Start the day off gently with some stretches, a mug of coffee or tea, and at least 16 ounces of water. Most of us are dehydrated first thing in the morning, which can be mistaken for fatigue.

Next, make time for at least a few minutes of meditation. According to the Mayo Clinic, even a short session will carry lasting benefits throughout the rest of the day. The type of meditation — focusing on the breath, saying an affirmation or a moving meditation like yoga or tai chi — isn’t as important as taking the time to focus and center. Regular meditators are better able to manage stress and deal with information overload. And meditation boosts creativity and imagination.

In addition to its physical benefits, exercise is also good for the brain, aiding cognition and reducing depression and anxiety, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Whether to exercise in the morning or evening is largely a matter of personal preference, and most experts seem to agree that the key question comes down to: What time of day are you most likely to stick with?

However, working out early in the day may have a slight advantage. A recent study from the International Journal of Obesity reports that people who knocked out their workouts early in the day lost more weight than people who exercised later in the day, even when both groups were doing the exact same regimens. This may be due to the fact that starting the day on a healthy note leads to healthier choices throughout the rest of the day.

One last stress tip for the morning: Finish a hot shower with a blast of cold water. According to some research, a brief cold shower may have anti-depressive effects and may reduce cortisol, the stress hormone.

Midday Routine: Pause to Refresh

Sure, you’re in the zone now, and it can be hard to stop for a break. But remember that taking a brief midday reset for self-care will make you a calmer, more patient teacher the rest of the day, better able to come up with creative solutions when your students come to you with their needs. So, resist the urge to work straight through the lunch period by setting an alarm on your phone to nudge you toward a healthy meal and a physical break.

Refuel with foods that are high in antioxidants, such as beans, berries, walnuts, vegetables and spices like turmeric and ginger. That’s because, according to Harvard Medical School, foods rich in antioxidants may lower anxiety.

Instead of a soda, boost your mood and avoid jittery stress with a short walk. Getting a little vitamin D exposure via outdoor exercise improves mental wellbeing, according to researchers from the Loyola Chicago University School of Nursing, and improves overall quality of life.

Afternoon Routine: Assess and Reset

By 3 p.m., your energy is naturally lagging, and tasks can feel insurmountable. Stress grows. The solution? Move things off the mental load and onto a list (a digital one like ToDoist or on paper, whatever your preference).

Assess what tasks can realistically get done for the day, prioritize what is most impactful and move everything else onto your future list. Writing down goals, to-do’s and ideas at the end of the school day helps you to avoid stewing about them at 11 p.m.

If you’re caffeine sensitive, beware the late-afternoon coffee break — caffeine can stick around in your system for up to seven hours, making it hard to get to sleep. For a non-caffeine energy boost, place a few drops of mood-enhancing essential oils in a diffuser. Try grapefruit, lemon, bergamot or myrrh.

Evening Routine: Reclaiming Identity

At the end of the work day, power down electronics, physically move away from your workspace, even change out of work clothes into after-hours attire. All of these cues help your body and mind transition out of career time into relaxing time.

As you segue into the home or family sphere, be mindful. Even if you have been working from home near your loved ones, you still may need to take time to reconnect with them. If you have children, spend a few minutes building a tower, working on a puzzle or reading a story before launching straight into the evening. If it’s you and a partner, perhaps you can savor a glass of wine or chat for a few minutes to have that transition and reconnection, which may help reduce friction later.

For dinner, stress-reducing meal choices include complex carbohydrates, such as brown rice or quinoa, and vegetables. According to UCLA’s Center for East-West Medicine, these foods coax the brain to produce serotonin and stabilize blood pressure, both of which reduce feelings of stress. For dessert? The center recommends dark chocolate, which boosts cognition and mood, and lowers anxiety.

For balance and focus, spend a few nights a week nurturing the other facets of your identity — you are, after all, more than a music educator. Maybe you’ll go for a long run, paint, attend a virtual panel discussion or savor learning to play a new instrument as a hobby.

Bedtime Routine: Wind Down

To thrive physically and mentally, adults need between 7 and 9 hours of sleep every night, according to the National Sleep Foundation. A consistent pre-sleep routine, such as reading or sipping a favorite herbal tea, signals your brain that it’s time to start thinking about switching into resting mode.

Enjoying a 15-minute Epsom salt bath may increase production of the hormone serotonin, which is associated with relaxation and happiness. If you want to really up the ante, add a few drops of lavender essential oil.

By the time you slip into bed, your body will be completely relaxed and primed for an excellent night of restorative rest. And you’ll be ready to take on another day of teaching, come what may.

Top 10 Vinyl Albums for Audiophiles

Written by Jeff Dorgay on August 13, 2020. Posted in Vinyl.

Any audiophile will tell you that serious listening requires serious equipment. This includes a source, such as a turntable, plus an amplifier, preamplifier and speakers. Maybe you’ve purchased a shiny new Yamaha A-S3200 integrated amp and are ready to enjoy it to its fullest. If you aren’t already a vinyl enthusiast, that input on the rear panel marked “phono” may have you wondering what the fuss is all about. Here’s a list — in no particular order — of 10 must-have LPs that really show what the vinyl format is capable of, in a wide range of musical genres, from classical to electronica.

1. Symphony No.5 – Mahler

If you are new to classical music, this is a great place to start. Mahler’s Symphony No. 5 is forceful and engaging. It begins with a funeral march, but by the second movement, it is in full swing and each of the four movements almost feel like pieces unto themselves. Bear in mind that this is not casual background music — whenever you think it’s OK to relax, Mahler blasts you with a barrage of trumpets, or some massive kettle drums; much like a good thriller movie, it keeps you on the edge of your seat, right to the very end. While there are over 2,800 versions of Mahler’s Fifth on vinyl, I really like the Audite pressing with Rafael Kubelik conducting. It’s produced from the original analog tapes in the Bavarian Radio Archives, and so it has a natural feel (especially when it comes to stringed instruments) that some versions sourced from digital do not possess.

2. Dark Side of the Moon – Pink Floyd

Before you let out a groan, remember: This album was in the Billboard 200 for 950 weeks. Crazy. Whether the Floyd’s music is a guilty or non-guilty pleasure for you, there’s no denying that the sonics of this record are impeccable. There are numerous pressings available — some that will set you back four figures — but the copy you buy on Amazon or at your local record store will still impress. From the thumping heartbeat on the opening track “Breathe” to the maddening alarm clocks in “Time” to the well-known “Money,” this album will give your audio system a real workout.

3. Kind of Blue – Miles Davis

For many jazz lovers, this is the ultimate jazz record, performed by one of the genre’s top icons. Though Davis has an extensive catalog, this is usually the disc that gets pulled out when his name is mentioned. The sheer dynamics in his horn playing will set you back in your chair, and the vast sonic landscape painted is engulfing. Most of Davis’ music falls in the bop/hard bop category, but try his much later Bitches Brew if you dare. It was (and remains) a very progressive and unstructured performance that is diametrically opposed to KOB.

4. A Capella – Todd Rundgren

Unless you are a major TR fan, you probably only remember him for his two biggest hits: “Hello It’s Me” and “Bang on the Drum All Day.” But Todd Rundgren has had an interesting and experimental career. In 1985, he performed this group of songs literally a capella — vocals only, singing all 16 parts himself. Rundgren has said that this was one of “the easiest and most difficult” records he’s ever made. The more resolving your system, the easier it will be to pick out all of the individual harmonies.

5. Roberta Flack & Donny Hathaway – Roberta Flack and Donny Hathaway

While this album is easier to come by as a high-resolution download these days, you should be able to find a great copy in a used record store for under ten bucks. The voices of these two R&B idols blend seamlessly, and the arrangements and recording quality are first-rate. This record will either impress (if you’re a first-time listener) or bring back great memories.

6. Superfly – Curtis Mayfield

Thirty-seven minutes and five seconds will never go by as fast as they do when listening to this. Every track on the Superfly album is so intensely focused, you’ll want to take a quick gasp of fresh air when you get up to flip it over for side two. The second track, “Pusherman,” defines the “ping-pong” stereo effect the ’70s made famous, and those bongos jump right out of the speakers at you.

7. Zoolook – Jean Michel Jarre

You should have this record in your collection if for no other reason than that it’s so far off the beaten path. Jarre is well known for creating sound environments that encompass you with trance-like melodies and beats, with healthy doses of synthesizers mixed in. This album goes even further, with ethereal electronic bits that are almost hallucinogenic in their delivery. A great one to listen to on the couch with the lights down low.

8. Sea Change – Beck

When we hear the name “Beck,” many of us think of the slacker anthem “Loser,” yet on so many levels, this musical genius has always given us so much more. This 2002 album marks a distinct change in Beck’s output, moving to more of a semi-acoustic, singer/songwriter vibe. However, the recording is so deep (both sonically and texturally), nearly any attempt at pigeonholing it falls short.

9. Blackstar – David Bowie

David Bowie’s last record is one of his best. Full of his trademark dark imagery, the songs show off one of rock’s biggest talents burning brightest, just before he would be leaving us. Like the other selections on this list, it also sounds so much more involving on vinyl. The more you listen to Blackstar, the more it pulls you into its narrative; it’s a record you can almost find yourself swimming in.

10. Ella and Louis – Ella Fitzgerald and Louis Armstrong

Despite its sonic limitations (it was, after all, recorded in 1956), this is one of the happiest, dreamiest albums I own. Ella Fitzgerald’s vocal range is stunning, with an unmatched purity of tone, and the contrast between her smooth voice and Armstrong’s gravelly harmonies makes for a fantastic listening experience. Standout tracks include “Isn’t This A Lovely Day?” “Cheek to Cheek,” and “April in Paris,” all of which bring you back to a simpler time — something we can always use a bit of.

Lists are always tough, and I have to confess that these are not necessarily my top 10 favorite LPs of all time (we can argue about that another day!). But for all of the musical diversity represented here, every album on this list has one thing in common: stellar sound quality. For us audiophiles, isn’t that what it’s all about?

Check out these related blog posts:

Here’s What You Need to Know About Vinyl

Appreciating Vinyl Records … and the Best Way to Enjoy Them

Five Reasons Vinyl Is Making a Comeback

Jeff Coffin Video Series, Part 1: Shopping for Vinyl

Jeff Coffin Video Series, Part 2: Caring for Vinyl

How to Clean Vinyl Records

Spotlight on Vinyl Subscription Services

Ultra Hi-Fi, Part 1: The Difference a Tonearm Makes

How to Connect a Turntable to an AV Receiver

Dialing in the Perfect Two-Channel Experience

Click here for more information about Yamaha A-S Series integrated amplifiers.

Click here for more information about Yamaha turntables.

Two Yamaha TransAcoustic guitars resting on a leather couch.

Flip the Switch

Written by Robbie Calvo on August 12, 2020. Posted in Acoustic Guitars.

I took the above photographs at my studio and Hawaiian coffee farm, showing my friend and model, Colleen Boland, with a TransAcoustic LL-TA (left) and CSF-TA (right).

One of the best years of my life was spent in Hollywood, California, attending the Guitar Institute of Technology (G.I.T.) — a program offered by The Musicians Institute, a world-renowned vocational music school with a curriculum specifically designed for contemporary musicians.

G.I.T. employed advanced learning techniques such as visualization. We were also instructed to isolate problem areas and study small chunks of information in order to maximize practice time and accelerate the assimilation of course materials. These techniques were specifically designed to strengthen both the left and right sides of the brain — each of which plays a different role in our thinking and responses.

The left side of our brain deals with the analytical aspects of life. For musicians, this includes music theory, reading music, forming chord and scale shapes, and all the technical aspects of music.

The right side of our brain handles the creative aspects. For musicians, this involves the use of chords and scales for activities such as songwriting, improvisation and live performance.

In this installment of The Calvo Report, I’ll explore how we can tap into both sides of the brain for exponential technical growth and creative performance potential.

Making the Transition

If you’re a musician, you can think of the two sides as operating this way:

Left brain: Practice time, music theory, motor skills and muscle memory. This is where the heavy lifting is done.

Right brain: Creative pursuits, improvisation and performance. This is where we tap into the left brain’s hard work on a subconscious level, allowing us to trust our abilities.

Wouldn’t it be great if we could flip the switch between the two at will, in order to get the best results from both realms?

Turns out that we can. Here are some ideas to help you make that transition any time you want.

Separate the Functions, Set Your Intention

Begin by separating the analytical and creative functions by identifying which is which during your practice routines. Here’s an example of a practice routine that sets the intention for each function:

Left-Brain Analytical

Set your intention for practice time (for example, 30 minutes).
Devote 15 minutes of focused attention to learning a new chord progression. Visualize the shapes of the chords. Name the notes, the intervals and harmonized scale position within each.
Stand up, take a break, and clear your mind.
Devote 15 minutes of focused attention to learning a new scale shape. Visualize the shape. Name the tones, study the intervals and contours of the shape.
Stand up, take a break, and clear your mind.

Important detail: Remove any study material from view. (Referring to charts and diagrams will keep you in the left-brain analytical.)

Right-Brain Creative

Devote 15 minutes to creating chord progressions with the new chords. Change the tempo, feel and style. Move the notes around in the chords. Have fun with it!
Stand up, take a break, and clear your mind.
Devote 15 minutes to improvisation using your new scale shape. Allow yourself to make mistakes and flow through them if and when they occur.
Stand up, stretch, and conclude your practice routine.

Trust that this focused practice time is enough to achieve lasting results. Remember, unfocused practice time can actually be detrimental to your progress!

Other Ways to Remove the Analytical Mind and Promote Creative Freedom

Close Your Eyes

Removing one of your senses will heighten your other senses, so close your eyes when improvising and trust your ears and the vibrations under your fingers. Jamming in the dark is also an excellent way to flip over to the creative side of your mind.

Trust

Understand that all the study and analytical work you’ve done thus far was achieved with the left-brain conscious mind. But all that wonderful knowledge exists on the creative side too, so all the abilities you’ve worked hard for are available to you when you improvise. Trust, and the notes will appear!

Visualize

Without your instrument, visualize yourself playing perfectly, hitting all the right notes and phrasing them flawlessly. Don’t analyze what you’re doing; just see your best self in your minds-eye. Positive reinforcement of self-image is extremely powerful and will help you unleash your inner rock star.

Listen to the Small Voice

The inner dialogue that we all have running through our minds on a daily basis can destroy a performance. That “small voice” has no place on stage with you. If you hear that nagging critical voice chattering away, shut it down immediately and let your mind be neutral. We don’t need a coach on the sidelines when we are in a creative flow!

Knowledge is Freedom

The more you learn and understand about music, the more freedom you’ll have. In particular, having the skills to analyze progressions quickly will allow you more time to create melodies while performing or recording. For example, let’s assume the two-bar chord progression below is the underpinning for a solo:

I: E7 I A Dma7 :I (x4)

I know from looking at this progression (without even hearing it) that it’s in the key of A, with a tonal center of the E7 chord. This means I can use the A major scale resolving to tones of E7 (E Mixolydian Mode) to create my solo lines. I can also use E7 arpeggios, double-stops and a variety of other scale choices.

Creative Amnesia

When I cross over to right-brain performance mode, I rarely remember the performance — it’s like I’m not really there. I’ve literally watched my video performances and seen myself transition from right-brain to left-brain in order to talk to the camera again. Sometimes I’m in right-brain for the lesson dialogue as well as the performances. It’s as if I’m streaming the information and just acting as the conduit.

Search for Inspirational Sounds

I’m sure we’ve all had those gigs or experiences where our sound was so good that our playing was effortless and inspired. I can’t stress enough the importance of great tone and finding your own voice through your guitar and the equipment you use. If any part of your signal chain is a distraction or delivers sub-standard results, remove or replace it. Having your mind focus on anything other than performance will lock you into the analytical mindset … and that’s not a good thing.

The TransAcoustic range of Yamaha acoustic guitars feature two kinds of onboard reverb as well as chorus … even when they’re not plugged in! (Click here to find out how this magic happens.) I’ve watched guitarists get lost in those tones — so immersed in the sound that their playing gets ratcheted up a notch. As I observe those moments, it’s pretty clear to me that they are almost exclusively under the influence of right-brain creative elements. Those built-in effects are so inspiring, you just want to keep playing!

The Video

For this video, I wanted to create a demo that features two very different Yamaha TransAcoustic guitars: the LL-TA and the CSF-TA. They were both miked (no DI signal was used, even though both guitars have built-in piezo pickups) and double-tracked to capture a natural, full-sounding representation of their acoustic properties as well as the ambient effects emanating from their sound holes.

I used the LL-TA to play the warm rhythm tones you hear in the video, employing a good-quality tube microphone to capture a small amount of the guitar’s onboard room reverb and chorus effects. The CSF-TA was used for the lead lines; I recorded it with the same tube mic to capture a small amount of the guitar’s hall reverb and then added a touch of delay in my DAW during mixing.

The Guitars

The CSF-TA (on the left) is a small parlor-size guitar that features a mahogany back and sides, a solid spruce top, a rosewood fingerboard and bridge, and those wonderful onboard effects.

The LL-TA (on the right) has a large Western body style and features a solid rosewood back and sides, an acoustic resonance-treated (A.R.E.) Engelmann spruce top, ebony fingerboard and bridge … and, again, those great onboard effects.

The Wrap-Up

You have control over the full realm of creative expression. Work hard and practice with intention … and know that the efforts you make are stored in both your conscious and subconscious mind for use at a later date. How you use that information is up to you.

When it’s time to practice, set your intention for focused study. When it’s time to perform, jam or improvise, set your intention for the perfect performance. Eliminate the small voice of doubt and don’t analyze your playing. Just dial in your tones and trust your creative mind to unleash the powers within.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha TransAcoustic guitars.

Woman in business attire with many hats stacked on top of her head.

Wearing Many Hats

Written by Shelly Peiken on August 10, 2020. Posted in Creativity.

If you’ve been in the music business for awhile, I’m sure you’ve noticed a trend: The songwriter is no longer just a songwriter. (By “just,” I don’t mean to diminish the pure breed variety. Anyone who can just write a great song is a role model in my book.)

There was a time when a songwriter’s job was to imagine a concept, express it in words, marry the words to music and then hire someone to demo their creation. If a record label thought it was a good fit for one of their artists, they would enlist the services of an impartial third-party producer to bring it to fruition.

But today, labels are looking for the one-stop-shop — a person who wears many hats. They’re looking for someone who can program, produce and engineer in addition to writing a hit song … plus be a fun hang. Fedora, Baseball, Cowboy. They expect a fully realized demo that, with a stellar mix, can serve as the final record.

So, what’s a technically challenged traditional songwriter (i.e., someone like me) supposed to do?

Well, I’ve thought a lot about that.

You see, even though it was often a thrill to have my song in the hands of a world-renowned producer, I have to admit that the final result was sometimes disappointing. On the other hand, if I’m in the driver’s seat — in other words, if I produce my own record —then I have control of my artistic vision and determine (to a large degree, anyway) how my song will ultimately be presented. That’s a lot of incentive right there.

I’ll be honest: I’ve resisted going down that road because it seems so overwhelming. But recently I decided to do some online delving — dip my toe in and see how the water felt. Guess what? It wasn’t as deep and dark as I thought. For example, just a few months ago the words “audio interface” had no meaning to me — it might just as well have been an expression from a foreign language. But then I learned from articles like What Is An Audio Interface? and Essential Gear for Your Home Studio (both posted right here on the Yamaha blog) that it’s simply the box that lets you connect mics and instruments to your computer. Why was I afraid of that?

Steinberg UR22C Recording Pack — *The UR22C Recording Pack.*

Then I began checking out the options that were available and found that some companies, like Steinberg, even have all-in-one packages (for example, the UR22C Recording Pack) that include a mic and headphones in addition to a bunch of software for recording and manipulating sound so I wouldn’t have to mix and match gear. Yeah, there’d be a learning curve and I’ve always been the kind of person who gets flustered by instructions and manuals. But I’ve learned a lot from getting acquainted with my smart phone — mainly, that sometimes it’s best to just jump in and poke around a bit to get the lay of the land before reading the fine print. When I work from intuition instead of written materials, I tend to get the hang of things (even techie things) a lot faster than I give myself credit for.

The bottom line is that, with so many recording products designed for all levels, even someone as technically challenged as me can get started experimenting with creating beats, engineering tracks and producing my own demos right here at home. Before long, I’ll be able to demonstrate how a piece of music might sound in 6/8 rather that 4/4, or in a different key, or with strings. And what I’ve discovered is that expanding one’s palette and hat rack gives us creative freedom, as well as choice and power!

When I wrote my first song, I never expected to hear it on the radio. But then one day I did. Soon we’ll all be out there again, singing, performing, co-writing, clapping. Until then, I’ll be broadening my musical horizons one hat at a time.

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

What Is a Fractional Size Violin?

Written by Ken Dattmore on August 6, 2020. Posted in Acoustic Strings. 1 Comment on What Is a Fractional Size Violin?

Put 50 violin makers in a room and ask them the proper dimensions of a violin. You’ll likely get 51 different answers.

From the very beginning, violin makers have debated the appropriate size of the instrument. While the four strings have remained tuned to the same pitch, the vehicle that delivers their sound has varied greatly in design over the centuries. After all, players don’t come in just one size, so why should instruments only come in one size? Instrument makers therefore set out to build string instruments that not only fit the players’ physical dimensions but could still deliver the good sound and proper pitch that was necessary.

Today, there are essentially seven different sizes that are recognized as standards:

1. 4/4 full size (a 14″ body)

2. 3/4 size (a 13″ body)

3. 1/2 size (a 12″ body)

4. 1/4 size (an 11″ body)

5. 1/8 size (a 10″ body)

6. 1/16 size (a 9″ body)

7. 1/32 size (an 8″ body)

Fractional size violins are recognized in educational programs where children start learning the instrument at very young ages. As they grow, the next sized instrument is available for them to step into. Yamaha YVN Model 3 student violins, for example, are available in 1/2, 3/4 and 4/4 sizes.

Three Yamaha student violins. — *Yamaha YVN Model 3 student violins.*

In the Suzuki Method of string education, a 1/10 sized instrument exists in-between the 1/16 and 1/8 sizes to accommodate a child who may be a little bigger or starts learning at an older age. Some violin makers have also created 7/8 sized instruments that are just slightly smaller than full-size. These are designed for players who are petite and may struggle with a full-sized instrument because their hands are small. Yamaha has created an online Student Violin Finder that can help you make the best selection.

The process of measuring the player to the correct sized violin is simple though crucial. The player places the instrument under their chin and reaches out over the scroll of the instrument. If their hand can comfortably wrap around the scroll of the instrument without overstretching, then it is the correct size. To help dealers and educators further determine proper instrument sizing, Yamaha has made a device called the “Fit Stick,” which allows a player to be measured without an instrument in their hands. The Fit Stick is simply placed under the chin; when the arm is extended out, the spot where the tips of the fingers land determines the proper instrument size needed. Contact Yamaha to get one free of charge.

So whether you are short or tall, three years old or 30, there is a violin that is sized right for you!

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out these related blog posts:

Five Things You May Not Know About String Instruments

Reimagining the Way Student Violins Are Made

How to Prepare Your Child for School Orchestra

Click here for more information about Yamaha YVN Model 3 student violins.

Click here for more information about Yamaha acoustic stringed instruments.

A guitar waveform that has been clipped.

Distortion and Saturation

Written by Mike Levine on August 5, 2020. Posted in Recording. 3 Comments on Distortion and Saturation

In the audio world, the word “distortion” has more than one meaning. There’s unwanted distortion, also known as hard clipping, which occurs when you inadvertantly overload the input to a digital device (either hardware- or software-based). The resulting sound is quite unpleasant. Then there’s creative distortion, which you intentionally apply to an audio signal. Examples include a distorted guitar, a gritty vocal track or a mix tinged with light saturation to soften it around the edges.

In this column, we’ll focus on the creative aspects, but for context, first a brief word about unwanted distortion.

The Perils of Hard Clipping

If you turn the input or output levels of a track up too much in your DAW, the result is clipping. This is a phenomenon that occurs in digital audio when you push a signal higher than 0dBFS (decibels full scale), which is an absolute maximum that’s represented by 0 on the level meter in your DAW’s mixer.

*0dBFS is as high as you can go before clipping occurs.*

Once the level reaches 0dBFS, it’s as if it’s hitting an immovable ceiling. Instead of continuing to go up, it just flattens out against that ceiling. The tops of the waves get clipped off, which is why it’s referred to as clipping.

*A guitar waveform (above) that has been clipped (below).*

Soft Clipping Is A Totally Different Story

It’s a different story with analog hardware. Here, you can push the level above 0dBu (dBu is the scale typically used by analog meters) without creating hard clipping. Levels above 0dBu do overdrive the circuit. But, when used in moderation, the result is likely to be a pleasant distortion known as saturation or soft clipping, which adds overtones, harmonics and a gentle degree of compression to the original audio.

The type of circuitry in the analog gear will determine the nature of the saturation. Tubes, tapes, transformers and transistors each distort differently when you overdrive them. For example, here’s an audio clip that demonstrates the sound of tube saturation/distortion on guitar:

Unless you own outboard analog gear, you’re likely to get your distortion from analog-modeled plug-ins in your DAW. These closely emulate the sounds of tube, tape and transistor devices. Most DAWs, such as Steinberg Cubase, come with a range of distortion plug-ins, offering a variety of different sonic flavors.

Overdrive, Saturation and Tape Saturation

So far, I’ve used the term “distortion” in a generic sense, though it’s also used more specifically to describe heavy, fuzzed-out distortion like you get from a high-gain guitar amp or fuzz box. But there are lots of other kinds of distortion too, including overdrive, saturation and tape saturation.

The common definition of “overdrive” is that it’s a less extreme form of distortion that sounds more crunchy than fuzzy. This next audio clip demonstrates the sound of a rhythm guitar played first with overdrive, then with distortion:

The word “saturation” usually refers to the distortion you get from overdriving tube, tape or transformer-based devices (or from plug-ins emulating them, such as Cubase DaTube). It can vary from subtle to heavy, depending on how you set it.

In the analog days, engineers discovered that if you recorded drums at levels above 0dBu, it softened the rough edges, and added a bit of distortion and sustain, all in a complimentary way. This effect, referred to as tape saturation, could be used on all sorts of sources, both instrumental and vocal. It’s typically applied to “warm up” digital audio, which lacks the subtle imperfections of analog tape and therefore can sound a little too sterile to some listeners.

Today, of course, tape saturation can be emulated by many plug-ins, including Steinberg Magneto and Quadrafuzz v2. In this audio clip of a drum track, you can clearly hear the tape saturation created by Quadrafuzz v2 (set to “Tape”) when it comes in about halfway through:

Crush Those Bits

Another type of distortion, which is purely digital, is called bit crushing. It works primarily by reducing the bit-depth (that is, the resolution) of an audio signal by a user-specified amount, causing a loss of fidelity and making the source sound gritty and more “lo-fi.” In this next audio clip, you’ll hear two measures of clean drums, followed by the same drum track effected by the Cubase bitcrusher plug-in, with the intensity increasing (and the audio fidelity commensurately deteriorating) every two measures:

The Cubase bitcrusher settings used at the end of the above audio clip. — *The Cubase **bitcrusher** settings used at the end of the above audio clip.*

How to Apply Distortion

You typically add distortion, overdrive and saturation as serial effects in your DAW — that is, through the insert section of the mixer.

You can also bring them in as parallel effects, on an auxiliary track (an FX Channel in Cubase). Parallel processing entails applying the effect to a copy of the signal, either on another track or through an aux bus. You then heavily process the copy and then add it into the mix alongside the unprocessed sound, adjusting the relative levels of the two until you get the combination you want.

The Cubase DaTube plug-in, used as an insert (left) and in parallel (right). — *The Cubase **DaTube** plug-in, used as an insert (left) and in parallel (right).*

If your distortion, overdrive or saturation plug-in has a mix control, you can achieve parallel processing by setting it below 100% (usually significantly so), which has the effect of blending the unprocessed and processed signals together.

Distorting Guitars

Electric guitars are one of the most frequently distorted instruments. You can create distortion on a guitar track in several different ways:

1. Plug a distortion pedal into an amp and mic it
2. Overdrive an amp using its internal circuitry and mic it
3. Record through an amp-modeling or distortion device
4. Record a direct signal into your DAW and use plug-ins to add the distortion afterwards

Amp modeling plug-ins such as Steinberg VST Amp Rack or Amp Simulator (both included with most versions of Cubase) give you a range of amp types, speaker cabinet emulations and — in the case of VST Amp Rack, even some effects pedals — that you can mix and match to create the tone you’re looking for.

Be careful when you dial in extreme sounds, however, because they can create unwanted hiss and buzz, which is particularly noticeable when the guitar isn’t playing. Adding distortion can also accentuate some of the string noises that accompany the sound of a guitar, particularly finger squeaks.

Extreme distortion will also reduce the attack of an instrument part. If you’re applying it to a rhythm guitar or other rhythm instrument, those tracks could lose some definition (which will have a negative impact on the overall mix as well) if you are too heavy-handed in your application of it. Distortion can also add muddiness in the lows and lower midrange, which you might need to reduce with an equalizer.

Distorting Other Instruments

Beyond guitars, many other instruments sound good with some distortion, overdrive or saturation. A little bit of tape saturation on bass guitar, for example, can really help round out the sound. Similarly, distortion can be quite effective in adding grit to otherwise smooth electric piano sounds. Here’s an audio clip of an electric piano, first clean and then with distortion and cabinet emulation applied by VST Amp Rack:

You can also improve the sound of drum tracks with distortion. If you’re able to apply it the individual drums, subtly distorting the snare can often give your drum parts some additional energy. Or you might distort the kick, snare and toms, and leave the cymbals alone.

In EDM and hip-hop, you’re more likely to be working with stereo drum parts, such as loops or the output of a MIDI drum instrument. In those situations, you’ll be applying distortion to the entire drum part, rather than only to individual tracks — which can be quite effective too, if less subtle.

Distorting Vocals

Anything from a little saturation to heavy distortion can change the texture of a vocal track, giving it more of an edge and/or a ’50s vibe (an era when many sensitive tube microphones were in common use — mics that could easily distort if the singer got too close or sang too loudly); this is often used in rock mixes. Saturation can also be used on a vocal to give it a little more impact without it sounding “distorted” per se. In this audio clip, you’ll hear a two-measure vocal part repeat; the second time around, a mix of distortion and tube and tape saturation are added using the Quadrafuzz v2 plug-in:

*The vocal setting used for the above audio clip.*

Producers sometimes even apply light tape saturation across the full mix by way of the master bus to warm up the digital audio without making it sound overtly distorted.

No Limits

These are the standard ways to use distortion and saturation, but as with everything in recording, they are only guidelines. Feel free to experiment with the settings and plug-ins you use. You never know — you might come up with a fresh new sound!

What’s the Difference Between 4K Ultra HD, 8K UHD and HDR10+?

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase and Cubase plug-ins.

HDMI^® 2.1: What It Means for Gear and Gamers

Written by Ted Goslin on August 3, 2020. Posted in Gaming.

Any lover of video games knows the thrill of unboxing a new game. But imagine the sense of disappointment that would follow if you were trying to enjoy your new game on a system not equipped to handle the latest advances in visual effects and surround sound technology. Whether that means you need a new audio system or that your TV lacks the required graphic capabilities to keep up with high-res rapidly refreshing content, it’s enough to bring out the sad face emoji in any text message.

In an era where technological advances are coming at us faster than Usain Bolt crossing a finish line, it can seem hopeless to keep up at times. That’s where HDMI 2.1 comes in. It’s the latest technology for improving the video speed and quality of your favorite movies, TV shows and video games, along with the dynamic support needed to effectively capture and convey future content.

Are you ready for HDMI 2.1? Here are the ways this exciting new technology will impact your home theater and gaming experience.

The Five Basic Elements of Video

Before we start talking about HDMI 2.1, let’s go over the five basic elements of video:

1. Resolution. This describes the number of horizontal lines in the video signal, from top to bottom. 8K video is made up of 4,320 lines stacked on top of each other, with each line 7,680 pixels wide, making the aspect ratio 7,680 x 4,320 pixels, or 16:9. (The reason it’s called “8K” is because 7,680 rounds up to 8,000, or 8K). 8K offers 16 times more pixels than 1080p full HD resolution.

2. Frame Rate. Notated as frames per second (fps), frame rate is the speed at which video is captured and displayed. The faster the frame rate, the more images are displayed every second, and different frame rates provide different viewing experiences. 24 fps is the most commonly used frame rate for movies because it creates a cinematic look. Most major studios have the ability to shoot at higher frame rates but stick with 24 fps because that’s the quality most viewers are used to. However, newer video games will be supporting 60 and 120 fps modes. HDMI 2.1 provides solutions to issues like the “soap opera” effect (i.e., motion blur) that occur at these higher frame rates.

3. Color Depth. Also known as bit depth, this represents the number of bits used for each color component of a single pixel. When referring to a single pixel, it can be defined as bits per pixel (bpp). The higher the bpp, the more color variations are captured.

4. Color Space. This is an abstract mathematical model that describes the range of onscreen colors as numbers. As technology has advanced, wider ranges of colors are able to be displayed, and color space standards have evolved to support these capabilities. Color space types over the years have included Rec. 601 for SDTV, Rec. 709 for HDTV and Rec. 2020 for UHDTV, which is the latest standard.

5. Brightness Range. This is a core attribute that makes HDR (High Dynamic Range) video come alive. It is the range that allows video to be displayed with brighter whites and deeper blacks, as well as more variations of brightness in between.

Why HDMI?

HDMI has come a long way since its inception in 2002 as the replacement for component cables. It was originally meant to serve as a single all-in-one cable to carry both audio and video digital signals, as opposed to component cables, which split the audio and video signal over multiple cables and/or connectors.

The technology was first introduced as HDMI 1.0 and had a maximum bandwidth of 4.95 Gbps (short for Gigabits per second). Its bandwidth originally supported 1080p at 60Hz, along with 8-channel high-resolution audio at 192 kHz/24-bit resolution. Each succeeding update provided increased bandwidth and enhanced features, such as support for DVD audio (version 1.1), sRGB color support (version 1.2), a lip-syncing algorithm (version 1.3) and support for 2K and 4K resolution video, though at lower frame rates. HDMI 2.0 added support for 4K at 60 fps.

Bandwidth comparison of HDMi 1.4, 2.0 and 2.1. — *Each new version of HDMI has increased the amount of bandwidth.*

New HDMI 2.1 Features

In addition to more bandwidth, HDMI 2.1 offers several features designed to accommodate emerging audio and video technology in the future. These include Variable Refresh Rate (VRR), Auto Low Latency Mode (ALLM), eARC (enhanced Audio Return Channel) and Dynamic HDR support.

Lots of acronyms, to be sure … but also lots of great advancements. Let’s take a look at each in turn.

– Variable Refresh Rate (VRR). Of particular interest to gamers and game developers, VRR is a new spin on the concept of refresh rate — it has the ability to vary the frame rate to match the output of the graphics processor (GPU) through the HDMI chain to the supporting monitor. The “variable” part of VRR refers to the way that graphics processors require different periods to render each frame.

VRR does three things to enable more fluid and detailed gameplay:

1. Reduces or eliminates lag.

2. Reduces or eliminates judder — jittery images caused by upscaling from the film’s original 24 fps to the 60fps required by a 60Hz television and above.

3. Reduces or eliminates frame tearing, which occurs when the frame rate exceeds your monitor or television’s refresh rate.

– Auto Low Latency Mode (ALLM). Another important enhancement for gaming, this feature tells the display (or AVR) to turn off all of its video processing so that the delay (latency) to display gaming video is minimized. Most video processing features are used for things like adjusting picture settings, upscaling video resolution, or adjusting for interlaced or progressive scan display. Since the game video output is known, these video processing features can be shut off, thus eliminating that processing time. ALLM is sometimes referred to as game mode, though it was previously a manual process. It works by letting a game console send a signal to the display to automatically switch to ALLM. This mode may not be ideal for other types of viewing, however, since some processing features on a TV may stop working in order to reduce latency. That’s why, when the gaming console is shut off, the TV will revert to regular viewing mode.

TV settings menu showing ALLM. — *ALLM can be enabled through most TV settings menus.*

– Enhanced Audio Return Channel (eARC). This feature is already available in many AV receivers, including most current Yamaha models. If you’re unfamiliar with the term, ARC allows audio to be sent from your TV to your AV receiver or sound bar through the same HDMI cable that sends the signal from your AV receiver/sound bar to the TV. The latest version, called eARC, provides increased bandwidth and speed. This allows you to send up to 32 channels of high-quality audio to a sound bar or AV receiver, including eight-channel, 24-bit/192kHz high-resolution uncompressed data streams, enabling content from movies that have Dolby Atmos^® or DTS:X™-encoded audio. Learn more about the benefits of eARC here.

Enhanced Audio Return Channel (eARC) diagram.

– Dynamic HDR Support. Formats such as HDR10+ are also supported to ensure that every moment of a video is displayed at its ideal values for depth, detail, brightness, contrast and wider color gamuts.

SDR, Static HDR and Dynamic HDR comparison. — *HDR has progressed through the years to its current version.*

When You’ll Need It

TV manufacturers are just starting to incorporate HDMI 2.1 connectivity in their latest models. But the real need for 2.1 will come when content arrives that requires the features described above. The next generation of gaming consoles, such as the Microsoft Xbox^™ Series X, will support HDMI 2.1 gaming features like ALLM and VRR to display what the game designer originally intended. It’s likely that some AV receivers will soon provide HDMI 2.1 support too — stay tuned to this space.

Since the biggest benefit of HDMI 2.1 is in relationship to the latest features on gaming consoles and 8K content that are not yet available, it’s not a critical thing to have right this minute … but because it’s backwards compatible with current tech, it wouldn’t hurt to get a jump on things so that when you do need it, you already have it.

One last tip: When you decide to shop for an HDMI 2.1 cable, be sure to verify the cable’s capabilities before you buy, and opt for the shortest cable length required (ideally, under 10 feet). Cable length can have an impact on signal quality because it takes slightly longer for a signal to travel down its full length.

The Adopted Trademarks HDMI, High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

All images courtesy of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

Check out these related blog articles:

How to Recreate the Movie Theater Experience at Home

How to Connect Nintendo Switch™ to Your TV, Sound Bar or AV Receiver

Gaming in Dolby Atmos: An Interview with Josh Osiris

The History of AV Receivers

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV receivers.

Read other articles in our AV Technology Spotlight series.

How to Choose the Right Bass Strings

Written by Michael Gelfand on July 31, 2020. Posted in Guitars How-to. 3 Comments on How to Choose the Right Bass Strings

No matter how great your bass may be, it’s only a slab of wood if it doesn’t have strings. Throw strings on it, though, and it suddenly springs to life.

The vibrations your hands create when they touch those strings resonate through the entire bass — the body, neck, tuners, nut, fret wire, bridge, pickups and other electronics — helping to create a unique audio signal for your amp to reproduce. So the strings you choose matter a great deal.

Just like basses, strings come in many different varieties. From a layman’s perspective, string construction isn’t a popular topic at parties — it’s just a wire, after all, wrapped in another wire or some other material. But ask any string manufacturer, or any discerning player, and you’ll hear passionate explanations about how the material choices and construction approaches dramatically affect the way a given string sounds and feels under your fingers. And to be fair, they’re right.

Here’s what you need to know to choose the right strings for you.

Winding

The type of winding is probably the most important string decision you can make because it will have the most impact on the sound of the bass you play and how you play it (i.e., fingerstyle, slap, with a pick, etc.). “Winding” refers to the material wrapped around the string’s core. It’s the surface that your fingers touch, and the surface that comes in contact with your frets and/or fretboard. Bass strings are available in four types of windings: flatwound, tapewound, roundwound and half round.

– Flatwounds were essentially the only game in town for bass strings until the 1960s, so they are synonymous with the classic round, mellow bass sound common to jazz and vintage rock. Their flat windings feel smooth on your fingertips, are easy on your frets, and don’t eat up the fingerboard the way other types of strings can.

– Tapewound strings are even silkier to the touch than flatwounds thanks to a nylon layer wrapped around the steel core. They tend to be dark-sounding — on some basses, even bordering on dull and thumpy — and deliver a tonality that’s more akin to what you might expect to hear from an upright bass.

– Roundwounds are the most popular winding type in use today. These strings are typically wrapped in stainless steel or nickel, and are renowned for their piano-like brightness and sizzle. They’re also the harshest on your fingertips, frets and fretboard, but if you’re into rock or funk, they deliver a hallmark sound that’s hard to beat. Yamaha basses are shipped with roundwound strings.

– Half rounds are essentially roundwounds that are ground to a somewhat flattened surface, which results in less string noise while also prolonging the life expectancy of your frets. Halfs aren’t as bright-sounding as roundwounds, but they are brighter than flatwounds and tapewounds.

Personally, I love the warmth of a bass strung with flatwounds played through a neck-position pickup, but I am equally in love with the sizzle of roundwounds when using a bridge-position pickup. If you’re not sure what’s right for you, think about a player whose sound you’d like to most closely emulate, then find out what strings they use. And consider taperwound strings for any of these winding types — they’re manufactured so that the windings taper toward the bridge end of the string (just in front of the ball end that attaches the string to the bridge) to enable the metal core to make direct contact with the bridge saddle. (If you decide to use taperwounds, make sure you confirm that the scale length for the string set you purchase matches the scale length of your bass.)

Wrap Material

While the type of wrap is the most important factor when it comes to strings, the wrap material also provides unique characteristics that color the resulting tone, affect how the strings feel, and contribute to how long they’ll last.

There are a number of different wrap materials commonly used in bass strings:

– Stainless steel is the brightest-sounding material available, and it lasts the longest.

– Nickel-plated steel is bright-sounding as well, but it isn’t as harsh on the hands and frets. Yamaha basses are shipped with nickel-plated strings.

– Copper-plated steel is very bright and commonly used on acoustic electric basses.

– Pure nickel is duller sounding (it’s the least magnetic material), with more of a vintage tone.

In addition, manufacturers sometimes apply protective coatings to help strings resist corrosion and give them longer life. Just be aware that the type of coating used can also color the sound of the strings.

String Gauge

This is a number that refers to the diameter, or thickness, of each string. A set of strings is identified by the gauge of the lowest string in the set. Yamaha basses, for example, are shipped with .45 gauge strings; the top string in their four-string models is .105 gauge, while the top string in five-string models is .130 gauge.

Comparatively speaking, heavy gauge strings sound meatier — less slinky — than lighter gauge ones; they make a good match for aggressive players who really attack their instruments. However, the heavier the gauge, the more tension the string will require to be tuned to pitch … and the more tension you add to a string, the harder it becomes to press down on a fret, so you’ll need good finger strength. In addition, thicker strings require wider slots in nuts and bridge saddles, and also create more tension on the truss rod(s) in your bass’ neck, so if you’re currently playing light or medium gauge strings and want to move to heavier gauge ones, you’ll likely need to have your bass set up (truss rod and intonation adjusted, action raised or lowered) by a qualified pro or things will quickly get out of whack.

Lighter gauge strings are much more pliant under your fingers, can be more easily bent, and deliver more snap and percussive funkiness, albeit with less fundamental bassiness. You can compensate to some degree by turning up the low tone control on your amp, but it still won’t sound the same as if you were using heavier-gauge strings.

Core Shape

A string’s core wire is usually made from steel, and it comes in essentially two different shapes: hex and round:

– A hex core, as its name implies, is hexagonal, which gives the string windings something to grab onto. But because the hex core’s six-sided shape has flat surfaces rather than being round, that means the windings don’t constantly touch the core all the way around, which results in a brighter tone.

– Round core strings — which many players associate with a vintage tone — maintain constant contact with the core, helping to create a darker and more fundamental sound with less tension required, translating into a string that’s slightly easier to play.

There’s a lot to consider here, I know. Longtime players typically find a brand of strings from a specific manufacturer that works for them and stick with it for years — sometimes even decades. In fact, some bassists will play the same set of strings on their bass for that long! (See Jamerson, James.) But don’t be deterred if you’re relatively new to the bass. The more you play and try out different strings, the sooner you’ll figure out what you like and what you don’t like. Oh, and one last tip: Always remember to buy strings that match the scale length of your bass (as measured from nut to saddle). This may seem inherently obvious, but trust me, the first time you slip up and go to put the wrong ones on, you won’t be a happy camper!

Click here for more information about Yamaha basses.

Larry Williams’ Juggling Act

Written by Elizabeth Anderson Lopez on July 31, 2020. Posted in Educator Profiles.

If hornist Larry Williams were a superhero, he might be called The Juggler.

Williams’ music career spans decades and includes his current status as a performer, instructor, collaborator and administrator — and that’s just a few of his roles.

“I didn’t know I was a juggler until I started juggling,” he says. “Right after graduation, I was the principal horn with New World Symphony for two seasons. During my second year, I fell in love with teaching. I loved both equally. Being balanced between performing and teaching was true happiness for me.”

As with any good superhero, Williams has a fascinating origin story. He started playing the trumpet in his elementary school band. “I was the last chair, but I didn’t care — I just wanted to sit with my friend,” Williams recalls. “In middle school band, I was the last chair again. … Then the teacher asked for volunteers to play the French horn. I was dismayed when my friend raised his hand.”

Realizing that his sole reason for being in the band was going to move across the room, Williams raised his hand too. “My teacher, Olivia Gutoff, was skeptical based on how bad I was on the trumpet,” he says. “My friend played two notes, and she told him he was in. With me, she said to come after school, which I did. I started to play, and it felt right. She must have thought, ‘Holy crap, he’s a horn player!’”

The French horn was a lot easier to play than the trumpet for young Williams. “Olivia was a horn expert, which I didn’t know at the time,” he says. “She wanted me to take private lessons with her.”

Though he originally declined, Williams took up Gutoff on her years-old offer to work with him during high school when he decided to major in music for college. “I learned so much from her that I earned a scholarship to Penn State [University],” he says. “I later transferred to Peabody [Institute at Johns Hopkins University] and eventually started my career.”

The Multitasker

Williams’ career has flourished despite — or because of — his constant juggling. “I’m used to having four to seven jobs,” Williams says. “I like to have one or two main jobs with a lot of part-time jobs.”

One of those main jobs, teaching, has entered a new phase. In the spring of 2020, Williams was appointed associate director of the DMV Music Academy, whose mission is to expose, engage, inspire and guide musicians of all levels in the D.C., Maryland and Virgina area along their individual paths toward mastery. The academy started out as a summer percussion workshop led by Donnie Johns in Hyattsville, Maryland, and featured faculty from the National Symphony Orchestra, Baltimore Symphony Orchestra, U.S. Navy Band, and The Cadets and Santa Clara Vanguard Drum and Bugle Corps. The organization has grown steadily in the past two years, and Williams was invited to join the leadership team to help guide the academy as it expands its programming and its reach.

And — cue juggling pins — Williams concurrently launched the DMV Horn Academy/Larry Williams Horn Studio. “The Horn Academy will feature in-person and online lessons, horn and brass chamber ensembles, a masterclass series, and workshops throughout the year,” Williams says. “I’m really excited that DMV Horn Academy will now be one of my home bases. I’ll be able to teach horn players regionally while doing masterclasses around the country.”

The Coach

Williams has taught French horn as a private instructor as well as in an academic environment. “I enjoy learning how people learn,” Williams says. “If you watch and listen, they teach you how they best process information. Ask them questions and understand their point of view. Don’t say, ‘This is how you do it.’”

Because each student learns differently, Williams sets out to know them as people. “I start every session by asking them how they are as people,” he says. “I need to get a sense of where they are mentally. We’re here to play the horn, but it’s more important to know how they are.”

Williams uses some similarities between music and sports, including being in “the zone.” “Part of what I teach is a form of meditation when we are playing,” he says. “It’s getting students into a mental state where they are deeply concentrated. When you’re in that zone, you’re working on a deeper level of consciousness.”

One of the ways that Williams achieves that focus is by going back to his quest for balance. “In the zone state, you’re firing both sides of your brain,” he says. “The physical includes your breathing and tongue placement. Then there’s the emotional, artistic part. When you get them both in balance, it’s like a seesaw. The point isn’t that it’s level. You have to stay in that small space where you’re monitoring and controlling it. I focus on the basic principles of playing the horn, but then I put that aside and ask my students how they’re feeling. Then I go back to technique. This back and forth gets them in the zone.”

As a teacher Williams often encounters a specific challenge with the zone. “I try to get students out of their own heads,” he says. “Younger students often worry if they’re playing correctly. I tell them to focus on serving the music. Make it about the audience, the composer, about anything but yourself. You can teach someone to play the French horn really well, but if they don’t focus, all that will go out the window when they perform.”

He practices what he preaches. “My brain works the same way whether I’m performing or teaching,” he says.

The Administrator

After teaching at the Johns Hopkins Peabody Institute for more than 20 years, Williams was ready for a new challenge. In 2016, he was awarded a fellowship in the Johns Hopkins University Provost’s Office where he worked on university-wide initiatives.

The change to the administrative side of academia included some growing pains. “It was very weird,” Williams says. “I had to wear a suit every day. There were no students; it was all administrators.”

With persistence, Williams figured out that the rules of the road are the same. “We have things we want to accomplish, so we come together to figure out how to achieve them,” he says. “I was like a student again.”

During the second year of his renewed fellowship, Williams learned about an opening for assistant vice provost for faculty affairs. “I still wanted to challenge myself,” he says. “Even though I wasn’t sure I wanted to be in administration full time, I wanted to explore it.”

Williams also took several business courses from Johns Hopkins and earned an Executive Certificate in Business Communication. Williams says those courses focused on “the soft skills everyone needs, such as how to communicate with different generations. I was the only musician in these classes.”

And Williams will definitely make use of those skills as he flexes his leadership, communication and administration muscles with the DMV Horn Academy.

The Collaborator

Williams still finds joy in performing with others and as a solo artist. “I lean toward playing with others,” he says. “Playing music in real time with other people connects us to each other without using words. That’s an amazing feeling.”

Even when it’s just him, “I try to collaborate with the audience,” he says. “From a young age, I was taught the point of music was to bring people together.”

He encourages students to operate the same way. “I want students to play for others, not just for themselves.”

Williams collaborates with more than just musicians. In 2008, he founded the American Studio Orchestra (ASO), which he calls a multimedia orchestra that includes musicians, filmmakers, dancers and other creative minds. “I began having conversations with friends from different artistic backgrounds about what they do, why they do it and what they want to do,” Williams says. “I was really inspired to learn that they were asking the same questions that I was. Everybody was happy but seeking to do more.”

Larry Williams and the Lyric Brass Quintet — Lyric Brass Quintet

Another collaboration resulted in the Lyric Brass Quintet, which was formed in 1998. “It started as a group of friends who wanted to play and perform but didn’t want to tour,” Williams shares. “We still play every week and have managed to stay together through multiple changes. We don’t realize what an old married couple we all are until someone who doesn’t play with us comments on it.”

From juggling for so long, Williams has learned the importance of connecting his varied activities. For example, the Lyric Brass Quintet is the brass section for ASO, and the quintet helps with the arrangements.

These days Williams’ main focus is the DMV Horn Academy with a complement of side projects, all while combining life as a teacher and perpetual learner. “I’ve come full circle in a lot of ways,” he says. “It’s been an interesting ride so far, and I look forward to the future.”

And to think that it all started as a happenstance. “If my buddy hadn’t raised his hand that day, I wouldn’t have the career I have today,” Williams recalls. “I’m not one who says you have to know what you want to do right away. I just fell into my calling.”

Just as any good superhero would.

Larry Williams At A Glance

Education

Bachelor of Music in Horn Performance, Peabody Conservatory, Johns Hopkins University
Graduate Performance Diploma, Peabody Conservatory, Johns Hopkins University

Current positions

DMV Horn Academy – Larry Williams Studio
Yamaha Performing Artist and Clinician
Principal Horn, Black Pearl Chamber Orchestra
Principal Horn, Sphinx Symphony Orchestra
Artistic Director and Solo Horn, American Studio Orchestra
Horn, Lyric Brass Quintet
Artist Faculty, Peabody Institute, Johns Hopkins University

Previous positions

Assistant Vice Provost, Johns Hopkins University
Chair, Brass and Winds Department, Peabody Preparatory
Director, Adult and Continuing Education Program, Peabody Institute
Professor of Horn, Florida International University
Fellow, New World Symphony

Solo Recordings

“Paradigms” (2001)
“Black Forest” (2006)

SupportED 2020v5n2 cover with Larry Williams This article originally appeared in the 2020N2 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Case Study: Music Thrives at a STEAM Magnet School in Florida

Written by Savy Leiser on July 31, 2020. Posted in Case Studies.

Art and science work in harmony at Sanders Memorial Elementary School in Land O’ Lakes, Florida. Each student has an assigned Apple device to pursue knowledge of STEAM — science, technology, engineering, art and math.

Kindergartners through 5th graders use their devices not only to learn coding, robotics and aviation but also to create music.

Sanders Memorial, a STEAM magnet that opened in 2015, has incorporated technology into the study of melody, rhythm and music theory. For the past four years, students have also performed in a tech-based instrumental ensemble called iPad Band.

“STEAM, to us, means not only doing the science, technology, engineering and math but … seeing that art is in all of those subjects as well,” says Ryan McCorkle, a co-teacher for the music program.

Tech and Theory

Adding technology to music education is a natural step as professional music becomes more entwined with the world of computers. “Music … on the radio is mostly technology-based,” McCorkle says, explaining that synthesizers and mixers have become more common than woodwind instruments in contemporary commercial music.

By using Apple’s GarageBand program, teachers break down the elements of music for their students. Scale patterns, form and improvisation are all taught through GarageBand, says James Coyne, co-teacher.

Loops help students identify the melody of a song. “We teach them that a melody is based on the sounds they’re familiar with,” McCorkle says.

At the beginning of 2020, 2nd graders learned improvisation using a pentatonic scale in GarageBand. “Breaking apart a song they can hear on the radio, [students learn] how it’s structured,” McCorkle says.

Students in 3rd through 5th grade are also working on creating cell phone ringtones and voting on their favorites. “The winning ringtone becomes our cell phone ringtone for the year,” McCorkle says.

Connecting Music to Math and Reading

Through the comprehensive STEAM education at Sanders, students learn how different subjects intersect. “When they’re learning about solar systems, they might do certain things in music and art class that relate to the solar system,” says principal Jason Petry. “It’s intertwined and embedded in everything we do.”

Consequently, music classes aren’t only creative; they’re mathematical as well. “We remind [students] all the time that music is a lot of math,” McCorkle says.

Counting is an important part of rhythm; similarly, sound waves, frequencies, pitch and other scientific concepts are important for a full understanding of music. “We cover sound waves, and we do an experiment with frequencies,” Coyne says.

In the sound-wave activity, 5th graders set plates on a speaker, adding different colors of sand to the plates to observe the reaction of the sand at different frequencies. “They learn about hertz; they visually see it with the sand, and they’re getting the science of it,” Coyne says.

This experiment gives students a visual representation of pitch. “The kids tell us when they see a pitch, and we point out where the nodes are and increase the frequency,” McCorkle says.

Computer-generated music making can also tie into English and reading. In music class, older students use recording software to create an audiobook. “We do a project where students read a … 1st-grade level text and record that,” Coyne says. “They add in sound effects for page turns and background music.”

Those audiobooks then go to kindergarten and 1st-grade students to use in buddy reading exercises. “Some of their peers hear a book they’ve created, and it helps with phonics and comprehension,” Coyne says.

From Instruments to iPads

In 2016, Sanders debuted an extracurricular instrumental music ensemble, but instead of playing traditional brass and woodwind instruments, students performed on electronic tablets. This ensemble, known as iPad Band, comprises about 30 students in 4th and 5th grades.

While Sanders has a choir and an Orff ensemble, schools in Pasco County, Florida, traditionally don’t begin learning concert band instruments until middle school, McCorkle says.

Making music on a portable electronic device allows for accessibility to all students. “The chance of having an instrument at home is rare,” but every family has a cell phone, McCorkle says. “There’s an app they can [download] and create music. The link between technology and music is having the ability to create at any time in their own way.”

During iPad Band rehearsals, which take place one hour before school, students use GarageBand and Yamaha synthesizer apps to create covers of pop songs. “We begin teaching them how to read chord charts with lyrics,” Coyne says. “They start to learn some of the mixing sides when we mix the group together.”

iPad Band has performed at school concerts, sometimes on its own and sometimes as a backup band for the choir. The band has even collaborated outside of the music department. “One of our concerts featured our iPad Band performing, our chorus performing, and our art department did live art,” Coyne says. “We did ‘99 Red Balloons’ [by Nena], and the art students painted [pictures of red balloons] live.”

Musicians of Tomorrow

iPad Band and music technology coursework have inspired students to continue with music in middle school and beyond. “We see students from the iPad Band continue into middle school, and they’ve joined the band program,” Coyne says.

McCorkle recalls one student who became interested in music production. “[He asked] us every day if we [were] going to use GarageBand,” McCorkle says. “He wants to be a music producer.”

Because Sanders is a magnet school, it feeds into about 13 middle schools. Petry has received positive feedback from administrators at many of those schools about the use of technology in students’ development.

“What I hear from middle school principals is that students are prepared in being independent, accountable, creative and collaborative with each other,” Petry says.

Though music is an auditory phenomenon, the use of technology has helped students engage with it visually as well. “For kids who are visual learners, they can see right then what they’ve done and how it lines up,” Coyne says. “The kids who you thought were going to struggle with the comprehension of it, they’re the ones who are like, ‘Let’s do it again! I want to keep going!’”

For Petry, a STEAM approach to music relates to his core mission of keeping students engaged and giving them opportunities to learn. “There are kids who never really liked music, but now they’re making jingles or doing iPad Band,” he says.

In the end, learning math, science, art and music together lead to a more well-rounded student. “Music isn’t just about music,” McCorkle says. “It’s about making you a better person.”

Dealing with Difficult Band Parents

Written by Sarah Lindenfeld Hall on July 31, 2020. Posted in Teaching Tips. 1 Comment on Dealing with Difficult Band Parents

Michael Stone has experienced interpersonal conflicts from both sides of the podium.

Now band director at Bourbon County High School in Paris, Kentucky, Stone remembers when he was a teen and his own mother regularly argued with his music teacher over topics as simple as the timing of meals during band trips.

“My mom and my band director did not always see eye to eye,” Stone says. “She was usually one of those upset parents. I learned a lot watching my band director deal with my mom.”

Band directors work daily with students as well as with parents. Sometimes that level of togetherness can spark disagreements — between parents and directors and among parents themselves — that require finely tuned conflict-resolution skills.

Here’s what band directors should keep in mind when dealing with difficult conversations and relationships with caregivers.

Listen and Reflect

Listen before getting directly involved in a situation, says Tim Trost, director of bands at Ayala High School in Chino Hills, California. “Let them air their grievances,” Trost says. “Stay calm. Don’t get emotional. And don’t fire back because that will escalate the situation more.”

No matter what, bite your tongue. “Sometimes you just want to blow up and go off,” Trost says. “But you can’t. As a teacher, you have to remain calm and professional.”

Once you know all sides of the story, you’ll be in a better place to come up with a solution that both parties can agree to, Trost says.

While feeling defensive is human nature when your policies are questioned, self-reflection is vital, says Kathy McIntosh, director of bands and music department head at Troy (Ohio) City Schools. When she was a young band director, McIntosh spent a lot of time reflecting on whether various questioned policies were fair.

Now, three decades into her career, she’s fielded concerns about everything from chair placement and grading policies to drum major auditions. McIntosh recommends reaching out to trusted parents, mentors and professional groups to vet decisions that are causing concerns.

“Even if parents don’t like my policies, if they know that I’ve at least listened to what they’ve said and taken their thoughts into consideration, even if I don’t agree with them, at least they know they’ve been heard,” McIntosh says.

Hold a Meeting

Stone needed to handle several dust-ups with parents during one regional competition. Two parents didn’t like the mess students left. Another was angry she couldn’t sign out her daughter early. And other adults were drinking alcohol, violating school rules. During a different contest, parents were upset with each other after students were roughhousing.

After both cases, Stone held a meeting to hear the concerns and lay down the law.

Before meetings like these, Stone writes a script to cover all points. And once the meeting starts, he takes control. “I walk in and don’t let anybody else say anything at all,” he says.

Stone treads carefully between being bossy and informative. “Even when I’m trying to be in that authoritative role, I still treat people with respect,” he says.

Regular meetings with booster groups and their executive boards can also be used to head off concerns before tempers flare up. “Sometimes, if there’s an issue that needs to be brought up, we’ll bring it to the executive board, and we’ll discuss it and come up with a solution,” Trost says.

Let Time Heal Some Wounds

Sometimes parents may not see the big picture — until later. Once after a subpar performance, Stone, then an assistant band director, listed the missteps to the students. All seemed fine as they headed back to the band room, but one parent pulled Stone and the head band director aside to complain about Stone’s critique.

Stone let him say his piece, but the parent was still angry when he left the office and didn’t volunteer for some time afterward. Eventually, he changed his tune. “Once he started seeing the growth in the performance quality throughout the season, he came back to me, and he said, ‘I understand what you were saying now,’” Stone says.

Find Your Allies

Some band parents will always have your back. “It’s really important to make sure that you have a handful of band parents who are 100 percent on your side about everything,” Stone says.

The booster president for Stone’s band regularly resolves parental concerns before they ever reach him. The complaints have ranged from conflicts between students to how Stone addressed a musician.

In other cases, band directors should seek guidance from school administrators, especially if they are young teachers who are getting pushback from much older parents. “The administration probably has a little bit of a pulse on the community and what’s going on,” McIntosh says.

Consider Compassion

Parents are the glue that keeps a marching band operating. “Without the parents’ support, we couldn’t do all the things we do here at Ayala High School,” Trost says.

Conflicts, misunderstandings and differences of opinion can happen for a variety of reasons. But often, says Stone, parents are simply passionate about their children and the music program. That’s why Stone’s mom, years ago, became so vocal about his band experience.

Those memories help temper his reactions when working with his students’ parents. “I have to realize that [band parents] just care,” Stone says. “And when I look at it that way, all these parents are like my mom. They just care.”

Pick the Right Drumsticks and Mallets

Written by Frank DiMaria on July 31, 2020. Posted in Percussion.

A percussionist’s gig bag brims with sticks, mallets, brushes, keys, heads and tape. When choosing the implements to include in their arsenal, drummers have important factors to consider.

Wood, Metal or Synthetic?

The most important factor is a drumstick’s composition, says Dennis DeLucia, percussion instructor and member of the Drum Corps International, Percussive Arts Society and World Drum Corps halls of fame.

Players have a variety of options like wood, metal or synthetic compounds. Because drums are a collection of metallic and skin surfaces, the implements used to strike those surfaces must be unbiased in their tactile feedback, says Tommy Igoe, drummer, educator and author.

Wooden sticks, long a favorite of most players, provide the neutral tactile feedback that drummers seek. By far the most popular wood choice is hickory, which allows the drumhead to respond at all dynamic levels, Igoe says.

Some drumstick manufacturers market and sell metal sticks. Igoe is not a fan. “Just cross them off your list,” he says. “Never use metal on a drum set or any drum.”

One school of thought suggests that metal sticks will improve a player’s strength, but that idea is a travesty, Igoe says. DeLucia agrees, saying he never considers them.

Although most players avoid metal sticks, there are some interesting wood stick made with a metal tip. “I’ve seen my students use this type of stick to go quickly from a snare drum to a cymbal and/or triangle in some multiple percussion and contemporary band literature,” says Sherry Rubins, senior lecturer and coordinator of the percussion program at the University of Texas at San Antonio.

Synthetic drumsticks last forever but are horrible to play with, Igoe says, because they do not offer a player the tactile feedback of a wooden stick.

Some sticks are fashioned out of wood, then chemically treated with a liquid plastic. This process renders a more durable stick but adds weight. “Most people, if they use them at all, use them as a warmup stick,” DeLucia says.

When band directors have a choice of wooden or nylon beads, they should explore the nylon-tip model. “If I were a high school band director, I’d buy nylon-tip drumsticks because they last longer than wooden-tip drumsticks,” Igoe says.

For Quick Changes

Drummers playing in wind and percussion ensembles need to fill their gig bags with a variety of sticks and mallets, Rubins says. Some literature requires percussionists to switch from one stick to another quickly during a performance, so sticks that perform double duty are invaluable. “There are some sticks that are a marimba mallet on one end [with] a round, wooden end on the other,” Rubins says.

No player should be without a good set of concert sticks and an implement with both a soft end and a beaded end. Players also need an implement for toms and one for intricate parts on the bass drum.

Variety is not limited to indoor ensembles. Marching snare drummers should also have a number of implements in their stick bags. They should carry two sets of marching sticks as well as a set of brushes. Some marchers like to carry a set of concert sticks, which are typically shorter and thinner than marching sticks, DeLucia says.

The Right Tool for Each Player

Drumsticks are typically categorized by a letter and a number, such as 7A or 5B, to indicate weight and diameter. Historically, “A” models were drum set sticks, “B” were concert sticks, and “S” were for street, or marching, use.

“While that nomenclature still exists with some manufacturers, there are also many variations and ‘artist models.’ You must read the description of the stick, so you can choose a pair that matches the style, student and instrument,” DeLucia says.

A common problem is when students use sticks that are too large for the context in which they’re performing, Igoe says. For middle schoolers and students with smaller hands, Igoe recommends a 7A stick, which is 15.5 inches long and has a diameter of .540 inches.

DeLucia agrees. Students ages 9 to 11 should use sticks that are short enough and light enough for them to handle. Players in the same drumline can vary in the size of their sticks. “You need to find a stick that works best for each individual player.”

Igoe encourages band directors to listen intently to the sound of the drums in an ensemble. If they’re not getting the sound they want, the students are using sticks that are too large, he adds.

“I want those band directors to feel empowered to recommend that 7A or 5A stick,” Igoe says. “They’ll notice a more pleasing sound immediately rather than what can be an ugly sound coming off the instrument when the implements are too large.”

Larry Williams Encourages Representation

Written by Elizabeth Anderson Lopez on July 31, 2020. Posted in DEI.

“The world of musicians is small,” says Larry Williams, a French horn performer and teacher.

“The orchestra world is even smaller, and [for] those who play the French horn, [it] is even smaller. When it comes to Black French horn players, I know every one of us.”

Williams is half kidding but is very aware of his status — and his power. “I’m used to being the only person of color in an orchestra or sometimes one of two or three,” he says. “I came to the industry knowing that would be the case.”

Williams is involved in two projects to help change the orchestral landscape. He is the principal horn player for the Black Pearl Chamber Orchestra (since 2009), where he also serves on its board of directors, and the Sphinx Symphony Orchestra (since 2004).

Black Pearl is “a shared experience of being Black and Latinx orchestra players,” Williams says. “Over the years we’ve networked and created opportunities for each other. It strives for diversity and inclusion in classical music.”

Williams appreciates other minority artists who came before him. “I understand if it wasn’t for some serious road pavers, I wouldn’t be allowed to play the French horn,” he adds. “I focus on how I can impact the next generation of horn players and create opportunities. I’ve figured out how to be authentic and be a change agent. I’m in a position now to try to open doors where I can.”

The Sphinx Symphony Orchestra, part of the Detroit-based Sphinx Organization, also wants to boost diversity in orchestras. Williams explains that the orchestra is made up of top professionals around the country, all Black or Latinx, who perform one weekend a year to support the young Black and Latinx string soloists competing at the Sphinx Competition. The professionals also teach master classes, deliver lectures as well as promote pieces by Black and Latinx composers. “It’s a very rewarding experience,” he says.

Practical Tips for Traveling with Students

Written by Christopher Ferrell on July 31, 2020. Posted in Teaching Tips.

One of the most rewarding parts of participating in school music programs is the opportunity to travel. Whether for an invited performance or competition or as a spectator, the memories will last a lifetime.

Just like taking a trip with family or friends, many elements need to be considered in planning and execution. Knowing your students, school, district and community is vital to ensure the best experiences for everyone involved.

The Value of Traveling

Traveling provides enrichment for students in authentic performance practice as well as in real world cultural connections. Although today’s digital environment allows valuable virtual experiences, there simply is no substitute for just being there.

Travel can also improve recruitment and retention of students as well as reinforce the music program’s visibility in your school and community. Experiences for students are tangible and can be a rallying point for community

Where Should You Go?

In choosing destinations for student travel, be sure to consider the cost/benefit ratio in your decision. For adjudicated events, be sure that the feedback and quality of experience for the students are top priorities.

Prepare students and parents in advance for the level of expectations and talk about the meaning and benefits of healthy competition. If attending a parade, concert presentation or other exhibition event, consider location, audience and the visibility of your ensemble along with cost for students.

Often, pairing the main event with recreational or sight-seeing opportunities can increase participation and add chances for students to bond and form lifelong friendships.

Making informed and careful choices regarding your destination and itinerary can significantly reduce obstacles and enhance the quality of experiences for directors and students.

The Planning Stages

After choosing a destination, create a timeline. Depending on the location, size of group and type of activity (major televised parades, for instance), you may need to plan for up to a year or more. Establish milestones in your planning to ensure that funding goals are met, communication with students and parents is frequent and clear, and all required forms and information are gathered.

Consider using a reputable tour company that has experience in student travel. Its staff can provide invaluable services and advice during the planning and travel.

Be sure to explore options for trip insurance. Note any deadlines regarding deposits and cancellations and clearly communicate those with your students and families.

Decide if the trip is optional or mandatory for students. Performances and competitions usually require a minimum distribution of parts or instruments. In the case of marching band, you may require every member.

Funding

If your program has a booster club, ask the group to help raise funds for student travel. Often, it has more freedom for collecting money than school system channels.

If funding is routed through the school system, be sure to know all the rules and regulations regarding fundraising before getting too far along in the process.

Consider provisions for students who are unable to contribute financially. The benefits of their participation are worthwhile to pursue.

Types of fundraisers vary dramatically but finding one or two that work best for your program and community would be better than constant solicitations. These could include business sponsorships, car shows, “taste of ” food events, silent auctions and many others.

When raising funds, be specific in your purpose. Telling the community why you are raising money and giving them a specific target will encourage more people to participate or donate.

With proper planning and careful consideration, student and professional travel can be an invaluable part of the complete music program experience. Now get out there and have fun!

Letter to Myself: Travis J. Cross

Written by Travis J. Cross on July 31, 2020. Posted in Master Educator Collective.

Dr. Travis J. Cross is a Yamaha Master Educator and a Professor of Music and Director of Bands at the University of California, Los Angeles.

Below, he writes a letter advising his younger self to always do right and to seek opportunities to grow and stretch as a musician and educator.

Dear Younger Travis:

Dr. Travis J. Cross during his college years Welcome to your first year as a teacher. You are unusually lucky to start your career at an exemplary high school with a thriving band program, strong parental support, abundant resources and an amazing senior colleague. You’ll learn a lot living in Minneapolis, a great American city with two full-time professional orchestras, two classical radio stations and a vibrant theater scene. You’ll only be a short drive from your wonderful former teachers at St. Olaf College and even closer to the University of Minnesota and its many musical offerings.

Even with those advantages, the next few years will be incredibly challenging for you, and that’s okay. Four years of college and three months of student teaching aren’t enough to prepare anyone to succeed in this profession. I urge you to seek out opportunities to stretch and grow as a musician, teacher and person.

See and hear as much great art and as many world-class performers as you can afford. Attend other high school and college band (and choir and orchestra) concerts. Join a community band.

Befriend other inspired music educators. Observe their rehearsals and invite them to yours. Share meals, drinks, rides to concerts, video reviews, ideas, frustrations, techniques and repertoire. Play recordings of your ensemble for the best musicians you know and take their advice about how to solve problems they hear. Bring your college band director to your school, even when you’re afraid you’re not doing everything as well as you could. Why wait until you can already do everything to ask for help?

While you push yourself and your students to do better, remember to exercise patience and think strategically. Whether in your program or within yourself, some things change quickly, some change slowly, and some never change — or the effort required is disproportional to the result.

Dr. Travis J. Cross with L.A. Cityscape behind him The one thing I wish I knew when I started teaching is that no rational argument, however well-reasoned or explained, will prevail on a person acting irrationally. Though sometimes it’s important to be right — and it’s always important to do right — spending hours writing the perfect email to explain why someone’s child wasn’t placed in the top band, assigned the solo, selected as drum major or why the music festival is more necessary than the winter formal usually fails to make a difference or costs more than it’s worth. Instead, invest your time and energy in what you can actually improve — for example, yourself.

If you lead with love for music and your students as well as work really hard, you’ll find a lifetime of joy and fulfillment. Now go practice the piano and learn some alternate clarinet fingerings!

Best,

Travis in 2020

SupportED 2020v5n2 cover with Larry Williams

This article originally appeared in the 2020N2 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Q&A with Principal Jim Kuzma

Written by Marcia Neel on July 31, 2020. Posted in Q & A.

Dr. Jim Kuzma, the principal of Rancho High School in Las Vegas, Nevada, fully credits performing arts for many of the school’s achievements.

During Kuzma’s tenure, the school’s graduation rate has grown by more than 40%, and the number of Advanced Placement tests administered has more than doubled.

Even though the school is located in the poorest ZIP Code in the state, it has a thriving arts program with almost 37% student enrollment. Chamber groups within Rancho’s band were invited to perform at The 2019 Midwest Clinic International Band and Orchestra Conference and the 2020 Music for All National Concert Band Festival. (See Case Study: A Music Program Succeeds in the Inner City about the Rancho High School band.)

Q. What music programs are offered at Rancho High School currently? How many students are enrolled in your various performing arts programs?

A. Our performing arts department includes band, orchestra, choir, mariachi, ballet folklorico, dance, theater and theater technology. Our total school enrollment is 3,243, and we have an enrollment of 1,198 students in performing arts.

Q. How were you able to increase funding for staffing, facilities and materials over the years to offer such a comprehensive program?

A. Principals in the Clark County School District have been fortunate to enjoy relative autonomy in regards to their school budgets. That flexibility allowed us to make decisions concerning Rancho’s staffing, scheduling and budget that prioritized providing a variety of opportunities and experiences for our students. We offset other school expenses through grants and other funding, so that the remaining budget could be used to support fine arts and other programs.

Q. What have you discovered about the value of music education since becoming the principal of Nevada’s largest high school?

A. I have been in education since 1984 and have worked at six schools in three states. A common denominator that I have discovered is that students in music programs typically perform better in school.

When I arrived at Rancho in 2009, we had a band program with 47 students. We had a part-time orchestra teacher who spent two periods per day at our school. The choir was on the brink of extinction with only 15 students. Our mariachi program was the only one that was growing. In 2010, Rancho was designated as a “persistently low achieving” school by the state of Nevada.

Rancho was chosen to be the first high school to undergo turnaround in the state. I have witnessed countless schools that attempt to improve academically by throwing large sums of money at remedial programs. In many of these cases, there is very little gain.

Our approach to turning around Rancho was different. We started by revisiting Maslow’s hierarchy of needs, placing emphasis on “sense of belonging.” The performing arts provide an excellent venue for students to be part of something truly special and to create that “sense of belonging.”

So far, that strategy has worked well. Our graduation rates have steadily climbed from 54% to more than 96%. The number of Advanced Placement tests administered has increased from 443 in 2011 to 1,131 in 2019. We are now designated as one of Nevada’s Shining Stars Schools.

Investing in performing arts has paid off with tremendous dividends. It is no coincidence that the academic improvements that Rancho has experienced over the last 11 years have paralleled the growth and successes of our performing arts programs.

Schools embarking on the turnaround process should take a hard look at enhancing their performing arts as well as other programs that offer students opportunities and experiences prior to investing additional resources in academic remediation.

Q. How has Rancho’s music education program inspired you personally?

A. As a young person, I studied piano for seven years. I understand the time, commitment and discipline required to master an instrument. As a principal for the last 19 years, I learned early on that without great teachers, it is impossible for school improvement to take place. My standard operating procedure at Rancho has been to hire the best teachers and find ways to say “yes” to whatever they ask for.

Fortunately, I struck gold when it came to performing arts teachers. Roberto Lopez and JuanJose Cortez (Mariachi), Karen Rzendzian (Orchestra and Choir), Clint Williams and Max Feld (Band), Jacqelyn Guzman (Ballet Folklorico), Tommie Baravong (Theater) and Natalie Dey (Dance) make me look smart every time their groups perform. The relationship between the rebirth of our music education programs and the improvement as a school are directly linked. I attend almost every performance or concert, and I frequently am brought to tears when I recall what it took to get here.

Q. Given the current socioeconomic status of Rancho High School, how are students able to participate and succeed in your programs? What would you recommend to principals at similar schools?

A. Our school is located in the poorest ZIP Code in the state. All our students get free breakfast, lunch and supper. Asking the families of our students to contribute hundreds of dollars toward performing arts expenses is not an option.

There is no reason why our students should not be able to participate in performing arts at the same level as students in more affluent areas. Our instructors are judicious when organizing trips. They don’t travel just to travel, but instead they give special consideration to the overall impact of a performance or festival. We ask that the groups participate in fundraising, and we look for opportunities for student groups to raise money.

We also welcome community support and are so grateful for the many individuals and organizations that have stepped up to support our programs over the years. One example is the Wynn Resorts, which made a sizable donation to our mariachi program a few years ago, so that our students could perform at the Lincoln Memorial in Washington, D.C. When an opportunity like the prestigious Midwest Clinic in Chicago presents itself, we find a way to make it happen.

For schools that are in a similar position, I would suggest that they examine their priorities and have all decisions reflect those priorities. We know that our priority is providing opportunities and experiences for our students, often by way of the performing arts, so it is not uncommon that we forego certain niceties in order to make this happen.

Q. If you could expand your music program even further, what would you include that is not currently available to students at Rancho?

A. Part of what I would like to see in the future is more [interaction] with our feeder middle schools. I learned at the Midwest Clinic this past December that it is a common practice for high school music instructors to work directly with 6th grade students in beginning music classes. I think this would increase participation as well as improve the overall quality of the program.

Q. From your perspective, why is music important to humanity?

A. Music and dance have always been part of the human experience. It would be difficult to imagine a world without music. Music is present during times of celebration and in times of mourning. It connects the past, present and future.

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with, and what would you discuss?

A. I want to have lunch with the person who will eventually replace me as principal. I would discuss the importance of staying the course and continuing to focus on providing opportunities and experiences for all the students at Rancho High School. Hire the best teachers available and support them.

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education?

A. Music education introduces students to accountability. When a student does not practice in a performing arts setting, it is clear to everyone. If a student misses a math question on a test, only the teacher and student know.

With the push for more STEM and increased scores on high-stakes tests, it may seem logical to place less emphasis on performing arts. But that would be a mistake. Music education is life-altering and can change the trajectory of a young person’s life. Much research has been done to link mathematical reasoning to music. In the end, the students inclined to take music classes will also engage in STEM classes and score higher on high-stakes tests.

On a personal note, I have seen firsthand the benefits of music education and its impact on our campus. Our music programs provide students with a “sense of belonging” as well as numerous opportunities and experiences that they would not have otherwise. Eliminating access to music programs would deny students access to elements of the culture and history of the human race.

Embrace Failing

Written by Savy Leiser on July 31, 2020. Posted in Teaching Tips.

At Sanders Memorial Elementary School in Land O’ Lakes, Florida, faculty and students embrace failure.

The school has adopted a principle called “failing forward,” which encourages a fearless approach to improvement. “You never truly fail unless you give up,” says principal Jason Petry.

Ryan McCorkle and James Coyne, co-teachers of the school’s music program, advise other teachers not to be afraid of challenges. “You will fail — you will fail once, twice, three times, four times,” Coyne says, “But as soon as that one thing goes right, it will push you to the next level.”

With the launch of iPad Band in 2016, McCorkle experienced one of these failures. He asked students to bring in devices from home, and they brought all different kinds of handheld devices, from Apple products to Androids. When the devices were incompatible, Coyne and McCorkle realized that they would need to reserve a set of iPads for this group.

One way to embrace failure is to start small and improve slowly. Sanders began by giving individual devices to students in higher grade levels at first, then expanding to the younger kids. “Once you expand into the lower grades, you’re growing students,” Petry says. “By the time they get into 4th and 5^th grade, you can expand it even more.”

A cultural acceptance of failure has taken pressure off of students. “When we first opened, the 5th graders were like, ‘We’re failing, and we’re mad, and we’re not doing well!’” Petry says.

However, students are now open to new challenges. A combination of rubrics, formative and summative assessments, small-group work and optional test retakes help students step outside their comfort zone.

Timeless Lessons from Larry Williams

Written by Elizabeth Anderson Lopez on July 31, 2020. Posted in Teaching Tips.

“Being a 21st century artist is different than when I went to school,” says Larry Williams, a French horn performer and teacher.

“Being focused on one thing was pretty much demanded to be successful. Now [musicians] are expected to do multiple things and do them well.”

Williams encourages students to be entrepreneurial. “You need to know how to create opportunities for yourself,” he says. “We have so many good French horn players. … It’s a ‘who-you-know’ world. Isolating yourself in a practice room isn’t a good way to make people know you exist and want to work with you.”

Williams also cites personality, along with performance, as a factor for how students can make themselves more marketable. “Do people like sitting next to you in a section?” he asks. “What else do you bring to the table?”

However, Williams reminds students that sharing all the details of their lives in today’s social media era can work against them. “I warn students to take care when using social media,” he says. “I don’t tell them what to post, but I do tell them to be aware. I say, ‘You’re going to come across someone you want to impress someday, and you have to be cognizant of that. If you’re ranting about a peanut butter sandwich for 15 days straight and come to me interviewing for a position, I don’t know if I can deal with that every day.’”

Williams teaches another timeless lesson: Be respectful. For example, he encourages students to do some basic research on people and culture if they have the opportunity to tour abroad. “You’re not just representing yourself,” he says. “You’re representing your ensemble, your country and your culture, so it’s really important to be aware of that. You don’t need to be a scholar, but learn what people value, how they are similar and different from you. That shows respect, which has opened some doors really quickly for me.”

Williams experienced that concept firsthand when he participated in a cultural exchange while performing with the Peabody Symphony Orchestra in Russia after the Cold War. “We ran into some people who clearly didn’t want us there,” he remembers. “They didn’t know about Peabody or our orchestra. They just knew we were Americans. Showing them respect goes a long way to get people to trust you. Then when you get to the music, it’s business as usual.”

Practice Effectively: Go Slow to Go Fast

Written by Dr. Brad Meyer on July 30, 2020. Posted in Teaching Tips.

Two of the most beneficial tools to help students learn music more quickly and with a higher level of quality are slow practice and gradual increases of music difficulty.

Many young musicians focus on learning music quickly, which can develop a strong sense of motivation. However, the drive to learn quickly has some downfalls. As music educators, we must help our students learn to practice more efficiently and effectively — and that means going slow to go fast.

Extremely Challenging Music

Many students pride themselves on moving to solos that require new skillsets, advanced techniques or superior dexterity. Students enjoy learning challenging pieces because it provides them with a sense of accomplishment. However, many students do not realize that progressing to significantly harder solos requires much more time in the practice room and more attention to detail than before.

There are two ways to resolve this problem. The first is to give students pieces that are just slightly more challenging. I also recommend that new pieces be in a completely different style/genre so there is a clear sense of change as well as in difficulty level. Oftentimes, students will bring in a piece (let’s call it “Piece X”) that they want to play. You know that it will take them at least four to five months to learn Piece X. I recommend using your students’ enthusiasm to create a long-term goal for them. Instead of immediately moving them to Piece X, tell them to work on one or two pieces in between where their skill level currently is and where Piece X needs them to be. I call this the “stair method” and tell students to envision the stairs leading to the top of a football stadium. All those individual stairs make it easy to reach their ultimate objective through steady, gradual progress.

Another way to tackle Piece X is to break it into several smaller solos. Most pieces have three to four large sections, so treat each one like a separate solo. Work on one large section at a time, and do not let the student move to the next section until the first one is performance ready. This process allows students to take their time, which results in learning the music well and playing with high quality. The student will not be overwhelmed by the length of Piece X and can focus on the basics of music such as pitch, rhythm and dynamics. Too often, students wait to learn dynamics until they have learned the pitches and rhythms of a piece. This works against students because it reinforces the idea that dynamics are not important. Lack of dynamics is one of the most cited problems in student performances at solo and ensemble competitions.

Practicing Too Fast

When students first enter college, many of them will consider a piece impossible because of the written tempo. This all-too-common occurrence reminds me of one of the most valuable lessons I learned as a freshman in high school. The senior section leader at the time told me that “every piece is easy if you take it slow enough.” This taught me that I could play anything if I take it at a slow enough tempo — usually half tempo or slower — to fully understand the rhythms, pitches and dynamics of a piece.

Many students believe practicing at a significantly slower tempo means they will never be able to play the piece at the written tempo. This is not true. What students need to understand is if they do not turn the tempo down to where the piece is easy to play and understand, then they will never build the essential foundation needed to perform the piece well when they get it to tempo.

I define the foundation of every piece of music as pitch, rhythm and dynamics. If a student cannot master all three with consistency (approximately four out of five times) at the tempo they are working at, then they should move to a slower tempo (approximately 15-20 bpm).

Example: Recently, I worked with students on “2” from Jacques Delécluse’s “Douze Etudes,” which is a snare drum solo marked at 100 bpm. Students usually drop the metronome to around 70 bpm when they first start practicing, but even at that slower tempo, they struggle to achieve quality ruffs, and they usually stumble over three bars — mm. 20, 24, and 30. (Side note: We use Rob Knopper’s sticking guides for “Douze Etudes,” which is why some of the students struggle with m. 20.)

It’s important to mention that those three bars are significantly more challenging than the rest of the piece. So, students often struggle with those bars at 70 bpm, while they play the rest of the piece rather well at that tempo. Students think that if they slow the metronome way down for those few bars, they will never be able to play them at the written tempo when performing the entire solo. It is crucial to show them that if they turn the metronome way down (somewhere around 40 to 45 bpm), those three bars become easy. I make students play one of those three troublesome bars three to four times in a row. If they play them with a high level of quality, I bump the metronome up by 5 bpm. I repeat this process (unless they stumble at a certain tempo, then we will work at that tempo or a couple of bpm slower) until we reach about 90 to 100 bpm. This total process usually lasts only about 10 to 15 minutes. During this short period of time, students realize that something they thought was impossible to play at a certain tempo is not the insurmountable challenge that they had initially thought. This type of extremely slow practice with small, incremental increases in tempo is one of the most valuable and effective methods of practicing challenging sections of music.

Learning Too Quickly

The last problem I want to look at is when students learn music too quickly. This is somewhat of an expansion on the first section of this article, “Extremely Challenging Music,” but it takes a slightly different perspective.

I find that students often learn too quickly when there is a barrier or track-style curriculum. Students see that if they can pass a piece, they get to move on to the next portion of the track. The problems is that the focus becomes getting through the track rather than learning pieces well and absorbing the different techniques, styles and challenges that a piece has to offer.

I find this usually happens when a piece is marked as an “etude.” The first thing I recommend doing is to reorient your students’ way of thinking about music by talking to them about what an etude is. An etude, in my opinion, is a small piece of music. It is not meant to advance a small skillset, but instead, is a short piece of music that gives students the opportunity to be extremely musical and expressive without having to learn a lengthy solo.

Example: I usually encounter this scenario when students start to work on multi-percussion solos for the first time in their sophomore year at Stephen F. Austin State University. When my students think of multi-percussion, they typically envision huge set-ups that look like Terry Bozzio’s drumset or pieces that are aggressive and exciting like Iannis Xenakis’s “Rebonds.”

So, when my students start on a piece for two toms that’s only a page and a half long (Michael Udow’s “1” from “The Contemporary Percussionist”), they tend to either rush through it and play wrong rhythms, stickings and dynamics, or they get disheartened because the think the piece boring. That’s when I perform the piece and show them how exciting, theatrical and musical a piece for two toms can be. Hopefully, they will realize that there are many small steps they need to take before they can attack the challenging pieces they yearn to play.

I remind my students that percussionists do not start playing Andrew Thomas’s Merlin as their first four-mallet piece. There’s a reason why everyone knows Mitchell Peters’s “Yellow After the Rain” because it is a great piece of music that is appropriate for percussionists just starting out on four-mallet marimba. I add that I love hearing performances of “Yellow After the Rain” when it is played well with expression, dynamics and musicality. To prove it, I show them Jisu Jung’s fantastic performance of “Yellow After the Rain” on YouTube. I would much rather watch her impressive performance of this less technically challenging piece over someone playing Joseph Schwantner’s “Velocities” above tempo and poorly.

Slow but Sure

Going faster isn’t always better. When it comes to many aspects of learning and performing music, speed can hinder students from reaching their maximum potential. As music educators, it is our duty to show them how important slow practice and the gradual advancement of musical difficulty will benefit them in the long term.

I use these three quotes about speed with my students. I hope these quotes will resonate with your students like they do with mine.

“There is more to life than simply increasing its speed.” — Mahatma Gandhi
“We don’t have to be fast; we simply have to be steady and move in the right direction. Direction is always going to trump speed.”
“It is a mistake to think that moving fast is the same as actually going somewhere.”

This article originally appeared in “Bandmasters Review,” The Texas Bandmasters Association, April 2017 issue.

The United Sound Method for Private Lesson Teachers

Written by Yamaha Staff on July 30, 2020. Posted in DEI.

Inclusion is at the heart of United Sound, a peer mentoring program that provides musical performance experiences for students with special needs (called New Musicians).

The United Sound method was created for use in a school setting, but the same training can be used by private lesson teachers.

Below are training videos that showcase United Sound’s program and resources.

Please note: These videos were created for students participating in United Sound programs in public schools around the country. We hope that the concepts will help shed light on working with students with special needs, but we acknowledge that private teachers’ experiences might vary greatly.

The United Sound Program

In this program overview, you’ll see the relationship between Peer Mentor Abby and New Musician Jessica develop and grow during the school year.

If you’d like to reflect on your own teaching while watching the video, download this worksheet. United Sound suggests thinking about the key themes of “Empower,” “Communicate” and “Modify” as it applies to each clip.

Parents’ Perspectives

Parents of New Musicians express how United Sound has positively affected their children in this video.

Teachers may find it helpful to reflect on:

What moment in the video did you find particularly interesting or surprising?
Have you had experiences with parents that were negative? How could these interactions be different with different instruction?

Curriculum and Teaching

In this video, United Sound founder Julie Duty explains how to utilize the United Sound methodology to create an inclusive environment for New Musicians, Peer Mentors and all band students.

While watching the video, reflect on how you might implement some of United Sound’s methodology in your teaching. You may find it helpful to download this worksheet to help you dig deeper on the key themes of EMPOWER, COMMUNICATE and MODIFY during the video’s pause-for discussion sections.

Pause #1: Which elements of Empower, Communicate and Modify did you see in these two classrooms? Do you think this type of celebration is more about Communication or Empowerment?
Pause #2: Think about your private lesson environment. What is one change that you could make to create a “no-fail” environment for your students?
Pause #3: What did you see that was positive in the student’s teaching? What could he have done better?
Pause #4: Do you think it’s appropriate to include “down time” in a private lesson? Could intentionally off-task moments increase the productivity of the rest (say, 25 minutes) of your lesson time? Beyond “chatting” about your day, what is one idea that you could add to your lessons to enhance the environment for a student with special needs?
Pause #5: Do you have students who struggle with traditional notation? Would you be willing to modify notation for them?
Using a single word or phrase, what is your biggest takeaway from this video?

United Sound Font Tutorial

This video shows you how to install and use the United Sound font from Finale (filmed during the ABLE Assembly at Berklee College of Music in April 2019).

You can download the Finale font here. You can download Finale font flashcards here.

Now, you’re ready to use the Finale font to write music in modified “food” notation. Good luck!

Sound Off for United Sound

Parents, students, teachers and administrators strongly endorse the United Sound program.

“United Sound has provided a new and powerful way for our daughter to communicate and given her more confidence when she does.” — a parent
“The campus-wide benefits we have received from this program are immeasurable. It’s a win, win, win for everyone involved!” — a principal
“This experience has reinforced to me the amazing power of music to reach a child in ways that classroom learning cannot. Our New Musicians and Peer Mentors have all grown as musicians, but more importantly, they have grown as humans, forging a common bond through the creation of art and beauty.” — an orchestra director
“United Sound’s real purpose is to create lasting friendships.” — a student

If you would like to learn more about United Sound or if you are interested in setting up a program at your school, visit the United Sound website.

Anatomy of a Home Theater Speaker

Written by Eric Thies on July 30, 2020. Posted in TV & Movies.

Achieving home theater bliss is almost entirely dependent on speakers. But there’s so much jargon, so many form factors. Two-way, three-way, crossovers, tower speakers, bookshelf speakers, subwoofers, sound bars … what does it all mean?

Here are the answers to these questions — answers that will help you achieve great performance and find the right speakers for your home theater.

Basic Speaker Components

The basic components of a speaker are:

– Drivers. There are three kinds of home theater speaker drivers: tweeters to reproduce high frequencies; mid-range speakers to reproduce vocals, dialogue and most instruments; and woofers to reproduce low frequencies — bass and “feel” frequencies such as rumble. Whether a speaker is two-way or three-way depends upon how many drivers it has. A two-way speaker will typically contain a tweeter and a woofer, while a three-way speaker contains an additional driver to handle mid-range frequencies.

In the illustration below (a cross-section of a three-way speaker), you can see the tweeter driver on top, a mid-range driver below it, and two woofer drivers on the bottom.

– Crossover. This is a device installed inside the speaker cabinet that routes the different frequencies that make up a sound to the appropriate drivers.

– Cabinet. A boxed speaker will have a cabinet that houses the drivers and crossovers. This cabinet additionally affects the overall sound quality of the speaker based on the materials used and cubic volume. In-ceiling and in-wall speakers typically use the wall cavity as the “cabinet.”

Home Theater Speakers vs. Music Speakers

Will any speaker work in a home theater system? The short answer is … not really. A typical stereo speaker designed for music has a different intention than a home theater speaker. The intent of a music speaker is to disappear and give you the feeling that you are in a concert hall or live performance — in other words, it’s designed to create a soundstage that seems bigger than the box that houses the speaker drivers.

A home theater speaker is meant to do the complete opposite — it is intended to be directional. We want to feel that Top Gun fighter plane roar from the front left of the room to the rear right of the room as it moves across the screen. We do not want those speakers to “disappear” … well, perhaps visually we do (we don’t want them serving as a distraction), but in terms of audio, we want them to be present at specific locations within the room.

Another important factor that distinguishes a home theater speaker from a music speaker is the design of its front face, called the baffle. Music speakers tend to offer a wider baffle to help create that wide soundstage, while home theater speakers benefit from a narrow baffle to create more directionality.

The Importance of Consistency

Speakers come in a variety of shapes and sizes. Which form factor is best for you?

Before we get into the nitty-gritty of this, I’d like to make the recommendation that each speaker in your home theater system be from the same manufacturer and have at least the same general characteristics for consistent tone and quality. This will ensure that the Fast and Furious muscle car sounds the same as it circles you from speaker to speaker. You don’t want it to roar like a high-performance vehicle in the front channels and chug like a go-cart as it moves to the side and rear speakers.

Tower Speakers

The pinnacle of performance is typically found in a floor-standing “tower” speaker like the Yamaha Soavo NS-F901. These offer full-range performance, amazing dynamics and incredible clarity. If they’re a little outside your budget, Yamaha NS-777 speakers are a great alternative.

Yamaha Soavo NS-F901.

Yamaha NS-777.

Bookshelf Speakers

What if your room cannot support the physical footprint of five or seven tower speakers? In that case, your next best option is smaller bookshelf models like the Yamaha NS-333, perhaps paired with a NS-C444, which is a bookshelf speaker that’s specifically designed to handle the center channel — a channel that normally carries mostly dialog.

Yamaha NS-333 bookshelf speaker. — *Yamaha NS-333.*

Yamaha NSC-444 bookshelf speaker. — *Yamaha NSC-444.*

Bookshelf speakers can be used to carry the left and right front channels as well as acting as rear surrounds. If used as rear speakers, they can either sit on stands or in a cabinet. A set of bookshelf speakers can give you great quality sound in a smaller footprint, although there is some sacrifice when shrinking your cabinet size. When you move from a full-range three-way speaker to a two-way bookshelf speaker, you are going to lose the bottom octave and the part of the soundtrack where all of those great chest-thumping effects lie — things like rumbling tanks, explosions and planes.

The Subwoofer

So how do we get that back? The answer is simple: Add a subwoofer (or two). The Yamaha NS-SW100, for example, is a great option for a typical large family room. Keep in mind that bass travels until it hits a boundary. If you have a home with an open floor plan, you have a lot of volume to fill. A dinky subwoofer is simply not a great option in a room like that.

Yamaha NS-SW100 subwoofer. — *Yamaha NS-SW100.*

Wireless Speakers

Wireless speakers allow you to create a surround sound setup without the bother of having to run speaker wires around the room. Instead, it uses Wi-Fi to send audio signal from appropriately equipped AV receiver such as the Yamaha RX-V685, which is MusicCast-enabled. (MusicCast is the Yamaha wireless multiroom audio solution, and its family of products includes not only speakers and AV amplifiers but sound bars and turntables too.)

Yamaha offers two wireless speaker options: the MusicCast 20, and the larger MusicCast 50, both of which incorporate unique designs (different from the bookshelf speaker) due to their need to be versatile. You can pair two MusicCast 20s together to serve as rear left and right speakers or use a single MusicCast 50 as a rear surround speaker. These speakers can also be easily moved to different rooms altogether (even out on your patio!) so you can listen to stereo music throughout your whole house.

A pair of Yamaha MusicCast 20s.

Yamaha MusicCast 50.

The Sound Bar

And then there’s the ubiquitous sound bar. This is a very popular option as it is cost-effective, easy to incorporate into any room, and solves a big problem of the generally really poor quality speakers in most of today’s flat panel TVs. A great option in this category is the Yamaha YAS-109. This all-in-one sound bar has built-in subwoofers and offers DTS^® Virtual:X™ simulated surround sound as well as Yamaha Clear Voice technology for dialog enhancement — it can even be voice-controlled by Alexa. It’s meant to be a simpler version of a full-blown surround system that is both affordable and easy to implement into any system. No, it doesn’t offer the full range of sound that you will get with a great floor-standing or bookshelf speaker system, but a sound bar is a great solution to improve the sound on any TV.

As you can see, there’s a lot to the anatomy of a home theater speaker, and a lot to consider. But armed with this information, you’ll be able to make an educated choice when it comes to selecting the right speakers for your system.

Check out these related blog posts:

How to Recreate the Movie Theater Experience at Home

Building the Ideal Home Theater

The Difference Made by Speaker Driver Materials

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 1: Starter System

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 2: Intermediate System

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 3: Advanced System

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 4: Luxury System

Read other articles in our AV Technology Spotlight series.

Click here for more information about Yamaha home theater speakers.

Click here for more information about Yamaha subwoofers.

Click here for more information about Yamaha sound bars.

Pop/Rock Chord Voicings, Part 2

Written by Jerry Kovarsky on July 27, 2020. Posted in Keyboard How-to. 2 Comments on Pop/Rock Chord Voicings, Part 2

In Part 1 of this three-part series about playing pop and rock keyboards, we explored using inversions to connect your chords, as well as the use of basic passing chords. Now let’s add some interesting colors and movement to those concepts.

Adding the Second

Adding a note a whole step above the root sounds great on most chords, and since that note is the second tone in both major and minor scales, it’s called a second:

Notation showing C major and C minor scales

You can add a second to a full triad, or replace the root with it:

Note: The last two measures show the inversions of both root position voicings.

This works well for many of the scale tone chords, but not all. Basically, if the added second note (called an “add2 voicing”) occurs in that particular key or scale, it will sound good, so it will work for all the scale tone chords except the third and seventh scale tone chords (E minor and B diminished in the key of C). Here’s an example that creates a nice melodic movement for each of those chords by moving from the added 2nd back to the root for each chord:

This next example gets a little more fancy with the movement between the root, the second and the third. Pay close attention to keeping the right hand notes sustained as notated — it’s a bit like a Hanon exercise in that regard:

A variant of the add2 voicing is to leave out the 3rd of the chord, and just play the root, 2nd and the 5th. This is called a sus2 chord, and it provides a really nice color. In the example below, it’s used to move into the major key triads, where it works best:

Sixths and Suspended Fourths

Another good tone for adding color to a triad is the 6th — a whole step above the fifth step of the scale. Anywhere that a song calls for a major triad, you can opt to make it a major sixth chord instead. But you can also use it to create movement, by switching between the fifth and the sixth in your chord voicings (see bars 3 – 8 in the example below):

If this next example sounds familiar, it’s because this is a common way to voice chords when playing classic rock and roll tunes from the ’50s and ’60s:

The sixth tone also works well within a major seventh chord. And let’s not forget about the suspended chord (i.e., the suspended 4th) as a way of adding movement. Here’s a comping figure that makes use of all these concepts:

And here’s an example that keeps moving the C, D and E notes across the changing chords:

Advanced Voicings

Putting the third in your left hand creates a nice open-sounding voicing for the Sus2 chord. This can be done whether your bass player plays the root or uses the third instead:

Here’s that technique applied — perfect for a pop ballad approach:

This example employs the same type of voicings as before, but with a few cool twists. In bar 2, the moving figure uses both the 2nd and the 6th, and in the second half of bar 4, the chord is arpeggiated downward. Rolling through a chord voicing is a great way to add movement without being too busy: I do it again in the next bar with the inversion of the sus2 voicing, adding the B note for more color. Bar 6 has an especially effective chord voicing: Instead of just playing a G over an F bass, I add the C above, which creates a little tension that resolves when the triad moves down to the F major. This came from playing the same notes I had just arpeggiated, giving the performance good continuity and structure.

Starting in bar 7, I wanted a little more power, so I added the octaves in the bass, and then doubled the G in the Csus2 voicing on beat 4 so my right hand chords could get a little bigger, and have good voice leading throughout bars 8 – 9.

Voicing In Fourths

As we saw earlier when we inverted the Csus2 voicing, you can attain a nice open sound by building your chords with 4ths in your right hand. Here’s an example of how you can move things around using a mixture of 4ths and some triads. Note that I finish each chord’s climb with a colorful voicing that adds a little “crunch” on top:

I wouldn’t go too crazy using this idea in pop and rock settings, but used tastefully it can add some sophistication and color to your playing. Next: Putting it all together.

All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Five Benefits of Joining School Orchestra

Written by Ken Dattmore on July 23, 2020. Posted in Strings How-to.

There are many good reasons for having your child join their school orchestra, including the fact that it’s just plain fun! But more importantly, learning about music and gaining achievements both personally and as part of a team can be the most satisfying part of a child’s journey into adulthood.

Let’s take a look at five of the benefits your child will gain from taking a seat in the orchestra.

1. Improved Social Skills

One of the biggest positives will be the connections your child makes with other students. This development of social skills happens as each student makes new acquaintances with the other members of the orchestra. Some of these interactions may develop into friendships that last a lifetime.

2. Learning Teamwork

From the day a child joins an orchestra, they become part of a functioning team that has clear goals. They learn that by playing their part, they can add to the greater goal of making fine music. This builds a strong skill set that they can use going forward in their education and beyond, into their future work and family interactions.

3. Developing a Sense of Responsibility

Joining an orchestra gives a child the responsibility of taking care of their instrument … and orchestral instruments are among the most fragile. A child learns from the start to treat their instrument with respect, not just to prevent damage but to keep it clean and in good playing condition.

It also teaches children the responsibility of learning and overcoming difficult tasks as their progress advances from beginner to skilled player. The commitment to practicing and improving can translate into their other school studies as well as helping them to cope with future life challenges.

4. Improved Cognitive Skills

Learning to read music and making an instrument do what your child wants it to do (and sound the way they want it to sound!) offers benefits to eye-hand coordination as well as increased cognitive skills such as concentration and visual recognition. Studies indicate that this tends to give kids who participate in orchestra programs higher success in other learning areas like math and reading. It also offers them the ability to increase their creativity, which opens other opportunities over the course of a lifetime — whether it be in the arts, sciences or business world.

5. Increased Enjoyment

Adults who participate in musical activities as a child often reap a lifetime of benefits as they get older. Some find increased enjoyment and relaxation by continuing to practice their instrument, or by just listening to the music that they once played. They become lifelong enthusiasts and share that passion and appreciation with others around them. Some musically talented children choose to remain actively playing, even if not as a professional. Amateur chamber groups and community orchestras offer a great deal of joy and camaraderie.

Of course, there’s even a chance that your child will decide to make music a career choice. In addition to professional orchestra players, there are lots of options, including soloists, arrangers, music educators, artist managers, performance venue management … even in the medical field as a music therapist. Whatever path your child ends up following, there’s no question that joining school orchestra can help pave the way to a better, more fulfilling life.

Is your child still not sure if this is something they’d like to do? Ask them to watch this video:

Click here for more information about the ways Yamaha can help your child’s musical journey.

How to Hide the Wires in Your Home Theater

Written by Eric Thies on July 21, 2020. Posted in Audio How-to. 3 Comments on How to Hide the Wires in Your Home Theater

You’ve made up your mind: It’s finally time to build your home theater nirvana — a place where you can spend many happy hours binge-watching your favorite TV shows and movies. You have studied all of your hardware options and subscribed to every major streaming service, and now you are ready to be wowed with immersive sound and stunning 4K image quality.

There is only one problem: How do you actually interconnect all this stuff so that your home theater doesn’t look like a spaghetti factory?

Nobody wants to see their dreams come to a crashing halt because of clutter or objections from a significant other, so let us give you a helping hand.

Tools of the Trade

When it comes to hiding wiring, the main rule of thumb is this: Always look for the path of least resistance. If you have an attic above your home theater room or crawlspace below, take full advantage of these open spaces. If that’s not an option, you will either need to open your walls to run wire or hide wiring under your baseboard and/or carpeting as it travels around the room. There are lots of tools like these to help you fish wire under carpets and through walls. If you are not the handy type, plenty of companies make paintable wire covers to hide unsightly bundles of cables. These are super easy to install.

Here’s a summary of some of the creative techniques for making those pesky wires disappear:

– Take advantage of any gaps that may already be there. Since trim elements like crown molding and baseboards run around a room, take advantage of the small gaps they can provide (i.e., behind the molding or underneath the baseboard). If the room does not have either, you can install a foam crown molding or foam chair rail to create a raceway for wires. This is actually a pretty easy DIY project and adds to your décor to boot.

– Run wiring underneath carpets, throw rugs or runners. There are all sorts of options for flat wire that can be fished underneath a carpet so as to not create an annoying bump in your rug.

– Use wall-mounted flat speaker wire. There are speaker wires on the market that can be installed onto your wall almost like a drywall repair — you simply affix the very thin wire to the wall with adhesive, then apply some joint compound to integrate the tiny bump of wire into your wall for a smooth finish. A little sanding and paint, and voila! Bonus: This type of wire will even work under wallpaper.

– Add some cord concealers. These nifty rigid raceways are a great way to hide a bundle of cables in a neat conduit that can be stuck to a baseboard or wall with dual-sided tape. They are easy to install and paintable. There are also flexible cord concealers that can be used behind your gear as it travels between shelves.

– You can never have enough zip ties! Zip ties are the installer’s best friend — kind of like duct tape to a handyman. They provide a great way to neatly bundle and manage cables. You can also use zip ties creatively to route cables neatly behind cabinets and between shelves.

– Utilize coves and light strips. If your room has a lighting cove or some other kind of design element that houses strip lighting, take advantage of these spaces to hide wire. LED light strips are very low wattage and can be very close to low-voltage wire without fear of causing a fire.

– Break down the barriers. It may sound like a desperate measure, but as a professional installer, I can tell you this is often our only viable option for hiding wires. It doesn’t actually take a lot of effort to open up a wall or ceiling and fish wires around a room — something that becomes even easier if you have an attic above or crawlspace below. All you have to do then is find someone to come and patch the holes you needed to make.

Here’s a link that will help you find some of the wire-hiding products mentioned above. Now let’s take a closer look at the specific kinds of wiring interconnections you’ll need to make in your home theater.

Video Wiring

Hopefully you have selected the perfect size TV and mounted it at the correct height on the wall, so that your line of vision when seated in your favorite chair lands smack dab in the middle of the screen. This is a good start! If you are not lucky enough to have a power outlet behind your TV, there are some great user-installable outlet relocation solutions such as this one.

Most modern-day TVs have built-in apps, but if you want some of the additional features offered by an Apple TV^®, Amazon Fire Stick or Roku^®, those connections are simple: just plug them into an available HDMI^® port on your TV (or use an HDMI extender cable if necessary). Most of these devices are small enough to slide behind a TV so that you don’t have to run wires anywhere, even if an HDMI cable is needed.

If you want the fastest speeds possible, it is best practice to use a hard-wired Ethernet connection from your router or network switch into the back of the streaming device — even if it means running cabling in your basement or ceiling, or going through a wall. (Ethernet cabling can be run for over 300 feet if necessary without signal degradation.) If a hard-wired connection is not possible, the device should work fine wirelessly, as long as it is paired correctly to your Wi-Fi network and you have a strong signal in your home theater. (Click here for some tips on optimizing Wi-Fi.)

For best video quality, DVD and Blu-ray Disc™ players should be connected to your TV with HDMI cables instead of analog ones. Bear in mind that HDMI cabling should be as short as necessary and should never exceed 50 feet in length or you run the risk of signal degradation.

Audio Wiring

As TV manufacturers strive to reduce the bezel around the screen, the biggest casualty is sound quality — you simply cannot fit good speakers into these new designs. So add a sound bar! Even the most basic sound bar will provide audio that’s miles above the speakers built into a TV, but if you’re looking for a great one, consider the Yamaha MusicCast BAR 400. This audio gem even comes with a wireless subwoofer to provide that magical low-end rumble of a rolling tank or the Millenium Falcon. The connections for these devices could not be easier: simply use a short cable to route the TV audio output into the sound bar input (and, from there, to a subwoofer, if you have one) and you’re ready to rock.

Yamaha BAR 400 sound bar with wireless subwoofer. — *Yamaha BAR 400 sound bar.*

If you are a home theater aficionado, you’ll definitely want to take advantage of the amazing surround tracks that accompany most modern movies and TV shows. This requires at least a pair of rear speakers for a basic 5.1-channel system (five main speakers and the “.1” subwoofer.) You will hear a lot of opinions on where rear speakers should be placed, but one thing is for sure: They should never be in front of you. Instead, they should be positioned off to the sides of your listening area or behind you, angled in. In a commercial cinema these are typically on the side walls but your particular room may not allow that. If you need to use ceiling speakers for the rears, this can be a pretty acceptable alternative.

*Yamaha MusicCast 20 wireless speakers.*

Of course, running wires around a room can be a hassle, despite all the great tools described above. An even better solution is to add a pair of wireless surround speakers such as the Yamaha MusicCast 20, which are compatible with all current MusicCast-enabled devices. Simply place a pair in the back of your room to get those amazing fly-over effects you crave. These speakers are available in black or white and are also compatible with music streaming services and your mobile phone so you can use them for music listening too. Bear in mind that even though you do not need speaker wire to connect these speakers, they will still need power, so you will need a power outlet somewhere in proximity. Failing that, you can always use one of the user-installable outlet relocation solutions mentioned earlier in this article.

Adding an AV Receiver

If your budget can stretch a bit further and you desire a higher level of audio performance, you should consider using a full-featured AV receiver like the MusicCast-enabled Yamaha RX-V685. AV receivers (AVRs for short) act as both the central hub and “brains” of your system, though installing it will require a little planning.

First, determine where you will place the AVR. Even if it has some wireless capability (as the RX-V685 does), there will still be some video and/or audio wiring required … and since all your home theater wires will be connected to the AV receiver, its location needs to be carefully considered. For example, you’ll need to connect it to your TV with an HDMI cable — the shorter the better. In this kind of setup, your streaming devices will also have to move to the receiver location and will connect directly to the HDMI ports on the back of the receiver (instead of your TV).

Second, map out all of your endpoints. Your center channel dialogue speaker will go immediately below your TV. The left and right speakers will go on your TV wall or in your entertainment center, and your goal is to create an equilateral triangle between you (at your seated location) and each speaker. If you failed geometry in school, this just means that the distance between the left and right speakers should be the same as the distance between you and each speaker.

Placing the subwoofer is a lot easier since low frequencies are not very localized, meaning that it’s hard to hear where they come from. Your sub should simply go somewhere along the front (screen) wall of your room, preferably in a corner so you can take advantage of the energy those adjacent walls help create. For a truly chest-pounding audio experience, consider using two subwoofers and place one in each corner.

If you want to ratchet up the immersion factor, you might want to make the move to a 7.2-channel system, which requires two additional speakers mounted in the ceiling or on the rear wall of your room. (The “.2” is just an indication that there are two subwoofers in the system, although you can actually run a 7.1 system with a single subwoofer … but .2 is definitely recommended.)

The ultimate surround set-up is Dolby Atmos^® — the holy grail of movie sound. This adds two or four speakers in the ceiling to a 7.2 channel setup to fill the gap between the side and rear surround speakers. If you use two ceiling speakers, these are typically slightly forward of the seating area. If you choose four speakers, then you would mount an additional pair in the ceiling between your seating area and the back wall.

Once you’ve decided on all your speaker locations, you need to choose the wire you’ll be using to connect them. I recommend a minimum of 16-gauge, but 14-gauge or 12-gauge wire will perform better. (Bear in mind that if you intend to run the wire through walls or in the ceiling, you will need wiring that is CL-rated for safety.) In addition, unless you’re using wireless subwoofers, you’ll need to run line-level cables from the AV receiver to each sub.

Now it’s time to start unboxing your AV goodies and get your room wired up for an amazing home theater experience … without any unsightly clutter!

Check out these related blog articles:

How to Recreate the Movie Theater Experience at Home

Building the Ideal Home Theater

Top Five Things You Should Know When Hiring an AV Installer

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

10 Guidelines for 1st-Year Directors

Written by Dr. Brad Meyer on July 20, 2020. Posted in Teaching Tips.

Being a first-year music teacher is challenging. A big hurdle is applying the knowledge you gained during your formal education while building practical knowledge, which is usually learned on-the-fly once you enter the workforce.

Below are 10 helpful tips from my experience that I hope will help make your first year of teaching a little easier, more effective and more time efficient, so that you will not have to figure things out “the hard way” as I did.

1. Take Care of Yourself

Eat healthy, sleep at least six to eight hours every night and exercise regularly. Taking care of yourself takes time, but the time you put into keeping yourself healthy will allow you to stay more mentally focused and physically energized throughout your day.

Make time for yourself. Plan free time and vacations the way you schedule your rehearsals. Free time helps you recharge and re-energize, and it will help you avoid burnout at your job.

2. Communicate Safely and Effectively

Learn which way students and parents receive communication best (GroupMe, Remind, etc.) and use it. Take the time to become proficient in whatever method of parent/student communication your school uses, and use it consistently – whether it is weekly Charms emails, regular Google Classroom announcements or nightly Remind101s. Always remember that group communication is much safer for you as an instructor than one-on-one messages, which can lead to the appearance of inappropriate communication or behavior. A good rule of thumb for any written communication is to never write anything you would not feel comfortable discussing in a deposition.

3. Schedule Wisely

Use calendars (and calendar apps) constantly, consistently and effectively. Your iCal/Google Calendar/Fantastical 2/Calendars 5/Outlook/Timepage should look like a piece of art. Schedule in classes, rehearsals, meetings and travel times. Color coordinate your calendars (personal vs. professional vs. school-related), and put in deadlines for submissions to your local music education association, deadlines for competitions, grant/funding deadlines, etc. Many calendar apps can be shared with students/parents/administrators/colleagues to help avoid rehearsal/performance conflicts.

4. Make Lists … Lots of Lists

Use a list-making or task-management app or program (Evernote/Trello/Todoist/Microsoft To Do) that you can access on your computer and phone and create separate categories to keep track of your various responsibilities. I have separate categories for current concert repertoire, future concert repertoire, future chamber ensemble repertoire, conference clinic topics, article topics, possible future clinicians, potential students (with all their contact information and family names), instrument needs, to-do lists and ensemble goals (1-year, 3-year, 5-year, and 10-year). Having your lists organized and easily available at all times will allow you to record ideas and any “ah-ha” moments no matter where you may be. Tracking ideas, goals and tasks will help you and your ensemble progress more quickly. The more you can plan ahead for your ensembles and yourself, the more direction and focus you and your program will have.

5. Learn to Delegate

In the beginning of your job/career, you will need to do a lot of things yourself, but the more you can delegate small tasks (restringing marimbas, loading cases, setting up chairs and stands, etc.), the more attention and energy you can give to big-picture items. Establish easy-to-follow systems for how you want your program to work. Also, relying on student leaders can be an effective way of getting tons of small tasks accomplished while giving students a hierarchy that allows them to advance among their peers.

6. Don’t Let a Bad Lesson/Rehearsal/Concert Ruin Your Day

Always try to learn what you could have done better from negative situations, but do not bring your work home (especially the negative aspects) because this will only hurt you and your relationships. Everyone needs to vent and doing so in small amounts infrequently can be healthy. However, try to avoid consistently discussing only the negative aspects of your job. This will result in you having a negative outlook on your job. Use friends and family as a healthy sounding board, but then move forward. Focusing on the negative can easily become a living feedback loop of self-pity.

7. Be Students’ Mentor, Not Their Friend

Students need a mentor much more than another friend. It is difficult to put students’ long-term goals over their immediate need for validation and attention, especially if they are having problems at home or in their personal lives. Focus on helping your students/young adults learn how to be dedicated, have a consistent work ethic and overcome hurdles (emotionally, mentally and physically) so they can become successful, independent adults.

Never give out your personal phone number or email to students and be aware of your school and district’s rules regarding text messaging and social media contact with students. This is important to protect you from any damaging ramifications.

8. Share Your Group’s Success

If you do not promote your group, who will? Use all the available types of media (newspapers, local radio/cable stations, blogs) and social media (your band’s or school’s Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, etc.) to get your program noticed in the public’s eyes and ears. Make sure you are an advocate to all shareholders. Reach out to administration, colleagues, parents, and past and future students to share news of the growth, success and accomplishments of your program. Many schools/districts have media outlets that can be harnessed for your program’s benefit as well.

9. Be Kind to Everyone

It is easy to keep in mind the people you are directly involved with – students, parents, colleagues, administrators, etc. However, some of the most important people to your program’s success are the ones who work behind the scenes, sometimes known as “support staff.” Be kind and show respect to the transportation director, custodial staff, maintenance department, IT people, administrative assistants, etc. These people are the backbone of any great organization and can either make your day run smoothly so you can stay focused on music-related aspects of your job, or they can make your day a logistical nightmare. Being kind to everyone is just a good rule of thumb for life, but it can be easy to overlook the support staff who make your day-to-day life easier.

10. Find a Mentor

Almost every young ensemble director has huge aspirations, and it can be easy to let your personal goals overshadow the actual needs of your program. Find an older, knowledgeable mentor, a seasoned veteran music educator who can advise you and help you avoid obstacles. Not only can you toss ideas around with your mentor, but you can get advice about practical things like how to juggle deadlines for marching competitions, find funding for band trips and schedule marching band rehearsals (that often involve numerous administrators and athletic coaches). Fortunately, most musicians and music educators enjoy helping each other. Your “rival band” might have a director who could be your most helpful mentor because “rival programs” often do similar activities because you are in the same district with the same deadlines and policies.

This article originally appeared in “Bandmasters Review,” The Texas Bandmasters Association, Volume 20, Issue 2, pp. 21-22.

Positive Mental Health Strategies

Written by Dr. Brad Meyer on July 20, 2020. Posted in Self-Care.

The beginning of the school year is a good time for music educators to create a better routine for good mental health for themselves and their students.

Below, are several strategies that come from mental health research. While I am not a mental health specialist, many of the suggestions below come from professionals who have significant experience and research in the field of mental health. Much of what is presented below applies to high school and college musicians, but the concepts can be applied to other ages and professions.

Statistics

According to the National Alliance on Mental Illness (NAMI),

75% of lifetime cases of mental conditions begin by age 24.
One in four young adults between 18 and 24 have a diagnosable mental illness.
Students cited depression and anxiety among the top impediments for academic performance in 2011.

Therapy/Counseling

Therapy is a great way to improve numerous aspects of both personal and professional life. Many schools and colleges offer free or significantly reduced rates for therapy/counseling. Historically, there has been a stigma associated with therapy, and it was only sought out by a narrow segment of the population. But now, going to therapy is not only accepted but encouraged.

Seeing a therapist on a regular basis helps people learn how to manage anxiety and set reasonable goals; it also helps them deal with situations when their brain turns small issues into big issues.

To locate the health services department at a school, simply type the name of the school along with “mental health counseling” into a search engine. One of the first results will most likely list where you can find the mental health center, its contact information and much more.

Goal Setting

People are easily overwhelmed when they are given a huge goal to accomplish over a long period of time, such as the typical senior recital in college. With goal setting, this large goal is chopped up into smaller, bite-sized chunks that are more easily attainable. When a person reaches a goal, even a tiny goal, he or she is more likely to continue onto the next goal with more energy and excitement. Here is an example of how to break down a large goal (40-minute senior recital) into smaller tasks:

End Goal:40 minutes of music consisting of five pieces with three months (12 weeks) until the recital.
Smaller (Biweekly) Goal:Learn one piece every two weeks; reserve the last two weeks for cleaning and “confidence runs.”
Smaller (Weekly) Goal:Break each piece down into two one-week goals; first week to learn the solo, and the second week to get the solo worked up to tempo and cleaned.
Smaller (Daily) Goal:The first solo is seven pages, so learn one page a day and review any material already learned.
Smallest Goal:On the first day, devote two hours to practice the solo. The first page is divided into four small sections, so set a timer and learn one section every 30 minutes.

This breakdown of a recital into biweekly, weekly, daily and a two-hour practice session will focus your efforts to meet the larger end goal. Every solo takes different amounts of time to learn/perfect, and every individual learns at a different pace. You know yourself better than anyone. So when you are goal setting, consider as many factors as possible that pertain to you and your work habits to create a realistic timeline that will lead to a great, confident recital.

The same process can be applied to any task that involves deadlines. When people break down the tasks to meet a big deadline, they feel like they are getting things done and moving toward their goal by completing small tasks on a daily or weekly basis. This idea is similar to how marathon runners think of running one mile 26 times, rather than thinking about running all 26 miles once.

Eat, Sleep and Exercise

Also known as the “Big Three,” eating healthy, getting enough sleep and exercising regularly have all been linked to improving people’s mental health.

I recommend meal prepping at night to create nutritious meals that are easily accessible, so that things like fast food can be avoided.

Consider using an alarm to tell you when to go to bed so you get a good night’s sleep. For example, iPhones have a “Bedtime Alarm,” which can be helpful if you lose track of time at night watching Netflix, playing on the computer or scrolling through social media.

Lastly, schedule exercise into your weekly calendar so that it is not overlooked as something to “fit in when possible.” Everyone is different — some people work out better at night, some prefer the mornings and others mid-day. Try different workout times until you find the one that works best for you.

Reduce/Eliminate Electronics Time

There are numerous articles and studies that say reducing or eliminating social media and other electronics (gaming, video apps/services, etc.) can improve your mental health. It’s difficult to do this because social media and other electronics are specifically designed to be addictive. Netflix’s chief executive, Reed Hastings, said, “… You know, think about it, when you watch a show from Netflix, and you get addicted to it, you stay up late at night. We’re competing with sleep, on the margin. And so, it’s a very large pool of time.”

Quitting or reducing time with electronics can help you get into a regular sleep routine. But it can also boost self-esteem. People use social media as a way to show off the highlights of their day, but they generally do not include the regular, boring and sometimes negative things in their lives. By looking as their social media accounts, you may have negative feelings of self-worth because your life does not seem as amazing as theirs with their new relationship, fancy car, professional achievements, new clothes, etc.

Reducing or eliminating the constant barrage of thousands of people’s singular highlights will help you keep a level head and improve your ability to know what is truly important instead of simply superficial.

Build Your Financial Health

Another major cause of mental anguish is money. With the rise of student debt, it is common for many young adults to feel overwhelmed by financial insecurity.

The best thing to do is to get started with a singular task. Just like preparing for your senior recital outlined above, you can easily get overwhelmed when you just focus on your debt. A common way to get a handle over your finances is to create a budget (income vs. expenses). After that, make smaller, manageable financial goals, such as building an emergency fund by saving $50 a month or eliminate debts one at a time. Then make longer-term financial plans like starting a retirement savings, buying a house or car, starting a family, etc.

There are many great resources about building your financial knowledge. You can start by reading my article “Financial Advice for Young Percussionists,” which was published in the May 2018 issue of Percussive Notes. You can also check out Dave Ramsey’s “Seven Baby Steps” or his “Financial Peace University” (a fee is required).

Time Management

One of the best ways to feel in control of your mental health is to be in control of your schedule. Use calendars (iCal, Google Calendars, paper calendars, etc.) to map out days, months, weeks and even years. Musicians are known to have complex schedules that can vary drastically from week to week, so having a schedule that is constantly updated will give you a sense of healthy control for your mental health.

A detailed calendar allows for planning of academic, professional and personal events. Scheduling times to eat, sleep, relax, hang with friends/family and other personal things will allow you to plan each day to be maximally productive without being overwhelming. Calendars are a great place to put practice times (with practice goals), study times (with study goals) and other things that are not fixed like classes, rehearsals, concerts and lessons.

Do not feel as if you are a slave to your calendar; instead, treat your calendar as a tool that helps you build a great day, every day. Try mixing up your practice and study times to find out what works best. Some people find they practice better at night, but as they grow older, they may prefer the morning. Remember, your calendar/schedule does not have to be the same from day to day.

Lastly, don’t forget to add mental health activities into your calendar, such as therapy, mindfulness practice, meditation, yoga, body scans, etc.

One Thing at a Time

The hardest thing about starting down the road of self-improvement is taking that first step. A lot of change in a short period of time can cause you to abandon the idea of change at all, even though you know it is for the best.

Try taking one thing — therapy, goal setting, time management, “the big three” or reducing/eliminating electronics — and start working on it one day at a time.

Creating a positive environment to improve mental health is a life-long process. There are always setbacks, so expect them, deal with them and learn from them because you will become stronger from these setbacks.

If things get too hard, schedule an appointment with a therapist, talk with a close friend or family member, or if it is a life-threatening emergency, contact the appropriate authority like 911, National Suicide Prevention Lifeline (800-273-8255) or Crisis Text Line (text “CONNECT to 741741).

Everyone needs help from time to time, so make sure to watch out for fellow musicians, music educators and your students by being observant and available to help, even if it is just to listen.

This article originally appeared in Percussive Notes, Percussive Arts Society, Volume 58, Issue 1, pp. 47-49.

9 Strategies to Combat Burnout

Written by Dr. Brad Meyer on July 20, 2020. Posted in Self-Care.

When it comes to teaching and/or performing in the field of music, almost everyone has or will have to deal with “burnout,” which is a mental collapse due to stress.

Oftentimes, people are afraid to discuss mental issues like burnout because many infer that if someone is burned out, then he has lost his love of music. However, that is not the case at all. Burnout is a natural experience in the extreme ebb and flow of being in a creative, passionate and demanding field.

Here are nine ways of reducing burnout utilizing both academic research and from my personal experience.

1. Have a Routine that Includes Quality Rest and Breaks

Musicians often forget to take real breaks because of the relentless nature of their field. Music is inherently something that you can never perfect; it can always be better with more practice. Nonstop practice without breaks and/or rest can result in the law of diminishing returns where the time being spent on a project is more than the benefits gained. One way to make sure you get good rest is to schedule breaks so that they are a mandatory part of your day.

Get consistent sleep. Sleep is one of those things that everyone knows is important, but it is one of the first things that people do less of during stressful times. There have been numerous studies on the detriment of reducing one’s sleep schedule, especially in regard to mental efficiency. (One study is “Patterns of Performance Degradation and Restoration During Sleep Restriction and Subsequent Recovery: A Sleep Dose-Response Study” from the Journal of Sleep Research.) Not getting enough sleep can make the time you are awake less productive. To fix this, go to bed at a consistent time every night and wake up at the same time every morning. When you go to bed, turn off all distractions – do not get on your smartphone/tablet or watch TV. Dedicate that time to trying to relax and falling asleep. In the beginning, you may find yourself lying awake in bed, but if you stay consistent with your schedule, your body will learn that it can shut down and sleep at a consistent hour. Apply these same “rules” to when you wake up. Trying to “catch up” on sleep by sleeping in on the weekends can ruin your sleep cycle by pushing back the time your body is used to being awake, which then pushes back the time your body will want to go to sleep.
Take real breaks. Sometimes when we do get a break, we continue to ruminate on what we should be doing instead of enjoying the break. A good way to take a real break is to remove yourself from the work situation. The Massachusetts Institute of Technology has a resource titled “Tooling and Studying: Effective Breaks,” which offers several methods for making breaks effective, including studying in blocks of time (50 minutes of study/10 minutes for a break), getting up and moving around, scheduling meal breaks, turning off your phone during study (turn it on only during breaks). I recommend that if you are practicing in an office, practice room or rehearsal space, go outside and either walk around or sit on a bench. Be present in your moment outside by experiencing the break. Listen to the sounds of nature (or traffic) or look up and notice the trees, clouds, birds or the people around you. Finding ways to get your mind mentally focused away from the task/job that is making you feel burned out will help you return to the task at hand with more mental energy and concentration.

2. Exercise

It is universally agreed that exercise is good for the body and mind. Developing an exercise routine can help balance hormones in your body and help increase energy throughout the day. Many people have the misconception that working out will rob them of energy that they could have used later, when in fact working out has the opposite effect. Exercise will increase your mental awareness while boosting your level of physical energy for the day, which is why many people recommend working out in the morning.

Researchers have found that “individuals who exercised at least two to three time a week experienced significantly less depression, anger, cynical distrust and stress … and higher levels of coherence and a stronger feeling of social integration …” (from “Physical Exercises and Psychological Well-Being: A Population Study in Finland” by Peter Hassmén, Nathalie Koivula and Antti Uutela). You do not need to become a body builder or an endurance athlete, just enjoy the exertion that will improve your physical and mental health.

3. Rely on Friends

Friends are an invaluable resource when you experience burnout. You can vent to them, cry on their shoulder and use them as a healthy distraction from your current dilemmas. Do not be afraid to share issues with your friends. One of the best ways to deal with difficult issues is to talk through them out loud. When you think through problems in your mind, you tend to focus on issues that would sound preposterous when said out loud.

Talking to someone gives you the opportunity to explain your situation and to get a response you might not have considered. Friends also provide sympathy and laughter. Both of these can make us feel less overwhelmed by the difficulties and stress of being a music educator or performer.

The Mental Health Foundation has a great article titled “Friendship and Mental Health” about how people can utilize their friends to strengthen their mental health and how to be a good friend by listening to others who are having problems/mental health issues.

4. Do Something Completely Different

Some people make music their one and only focus in life, which is easy to do because there are so many ways to become more and more involved in music. However, having a nonmusical activity in your life can give you the mental release you need so that when you return to your musical activities, you will be refreshed and energized.

Consider joining an athletic team, finding a hobby (gardening, painting, wood working, model building, etc.), start exploring new places where you live (hiking, camping, biking, etc.) or something else that is not related to music. The point is to get away from music to stave off burnout so when you return to it, you will have a fresh and open mind.

5. Mental Health Strategies (Mindfulness and Meditation)

Burnout is often fed by negative mental actions like rumination and repetitive “what if-ing,” which can exacerbate problems. The best thing you can do is to learn how the brain works so that you can calm down negative mental responses to stress. Things like mindfulness and meditation are great tools to help you deal with stress at all levels. There are numerous podcasts and books on both of these topics, but one podcast on mindfulness I recommend is UCLA’s Mindful Awareness Research Center’s “Weekly Podcast at the Hammer.”

An additional step in helping create strong mental health strategies is to see a licensed therapist regularly. Charles (Chuck) Bryant from the podcast and video series, “Stuff You Should Know,” is paraphrased as saying, “I’m not concerned for people in therapy, I’m concerned for those who aren’t in therapy.” This is a great slogan for mental health services because it conveys that people who are in therapy are actively trying to get better, while people who are not don’t have the guidance or instruction to know where to start to get better.

Everyone could use a little help from time to time, so do not be afraid to see a therapist/counselor. Even if you feel that you are mentally healthy, it would not hurt to develop new strategies to deal with life’s problems and stresses while they are manageable and before they become overwhelming.

6. Reshape Your Mental Perspective

Sometimes your mental attitude about a task or assignment is the reason for burnout. This tends to be the case with students. Many people view their jobs/work/practicing/assignments as something that must be done so they can move on to the next item at hand. However, this often creates a sense of moving forward for the sake of moving forward.

Instead, focus on the exercise/etude/piece as an opportunity to become better in that moment. It is great to be motivated to progress in your studies/education, but progressing should be a natural part of the learning curve. Viewing tasks as opportunities to get better at certain skills or concepts will be much more fulfilling in the long term, rather than moving through material just to say that you have done it. You often see this with students who run through exercises just to say that they have completed their work instead of doing exercises with a mental focus to become better at a skill or group of skills that is being isolated. A good motto I use is: “Work on the quality, and the quantity will come.”

7. Do Something New and Invigorating Within Music

Many times, we get stuck doing the same types of things over and over in music. If you are known for playing timpani, you might play in orchestras all the time. If you are known as being a good drum set player, you may play in jazz combos all the time. But doing the same thing can lead to burnout.

What might get your “creative juices flowing” is to try something new musically. For example, try playing a different style of music, start a chamber group, research new ways to perform/teach, organize a performance in a place you have never played before or learn a new instrument. As the saying goes, “variety is the spice of life.” Varying your musical activities can help create a renewed sense of meaning and purpose.

8. Play Something Challenging or Easy

If all you do is perform difficult music, the challenge can become the reason why you are experiencing burnout. Just because a composition is touted as being difficult, does not necessarily mean it will be personally fulfilling. Constantly performing pieces like this can make you feel like a modern-day Sisyphus — continually struggling to roll that boulder uphill, just to get there and realize that you have to do it again.

The same is true on the other end of the musical spectrum. If you play easy music all the time, you can feel unfulfilled. This is especially common with percussionists who play regular gigs where the music does not seem particularly varied.

In either case, try pursuing something significantly more musically and/or technically demanding or easy outside of your regular gigs. This new challenge may lead to a sense of renewed musical growth and self-expression.

9. Push Through

Sometimes burnout happens at a time where you cannot stop and take a break to recharge your mental batteries the way that you would like. This can be one of the hardest situations when dealing with burnout. But sometimes you must push through or persist in order to keep your job to pay bills or fulfill a musical obligation where quitting is not an option.

It will be difficult, but you need to stick to a routine that you have developed in the past that you know works for you. Sometimes you will have to plan your day down to the minute and then force yourself to stick to that schedule. Even though it can feel like you are “going through the motions,” utilizing your time toward a goal can eventually give you some sense of direction.

The worst thing you can do in a situation like this is to constantly think about what you have to do. Instead, like Nike’s motto exclaims, “Just Do It!” I have met many people who, when they get overloaded or feel burnt out, spend more time talking about what they need to do rather than just doing those things. Pushing through burnout with a sense of brute force can sometimes help overcome burnout.

On the other hand, pushing through immediate burnout can also lead to long-term burnout. Pushing through can be beneficial when you are in a tough situation, such as meeting a tight deadline. When you complete the task at hand, it can give you a sense of accomplishment or fulfillment that leads to breaking away from feelings of burnout. However, pushing through can also increase feelings of burnout once the task has been completed. Pushing through can be a temporary fix, but it is most likely not a permanent solution.

These nine strategies are not the only ways to deal with burnout, but they are a good place to start. One of these strategies may work for you the next time you have feelings of burnout, but the same strategy may not work the next time. It is important to find different ways of dealing with mental stress because you change throughout your life and how you deal with stress. Just know that you are not alone. Everyone deals with stress and burnout throughout life. Without the difficult times, the great times would not be as great!

This article was originally published in Percussive Notes, Percussive Arts Society, Volume 54, Issue 1, pp. 16-17.

Does Your AV Receiver Need an Upgrade?

Written by Joy Frye on July 17, 2020. Posted in TV & Movies.

Your AV receiver is the heart of your home entertainment system. That means it’s also the gatekeeper. If it’s not up-to-date with the latest technology, you could be missing out on important audio and video advancements and not getting the best experience possible.

Most of us can’t afford to get a new receiver every year. As with cars, it’s important to consider what new features are available, or will be available soon, then decide when it’s worthwhile to buy the latest model. For example, a tailgate that you can open with your foot may not be a priority, but an onboard blind spot warning system might be something you really would like to have.

Let’s take a look at some key features you’ll find in current Yamaha AV receivers so you can decide which might be must-haves for you.

4K, 8K and Ultra HD

Most Yamaha receivers released from 2015 to 2019 support the latest HDMI^® standards for 4K Ultra HD, which is defined as 3840 x 2160 pixels. The latest standard, HDMI 2.1, supports 8K, which has an aspect ratio of 7680 x 4320 pixels.

For comparison, high definition (which was previously the highest standard) is 1080 or 1920 x 1080 pixels. More pixels means greater resolution of fine details with greater contrast, which enables you to sit closer to the screen while still enjoying a clear image. Video that originates in 4K can be downscaled by some AV receivers (including many Yamaha models) and still retain high-definition resolution. Blu-ray Discs™ used to be the only place to find 4K movies, but now it’s much more commonly available, with streaming services like Netflix^® offering movies and programs in 4K. Most TVs are now also 4K.

HDR (High Dynamic Range)

HDR TVs have much more contrast and many more colors than non-HDR TVs, which gives them more vivid, realistic images. AV receivers that support HDR video formats (such as Dolby^® Vision^® and Hybrid Log-Gamma [HLG]) give you a full, high-definition experience with exceptionally realistic and natural picture quality. But don’t forget that, in addition to an HDR-capable TV and AV receiver, you need HDR content to enjoy the amazing contrast and lifelike colors. Luckily, like 4K, many streaming services are now offering HDR content.

eARC (enhanced Audio Return Channel)

A feature called ARC (Audio Return Channel) allows audio to be sent from your TV to your AV receiver through the same HDMI cable that carries the video signal from your AV receiver to the TV. Enhanced ARC (eARC) increases bandwidth, which enables signals from high-res audio (like Dolby TrueHD^® and DTS-HD Master Audio™) as well as 3D surround sound formats (such as Dolby Atmos^® and DTS:X™) to be sent uncompressed, so you can enjoy movie theater-quality experience at home.

Artificial Intelligence

Yamaha receivers were the first to incorporate artificial intelligence with Surround:AI™, a technology that analyzes the DSP parameters for each scene of a movie five times per second — essentially, in real time. By focusing on distinct sound elements (such as dialogue, background music, ambient sounds and sound effects), Surround:AI automatically optimizes the overall surround effect for your home theater, making intimate dialogue-heavy scenes just as engrossing as raging battle scenes.

Whole-Home Audio

No receiver should be an island. If your AV receiver is part of a larger family of devices designed to work together, like Yamaha MusicCast-enabled products, then you’re able to enjoy whole-home audio. Being able to wirelessly share music from a variety of sources to sound bars and speakers in other rooms — even in your backyard — is a music lover’s dream come true.

Voice Control

Chances are you already have a voice assistant in your home, whether it be Alexa, Google Assistant™ or Siri^®. But if you want to ask for music, you’re not limited to talking to your smart speaker. Many modern AV receivers can be controlled by voice too — just ask for your favorite music (or turn the power on and off) without having to hunt for the remote control!

So should you replace your old faithful AV receiver that still sounds great, but can’t take advantage of the latest audio, video and smart home technologies? The choice is yours, but if you already have an AV receiver, chances are you value high-quality sound and immersive entertainment … and there’s no question that the latest features can be very tempting!

Check out these related blog articles:

What’s a Receiver? Part 2: AV

Top Five AV Receiver Features

HDMI^® 2.1: What It Means for Gear and Gamers

The Perfect Pairing: Yamaha MusicCast and Home Automation

Smart Home Integration — From DIY to CI Guy

Enjoy Music Outdoors with Zone 2

How to Use Alexa with MusicCast

How to Use Actions on Google with Yamaha MusicCast

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV receivers.

The Loudness Wars

Written by Pete Lyman on July 15, 2020. Posted in Recording.

I’m often asked my opinion about the so-called “loudness wars.” To me, it’s not a “war” and I don’t have a stance either way. I prefer to make the best-sounding record I can, without sacrificing any quality for the sake of loudness.

Sure, there have been times that I’ve felt pressured to make records louder than I normally would … some of which have gone on to win multiple Grammys^®. I’ve also worked on plenty of records that weren’t mastered super-loud yet were really well-received. But it’s hard to say whether or not some of the projects I’ve worked on would have been as successful without having that loudness push. In the end, it really just depends on the project and what the artist is going for.

Keep It Clean

If the artist’s goal is to make a loud record, it’s important to try to figure out a way to get that loudness as clean as possible. This all starts in the mix phase and can either make or break your ability to push a track to its limits in the mastering stage. For example, most mixing engineers that understand that a track needs to be “competitive” will compress the individual elements in the song so that, by the time it comes to be mastered, that sound is already baked in. On the other side of the coin, if I have a mix come in that I’m trying to push to -6 or -7 LUFS (Loudness Units Full Scale) with transients spiking, I would have to compress the entire mix, which would change the balance of the entire track. There is always a compromise.

To Remix or Not to Remix

I rarely ask for remixes. I’m always happy to give clients feedback on their mixes if they ask for it, but otherwise I usually assume the mix has been approved by the team and is ready to be mastered.

In fact, one of my biggest pet peeves is mastering engineers sending back mixes and asking for new ones without bus processing or limiting. If a mixing engineer uses either of those tools as part of their process, then the mastering engineer needs to deal with that. However, it’s important to be aware of the fact that if a track comes in too hot, it limits (pardon the pun) the amount of processing a mastering engineer is able to apply to the track (which isn’t always a bad thing). I think there’s a common misconception that mastering engineers are supposed to put their fingerprint on every mix and do a ton of manipulation and bus processing, when in fact sometimes our job is to do very little. In fact, one of the biggest parts of our job is to know what a track does or doesn’t need. If I receive a mix that is virtually perfect, then I need to send it back as is. Like doctors, the first credo of mastering engineers should be: “First, do no harm.”

Less Is Always More

My philosophy on making tracks louder can be summed up in four words: “Less is always more.” Use the least amount of tools possible to get the job done. You’ll start getting into trouble when you start stacking twenty different plug-ins on a track. If it already sounds good, all you should need, ideally, is an equalizer and a limiter.

For instance, if you’re using the Steinberg WaveLab MasterRig to master a well-balanced mix, you should be starting with the EQ and limiter modules. Ninety percent of the time that’s going to get the track exactly where it needs to go.

If you get a mix that isn’t quite working dynamically, you can start adding a little compression to get some movement in the song. I think the idea of using compression in the mastering stage is oftentimes approached incorrectly. You should be using it to add life and vibe, not to compress the life out of the mix.

In general, loudness can be achieved using many different tools, including saturation and even sometimes clipping, but the most important one is equalization — something people often forget! You can use EQ to emphasize the areas of a track that your ears will hear first. For example, I might go in and sweeten up the mid-range, or tighten up the low end. EQ can also be a major problem solver if, say, you have a track that has an excessive amount of low or even sub-audible frequencies that need to be rolled off because they are eating up all the headroom.

Be Flexible When It Comes to the Order of Operations

The order of operations is completely dependent on the project. Let’s say you’re using EQ, compressor and limiter plug-ins on a mix. I would typically start with the EQ, then compression, and finally limiting. But that’s not always the case. Sometimes if I really need to compress a track, but want to add some life into it, I might use an EQ to add a high “air” band after compression. This adds back some of the highs that might have gotten sucked out during the compression stage. It’s important to experiment with equalizers both before and after the compression stage, instead of assuming it should always happen in the same flow.

Trust Your Monitors

In general, mastering engineers don’t have multiple versions of speakers, because we’ve spent a ton of resources tuning our rooms so mixes translate as flat as possible. (I also have a small speaker that I occasionally listen back on when I’m printing a “real-world” listening experience, but never for the actual mastering process.) It’s so important to learn your monitors. You should spend hours and hours listening to music you love, as well as music you’ve worked on. That’s the only way you’ll be able to trust them.

Whether you’re controlling your volume from a DAW, or from a monitoring system, having a calibrated level is just as important. You need to understand where your speakers are the flattest and how they are loading your room. The sound pressure level (SPL) at my listening position is usually between 83 and 86dB, C-weighted, but sometimes I’ll crank things up to 90dB to feel the energy and get the room moving. This also helps you understand what’s going on with the low end. However, when I print a final pass, I always listen really low in volume.

Make Sure Your Metering Is Accurate

One of the best things about WaveLab is the metering. The level meter is particularly versatile, because it can be modified to your liking and your scale. And since I’m a vinyl guy, I use the phase scope all the time too. Phase coherence is incredibly important, especially when it comes to low frequency content.

I also really like using the WaveLab loudness and spectrum meters. The latter (both the spectroscope and spectrometer, shown below) can be especially helpful if you don’t have a full-range monitoring system. They provide a perfect way to see what’s going on in the sub frequencies even if you can’t necessarily hear them in your environment.

The key thing to understand is that the loudness potential of a track is largely built in at the mix stage. Once you listen to the mix, you pretty much know how far you can push the track without destroying it — something to be avoided at all costs!

Photograph courtesy of the author.

Check out Pete’s other blogs.

Click here for more information about Steinberg WaveLab.

Silhouette of a man playing piano with the moon behind him.

The Saddest of All Keys

Written by Shelly Peiken on July 13, 2020. Posted in Creativity.

“D minor … is the saddest of all keys, I find.”— Nigel Tufnel

Spinal Tap guitarist Nigel Tufnel grinning innocuously. — *Nigel Tufnel in a pensive moment.*

In This is Spinal Tap, the 1984 mockumentary about a fictional heavy metal band, fictional guitarist Nigel Tufnel proclaims that Dm is not only the saddest of all keys, but that “it makes people weep instantly.” I don’t know about the “saddest” or “weep instantly” parts, but Dm is indeed a sad key.

The idea that key signatures evoke certain emotional responses has been widely accepted by musicologists (and many musicians, too) for literally centuries. Jared H., founder of LedgerNote, posits that all 24 commonly used musical key signatures have a distinct personality. For example, A major is “youthful cheerful,” Bm is “patient and calm,” D major “triumphant,” etc. (Check out music theorist John Mattheson’s full list of keys and their corresponding characteristics here, and Howard Massey’s “Editor’s Corner” blog on the subject here.)

It certainly is a fascinating thing to consider. And to my ears (and I think the ears of most people), if you play pretty much any song in two or three different keys, you can hear a subtle shift in nuance. So shouldn’t we keep that in mind when sitting down to write a song?

Well, I have to be honest: I’m just not the kind of writer who asks herself how I’m feeling in order to determine the key in which I’ll write about those feelings. My hands have an inner accord with my emotions and they fall where they may on the ivories. I trust them. If I’m feeling melancholy, they know better than to aim for G major. Maybe this is due to the fact that they’ve been doing this for so long, they know the drill. That said, when I’m writing on guitar, there are certain keys I default to simply because the fingerings are so easy to play — E or Em, for example. I can just throw a capo on if I need to go higher — one of the things I love about guitar. (Try doing that with any other musical instrument!)

Perhaps adhering to a key’s corresponding characteristics is a more useful tool when composing instrumental music only — that is, when one isn’t also using their voice as part of the writing process. For me — someone who invariably sings while they write — it helps if a key and its tonal center are compatible with my vocal range. Where does my voice sound most expressive? Where are my sweet spots? Of course, singing/writing/demoing in my optimum key isn’t necessarily the best solution if my goal is to get that song covered by a particular artist. If that’s the case, it behooves me to do some research to determine where that artist’s voice shines, then record the demo accordingly.

Which is not to say that an artist only listens for songs they can sink their lungs into; many will connect, even if the recording is in a less than optimum key for them, and then transpose it to suit either their vocal range or the emotions they felt. Take Adele choosing to cover Bob Dylan’s “Make You Feel My Love,” which he recorded in D♭ major — “grief, depressive.” I can only assume that the song itself obviously and understandably pulled hard at Adele’s heartstrings. When she recorded her own version in the key of B♭ major (“hope, optimistic”), it made me cry even more.

Speaking of covers, there are many people who believe that cover songs should always be performed in the key in which they were written — the familiar, accepted and wholly embraced key. I disagree. Isn’t a cover supposed to be a different take on the same song? In fact, I think the ear perks up when it hears a song in a different key with a fresh tonal center.

I don’t doubt that there is some credence to the idea that key signatures evoke certain emotional responses. But must that absolutely dictate how we write? I don’t think so. It’s just not as simple as pairing a wine with an entrée. (Of course, that’s a matter of taste too … ☺)

Like beauty is to the eyes of the beholder, music is — to the ears of the beholder — subjective. And as with most things music, there are no rules, just different considerations to ponder.

(On a personal note, if you haven’t seen “This Is Spinal Tap,” what are you waiting for? It’s required viewing for anyone in the music business. I’ve seen it at least a dozen times and I think I may watch it again tonight.)

Photo by Robert Knight Archive/Redferns.

You can read a new From the Muse blog on the second Monday of every month. Check out Shelly’s other postings.

Seven Things About Chimes You May Not Know

Written by Troy C. Wollwage on July 10, 2020. Posted in Percussion. 1 Comment on Seven Things About Chimes You May Not Know

Orchestral chimes, also called orchestral bells or tubular bells, are a series of tuned brass tubes of different lengths, suspended within a frame by thin wire or cord. These tubes are struck with mallets to produce a sound.

But there’s a lot more to this unique instrument! Here are seven facts about chimes that you may not know.

1. They’ve Been Around a Long Time

Ancient Chinese bronze bell. — *Ancient Chinese bell.*

In early civilizations, the sound of bells was thought to avert danger and other trouble. The Chinese culture used bells of various sizes over 4,000 years ago. In 1978, archaeologists discovered a cache of 65 bronze bells of various sizes in a 1,400-year-old tomb in China, although these bells did not have the rounded form of today’s chimes.

The first bronze bells of a large size were cast in Mesopotamia and Egypt in the 9th century BC. In 1884, John Harrington, of Coventry, England, patented the first clock-chime of tubular bells. It won gold medals at Invention Expeditions held in 1885 and 1886.

Tubular bells as a substitute for church bells were first used by Giuseppe Verdi in his operas Il trovatore (1853) and Un ballo in maschera (1859). Arthur Sullivan is believed to have been the first composer to score for tubular bells, for an 1886 orchestral performance of the cantata Golden Legend. The composer Giacomo Puccini also used them in his 1900 opera Tosca.

2. They’re Used in Popular Music Too

Over the past fifty years, chimes have become increasingly used in pop music. The most famous example is multi-instrumentalist Mike Oldfield’s use of the instrument on the 1973 mega-hit album Tubular Bells (followed in later years by other “Tubular Bells” releases, including Tubular Bells II, Tubular Bells III, The Orchestral Tubular Bells and Tubular Bells 2003).

Tubular bells also appear on Pink Floyd’s The Dark Side of the Moon (on the song “Brain Damage”) and as part of a rally scene in the movie adaptation of the group’s The Wall. In addition, Rush drummer Neil Peart used tubular bells on the songs “Xanadu” and “Closer to the Heart.”

3. Chimes Were Part of the First Sonic Patent

In 1950, the National Broadcasting Company (NBC) filed with the U.S. Patent Office to make their three-note chime a registered audible service mark. It was the first time a “tune” was filed with that office.

Here’s what it sounded like:

4. The Hardness of the Mallet Influences the Sound

A chime is struck with a mallet hammer made of rawhide or a hard plastic. A softer mallet brings out the fundamentals (the lower tones) and higher partials are not so noticeable, making for a darker tonality. When chimes are struck with a harder mallet, the higher overtones predominate, making the sound brighter and more incisive.

5. It’s a What?

Chimes are considered an idiophone type of musical instrument. An idiophone is one that creates sound primarily by the vibration of the instrument itself, without the use of air (as is the case with wind instruments, which are known as aerophones), strings (chordophones) or membranes such as drum skins (membranophones).

An idiophone is designed to vibrate by being struck either directly with a stick or hand (like the wood block, singing bowl, steel tongue drum, triangle or marimba) or indirectly, by way of a scraping or shaking motion (like maracas or flexatone).

6. They Have a Unique Dampening System

A set of chimes is tuned chromatically and arranged in two rows in keyboard fashion, with the back row containing pitches that correspond to the black keys of the piano. The back row of tubes is set higher than the front row to allow the player to play each note with ease.

In the middle of the chime stand is a damper, shown here:

This is connected to a foot pedal by a rod, as shown below.

This pedal affects all the chimes at the same time and works the same way as on a piano. If the pedal is depressed, the damping system does not touch any of the tubes, allowing each to vibrate freely. If the pedal is not depressed, the damper is closed, and none of the tubes can freely vibrate.

7. Chimes Have a Totally Unique Sound

Unlike any other musical instrument, the human ear perceives the sound of a chime as a pitch that is actually one octave below the fundamental. (The pitches written in any given score refer to the strike note, not the note we hear.) Its overtones also depart from the more usual linear set of harmonics, where each is a multiple of the fundamental pitch. Together, this serves to give chimes a unique timbre.

Even within the dense sound of an orchestra, concert band or percussion ensemble, chimes are clearly audible because their timbre is so different from that of other instruments. The initial attack is a short, forceful, metallic sound followed (if undamped) by a long, resounding note in which the pitch of the chime is more prominent. Like all metal idiophones, the notes of a chime decay slowly — that is, they resonate for a relatively long time unless they are dampened.

Click here for more information about Yamaha chimes.

How to Prepare Your Child for School Orchestra

Written by Dale Ramirez on July 9, 2020. Posted in Strings How-to.

For many children, the music classroom serves as their first introduction to playing an instrument. It is an exciting, challenging and beneficial endeavor, and being part of a school orchestra has been shown to increase confidence, decrease stress and improve cognitive function.

But for many parents who are new to the world of music, when your child says, “I want to play violin,” the next steps may not be clear. Let’s take a look at how you can best prepare your child for their first orchestral experience.

Adopt the Right Mindset

The first thing is to make sure you (and your child) know that joining an orchestra is not an easy endeavor — it takes time, patience and dedication to get to a place where you hear improvements in your child’s sound. Frustration is guaranteed, but that’s okay. Everyone goes through the same process when trying to master something new, and learning how to play a violin or a cello is much more than the actual notes. Endless encouragement is needed from you. Walk with your child through this journey by celebrating every step of their success. Did they just learn how to hold their bow correctly? Great! Did they just learn how to play on an open string? Celebrate that. Applaud your child for every little bit of learning.

The important thing to keep in mind is that your child’s first days on an instrument are priming them for a lifetime of music-making. Whether those days are filled with hope and excitement is largely determined by the support they receive. So bolster their inherent musicality by making sure they have fun. Encourage them to play the music they like — even if it doesn’t sound all that great at first — because it will improve the odds that they are enjoying themselves.

Arrange for Private Lessons If Possible

Young boy studying violin with virtual lesson.

One of the big questions that will likely emerge at some point in the course of starting any new instrument is whether or not to take private lessons. In just about every case, it’s a good idea, since these kinds of lessons are designed to promote musical learning in a one-on-one environment.

Beginning books have their place, but they are not able to teach correct technique. Only a teacher can reinforce safe hand and posture positioning, so if at all possible, make arrangements for private lessons to help your child develop healthy habits sooner rather than later.

Choose the Right Instrument

Display of many violins against the wall.

The last piece of the puzzle is choosing the right instrument for your child. There are many different types of beginner instruments, and they often come in several sizes to suit the growing student.

If you are looking for a violin, Yamaha has created a Student Violin Finder that can help you make the best selection. Yamaha also offers student-level violas and cellos. For the young student interested in viola, the AVA5S is the most economical and sturdy option. If your child is looking to learn cello, the AVC5 is a great place to start because of its warm sound and availability in different sizes.

Yamaha AVA5S.

Yamaha AVC5.

Your local music dealer will be able to assist in choosing the right instrument and can also help you explore affordable rental options. Renting is a great way to start since it allows your child to easily move on to larger instruments as they grow, and also enables them to switch to a different instrument altogether if they want to make a change at some point down the road.

Yamaha has created useful resources that explain what parents need to know when their child joins orchestra or band. Click here for more information.

Click here for the Yamaha Student Violin Finder.

Click here to find an authorized Yamaha music retailer near you.

Click here for more information about Yamaha string instruments.

Piles of CDs in their cases stacked haphazardly on a shelf.

Fall in Love with CDs All Over Again

Written by Mike Levine on July 6, 2020. Posted in Music and Streaming.

Do you have a collection of CDs that are gathering dust on a shelf or in a storage box at home? If you’re like most of the music-consuming public, you may have switched over to streaming music services like Spotify^® or Apple Music^® because of their convenience, low price and breadth of offerings.

But while compact discs might seem to be headed for obsolescence, there are actually plenty of reasons to consider dusting off your collection and bringing them back into your music-listening rotation. Let’s take a look at some of the advantages they offer over other types of media.

CDs vs. Vinyl

For some people who are looking for an alternative or supplement to streaming, CDs might make more sense than vinyl, despite vinyl’s recent resurgence. CDs may lack the “hipness” factor of vinyl, but they offer a noise-free listening experience without the hiss, scratches and crackle that are endemic to records.

CDs are also much less delicate than vinyl. They don’t warp, are harder to damage and rarely ever skip. They offer pristine digital audio reproduction that’s more consistent than what you get with vinyl, whose fidelity is highly dependent on the quality of turntable and cartridge in your sound system.

Plus, as their name implies, CDs are more compact than vinyl, so even an extensive collection will take up less space. And if you’ve already accumulated a lot of CDs over the years, repurchasing everything on vinyl will cost a fortune.

CDs vs. Streaming

CDs also have some pluses when compared to streaming services. They deliver uncompressed audio, whereas most streamed music uses data-compression formats that entail removing some digital information to make song files small enough to stream.

True, you won’t notice much difference if you’re listening on your earbuds while walking down the street, or over small computer speakers while in your home office. But most people would probably choose the sound of a CD over that of compressed streaming audio if listening over a typical home system with good quality speakers.

These days, some services (such as Qobuz) allow you to stream uncompressed high-resolution files, but you’ll need a fast internet connection to do so. And for any kind of streaming, you’re restricted to where you have internet service. With CDs, you can listen anywhere, whether or not there’s Wi-Fi.

In addition, CDs come with printed sleeves that are superior to the images provided by streaming services. These also have musician credits and liner notes, which are very hard to find online. If you’re a music aficionado — particularly if you’re into jazz or classical, you want to know who the musicians are on the recording.

Another plus for CDs is that you may have discs in your collection from obscure musicians or bands that aren’t available on streaming services and probably never will be.

Last but not least, CDs can give you the best of both worlds. Using your computer, you can burn them as MP3s (or even in uncompressed WAV format) and put the resulting files into your smartphone or tablet music library for listening on the go, while still enjoying their sound when playing the original disks through your home audio system.

Expand, Revive and Store Your Collection

You can find plenty of online music stores that still sell new CDs, and, since they rarely degrade or scratch, you can also consider buying used collections at significant discounts. You may also have friends or acquaintances who have boxes full of CDs that they’d love to find a good home for!

If your discs are dirty or dusty, you can find kits that provide a CD-cleaning solution and a specialized cloth. You can also make your own DIY disc-cleaning kit with a 50/50 mix of rubbing alcohol and distilled water, and a microfiber cloth. Simply dampen the cloth with your cleaning solution (don’t put it directly on the disc), then gently wipe from the center of the disc outward.

Microfiber cleaning cloth on cd. — *Microfiber is the best type of cloth for CD cleaning.*

Even though CD popularity is not what it used to be, the discs themselves are the same size as DVDs and Blu-ray discs™ (12cm in diameter and 1.2mm thick), so storage units made for those formats will work just fine. Search online for “media storage,” and you’ll find a vast assortment of choices available. You can get freestanding shelf units in myriad shapes, sizes and materials. You’ll find wooden units that look like bookshelves, tall tower units that spin, and even portable cases made of plastic, vinyl or metal that cleverly hold large numbers of discs for their size.

Your Sound System

If you have a home stereo that you’ve owned for many years, it may well already include a CD player. But if you don’t, you can still find plenty of players on the market. If you’re looking for the highest quality sound and performance, consider the Yamaha CD-S1000. It’s built with high-grade components, offers both analog and digital outputs, and can play both standard CDs and higher-resolution Super Audio CDs (SACDs).

If you need an amp too and want to go for premium sound, the Yamaha A-S1200 will complement the CD-S1000 (or any CD player) well. It’s got a cool retro look, but its technology is entirely contemporary. This integrated amplifier produces plenty of power with 90W per side at 8 ohms or 150W per side at 4 ohms, giving you plenty of headroom for loud and clean reproduction of your CDs or other audio sources.

The final touch would be a pair of high-quality speakers such as the Yamaha NS-777. These 3-way floor-standing tower speakers feature 8″ woofers for superior bass reproduction, along with midrange horns and 1″ aluminum dome tweeters. They’re even internally wired with Monster Cable™ to ensure optimal sound quality.

Together, these components make for an awesome CD-listening system, and one which is easily expandable for other formats.

Rumors about the death of the CD format have been greatly exaggerated. Your CDs will continue to offer you a high level of audio performance for years to come. So before you throw out or give away your collection, think instead about making CDs part of your music-listening experience. You may be glad that you did!

Check out these related blog posts:

How to Develop Critical Listening Skills

What is an Integrated Amplifier?

Are Expensive Speaker Cables Worth It?

Click here for more information about Yamaha CD players.

Click here for more information about Yamaha stereo amplifiers.

Click here for more information about Yamaha home speakers.

Small round metal disc held in place against a wooden frame with a metal bracket.

Which TransAcoustic Guitar is Right for Me?

Written by Mac Randall on July 3, 2020. Posted in Acoustic Guitars. 2 Comments on Which TransAcoustic Guitar is Right for Me?

The first time you play a Yamaha TransAcoustic guitar can be a surreal experience. It certainly was for me! A couple of years ago, I was visiting the recording studio of a friend who had just come into possession of an FG-TA model (I’ll explain the differences between the various models shortly). I picked the instrument up and inspected it. To my eyes, it simply looked like a really nice acoustic guitar. That’s what it sounded like too, as I began playing. But with one press of a small button on the guitar, everything changed; that very same instrument now sounded like it was being played in a concert hall, with a lush, almost tangible reverb lingering after each note.

I’d read a bit about the company’s TransAcoustic technology, so I wasn’t completely unprepared for this. But even so, I found myself looking around the room for a hidden amplifier or a wireless connection to a remote pedalboard. Of course, there was none to be found: What I was hearing was coming straight from the guitar’s body. Not that TransAcoustic guitars can’t be plugged into an amp (they can, via a handy jack that carries the signal from an onboard piezo pickup). But the only thing a guitarist has to do in order to access that reverb and an equally lovely chorus effect is to simply play the instrument.

The secret of the TransAcoustic sound is a device called an “actuator” that’s attached to the inner back of the instrument. When you play the guitar, the actuator picks up the vibrations of the body and adds its own — vibrations that, through a kind of sonic translation process, become effects. Knowing this secret, however, doesn’t do anything to diminish the strange magic being produced.

As surreal as that first experience is, you quickly get used to it. And being able to aurally expand the size of the room you’re playing in, with no cables or plugs involved, is a pretty cool trick. But if you want to have that experience for yourself (and I heartily encourage it), you may be wondering where to begin. That depends on where you’re at as a player and what you prefer in your guitar. Here’s a rundown of the six current TransAcoustic models, so you can make a more informed decision.

LL-TA and FG-TA

Standard-size acoustic guitars (also known as Western-body guitars or dreadnoughts) are bright and loud, with a pronounced bass resonance, perfect for strumming out big chords in rock, folk, and country music. Yamaha offers two standard-size TransAcoustic guitars: the LL-TA and the FG-TA. The differences between them mainly come down to the types of wood used and the way their bodies are braced (the bracing allows the top to vibrate while still keeping it stable).

LL-TA.

FG-TA.

The LL-TA has a solid Engelmann spruce top that’s been treated with a Yamaha process called A.R.E. (Acoustic Resonance Enhancement). One reason why vintage acoustic guitars can be so highly prized is that the tone produced by many woods tends to get richer over time. A.R.E. aims to replicate that quality in a new instrument. The LL-TA has a rosewood back and sides, and its bracing is non-scalloped, meaning that the pieces of wood used to brace the top are fairly uniform in their dimensions; these features equal a brighter, more direct sound. (Here’s a video of the LL-TA in action.)

The FG-TA has a solid spruce top (with no A.R.E. treatment), a mahogany back and sides, and scalloped bracing. Mahogany tends to impart a dark tone, and scalloped bracing — created by shaving away or even simply removing parts of the wood braces inside the instrument — allows the top to vibrate more, creating a kind of halo around notes and chords. The result is a deeper sound; one might even call it a little mysterious.

LS-TA and FS-TA

Concert-size models are my personal favorite type of acoustic guitar. Their bodies are smaller than standard size, and they’re more suited for music that’s intricate and detailed. Bluegrass, blues and folk players — particularly guitarists who like to fingerpick — often have a special relationship with concert-size acoustics.

Yamaha makes two concert TransAcoustics: the LS-TA and the FS-TA. The differences between them are the same as those between the LL-TA and the FG-TA: Engelmann spruce top with A.R.E. versus standard spruce top, rosewood versus mahogany back and sides, and non-scalloped versus scalloped bracing. The bodies of both instruments are about an inch shorter than their standard-size counterparts.

LS-TA.

FS-TA.

CSF-TA

A parlor guitar is even smaller than a concert-size guitar. Considerably smaller, in fact — the fingerboard of the CSF-TA is 23 5/8″ long, as opposed to just over 25″ on all other TransAcoustic models, and the instrument’s total length is 37″, at least two inches shorter than any other TransAcoustic. As you’d probably expect, the sound produced by a parlor guitar is more intimate than that of its larger brethren. If you’ve got big hands, the CSF-TA may not be for you, but if you prefer your guitars quiet, cute and easily embraceable, there’s no better choice. Like the FS-TA, the CSF-TA has a solid spruce top and mahogany back and sides.

CG-TA

I generally encourage beginning guitarists to start out on a classical instrument, for two reasons: First, the nylon strings of a classical guitar are easier on the fingers than steel strings in the early stages (i.e., before you develop calluses), and second, the wider neck of a classical makes for an easier transition to a narrower neck characteristic of a steel-string guitar if and when you want to move on. Not that there’s any actual need to make the change; some players never want to stop playing classicals once they’ve started. Their deep, dark tone and roomier fingerboard make them ideal for classical repertoire, of course, as well as for Spanish flamenco, Brazilian bossa nova and American folk music. The CG-TA incorporates TA technology into a classical guitar. It has a spruce top, ovangkol back and sides, and a neck that’s only about 3/8″ thicker than steel-string TransAcoustic models.

No matter which of these instruments you choose, you’re bound to enjoy the array of tones they place at your disposal — not to mention the surprised reactions those tones may elicit from listeners. If you find that members of your audience start making furtive, puzzled glances around the room as you begin playing, my advice is to just give them a big smile … and keep playing. Chances are you’ll soon find your smile returned many times over!

Check out these related blog articles:

Discover Yamaha TransAcoustic Guitars

MJ Ultra and the FG-TA TransAcoustic Guitar

“Breaking Amish” With My Yamaha FG-TA

Her Name Is Ruby

A Musical Message of Healing

Slide Rules

Nylon TA on TV

How to Record TransAcoustic Guitar Effects

Click here for more information about Yamaha TransAcoustic guitars.

Delay, Part 2

Written by Mike Levine on July 1, 2020. Posted in Recording. 1 Comment on Delay, Part 2

In Part 1 of this two-part article, we covered basic delay parameters and talked about different delay types. In this article, we’ll present step-by-step setups for some common delay applications. Each includes a screenshot from Steinberg Cubase and/or various Cubase plug-ins showing a setting that you can use as a starting point. (Similar settings can be applied to delay plug-ins in other DAWs.)

Thickening

If you have a vocal or instrument track that sounds thin, you can use a delay to thicken it.

1. Insert a delay plug-in directly on the track.

2. If the plug-in offers EQ or filter controls, make sure they are turned off. The idea is to make the delayed signal sound as similar to the source as possible.

3. Set the delay time somewhere between 30ms and 50ms.

4. Leave the feedback at its lowest setting.

5. Set the mix control between 20% and 30% wet, and experiment from there. The interplay between the delay time and mix settings is the key to creating this effect.

Panned Doubling

This configuration allows you to create a short delay that’s panned to the opposite side from the original signal. You’ll find this especially useful on backing vocals or rhythm guitar, particularly when you can’t record an actual double-track — something that’s usually preferable due to the slight variations in timing and/or tuning.

1. Create an aux track (an FX Track in Cubase) and insert a mono delay plug-in on it.

2. Pan the plug-in’s output opposite that of the source track. If you’re applying this to a track that’s panned to the center, move it a bit towards one side and pan the delay opposite.

3. Set the delay time somewhere between about 40 and 50ms.

4. Leave the feedback at its lowest setting.

5. If you’re not hearing the double as a distinct sound, try inserting a pitch shift or chorus plug-in after the delay in the aux track to add a subtle change to the delayed track’s pitch. This helps differentiate it from the original and adds to the illusion of it being a separate part. You can also experiment with EQ settings to further change the sound of the double.

Screenshot. — *Panned doubling using the monodelay plug-in.*

Slapback Delay

As we mentioned in Part 1, slapback (sometimes called “slap”) delays were a big part of the vocals on rockabilly recordings made back in the ’50s. (They were also a big favorite of Beatle John Lennon.) These delays are long enough that you can hear a discrete, albeit very short echo. Depending on where you set the wet/dry control, they can help give body to a sound without being overly noticeable.

1. Insert a delay directly on your track. If it’s a mono track, use a mono delay. If it’s a stereo, use a stereo delay.

2. Set the delay time in the 50ms to 140ms neighborhood.

3. Use little or no feedback.

4. If you’re using a stereo delay, use its filters or EQ controls to differentiate the sonics of the two sides, and set the delay time for the left side slightly different from the right to enhance the stereo effect. Make one side about 4 or 5 milliseconds slower or faster than the other. If you’re using the slap on a lead vocal and the delay has pan controls, try setting the left side to around 3 o’clock and the right side at 9 o’clock to keep the vocal sounding relatively centered.

Screenshot of controls. — *Stereo slap delay using the stereodelay plug-in.*

Long Delay

Here’s another setup that lets you add space to a vocal or lead instrument. This technique works especially well on songs recorded to a click because you can turn on the sync option for the delay time and set it to a rhythmic value. If you didn’t record to a click, you can still apply this effect, but you’ll have to use your ears when setting the delay time. Google “Delay Time Calculator” to find online calculators that let you figure out approximate delay times for different rhythmic values, based on your starting tempo.

1. Put a delay (either mono or stereo) on an aux track with the wet/dry set at 100%.

2. Set the feedback so you get a few repeats, and experiment with long delay times, such as a quarter-note or even a half-note. If you want to make the effect more syncopated, try using dotted or triplet settings.

3. Use the plug-in’s filters to roll off both high end and low end so that the delay is less “hi-fi” than the original signal.

4. Keep the send reasonably low, so you’re getting subtle repeats that are mostly audible at the ends of vocal or instrumental lines.

Opposite-Panned “Ghost” Delay

If you have a soloing instrument such as lead guitar that’s panned to one side (either fully or partially), it can be cool to add a “ghost” delay that’s panned opposite and only faintly audible. It gives the track a subtle spaciousness that makes it sound fuller without seeming as if there’s an actual delay.

1. Set up a mono delay on an aux track.

2. Pan the aux track’s output to be opposite that of the source track. For example, if the source is at 3 o’clock, pan the delay to 9 o’clock.

3. Set the delay time relatively short, such as a sixteenth note.

4. Start with the aux channel’s volume off, and slowly bring it up during playback until you hear the delay only slightly.

5. If you want an obvious delay effect, turn the aux channel (or the send from the source channel) up higher.

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

Woman navigating HBO Max on living room television.

How to Maximize HBO Max™

Written by Ted Goslin on June 30, 2020. Posted in TV & Movies.

There’s no denying that in this era of video streaming services, content is king. With people watching movies and TV shows at a voracious rate, companies like Netflix^®, Hulu™ and Amazon Prime Video are obtaining as much content as possible for subscribers to consume.

In an effort to keep up with its competitors, cable TV giant HBO^® recently teamed up with WarnerMedia to establish HBO Max, providing double the amount of programming it previously had, with more than 10,000 titles already available. Aside from HBO’s original programming, new content includes blockbusters from the DC Comics and Harry Potter™ universes, along with popular shows like Friends, Doctor Who and The Big Bang Theory, among others.

Like other streaming platforms, HBO Max offers different ways to optimize audio and video for its content. Here are some tips on how to best configure those settings to get the most out of your HBO Max subscription and your gear.

Audio Settings

For the best audio (and video) quality, you’ll want to start by connecting all devices with an HDMI^® cable via the connection labeled “ARC”; this is especially important when using a sound bar or an AV receiver.

Depending on the device you’re using to stream content — whether it’s a smart TV, gaming console or a hardware add-on like Apple TV^®, Google Chromecast Ultra^® or Roku^® (among others) — there are different ways to configure your audio settings.

By default, HBO Max offers two-channel stereo at a minimum and Dolby Digital^® 5.1 as the maximum. Content that can be streamed in Dolby Digital is identified with a “5.1” symbol on the right side of the screen. Audio will automatically stream in whatever format you are currently using, which varies based on the audio device(s) you have installed in your home.

For example, if you are listening to audio through your TV’s speakers, you will hear content in two-channel stereo. But if you’re listening on a sound bar, audio is automatically optimized by all the speaker drivers built into the unit. The Yamaha YAS-109 sound bar offers six speaker drivers (including built-in subwoofers), as well as advanced features such as Clear Voice for enhanced dialogue clarity and DTS^® Virtual:X™ 3D surround sound to extend the audio beyond the capabilities of what two-channel TV speakers can reproduce.

An AV receiver expands your default audio options even further by allowing you to listen in a multitude of audio formats, sometimes also known as “sound programs.” The Yamaha AVENTAGE RX-A1080 AV receiver provides program options that include Spectacle, Sci-Fi, Adventure, and Enhanced; the latter creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic transitions of 3D object-based audio. To get around the hurdle of being limited to using only 5.1-channels, the RX-A1080 lets you optimize the audio with CINEMA DSP™ and Surround:AI™ artificial intelligence technology.

Apple TV Audio format screen. — *Apple TV Audio Format screen.*

Currently, HBO Max does not offer any way to alter the audio format through its app, but it does utilize whatever audio format you select on your streaming device. If you’re watching on an Apple TV, for instance, you can go to Settings > Video & Audio Format > Audio Format > Change Format and select Dolby Digital 5.1. If you notice audio issues in this format, try switching it to Stereo and see if that helps. (You can find more information at the HBO Max Help Center website.) For other devices (i.e. Roku, Google Chromecast™, etc.), the process is similar.

Video Settings

Even though HBO MAX does not currently support HDR (High Dynamic Range) or 4K UHD (Ultra High Definition) video, it does stream in high definition, and with an AV receiver capable of upscaling (such as the Yamaha RX-A1080), you can even watch movies in 4K UHD and higher.

Like other streaming platforms, the video quality adjusts based on your network bandwidth and internet connection speed, so you’ll want to have the highest connection speed possible. Most HBO Max content is available in HD (High Definition), as indicated by an “HD” symbol on the right side of the screen.

*Apple TV Video and Audio settings screen.*

As with audio settings, manual configuration of video settings is not currently available within the HBO Max app, but you can adjust these settings in whatever device you’re using to stream content. For example, when using an Apple TV, go to Settings and click on Resolution under VIDEO to change the format to the highest resolution possible, which is 1080p. You can also adjust frame rate and dynamic range settings if you have preferences for those; however, we recommend not adjusting them unless you are well versed in their impact on video quality. You can learn more about HBO Max video settings here.

Once optimized, the audio and video settings you make for viewing HBO Max content should make your home theater experience more enjoyable no matter what you’re watching. It may take a little tweaking to get to that point, but rest assured that it’s time well spent!

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out these related blog articles:

How to Recreate the Movie Theater Experience at Home

Comparing Streaming Service Audio and Video Quality

What’s the Difference Between 4K Ultra HD, 8K UHD and HDR10+?

How to Get the Best Audio from Netflix^®